S3 Family 8-Bit Microcontrollers
S3F8S28/S3F8S24
Product Specification
PS031306-0621
Copyright ©2021 Zilog®, Inc. All rights reserved.
www.zilog.com
S3F8S28/S3F8S24
Product Specification
ii
Warning: DO NOT USE THIS PRODUCT IN LIFE SUPPORT SYSTEMS.
LIFE SUPPORT POLICY
ZILOG’S PRODUCTS ARE NOT AUTHORIZED FOR USE AS CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN LIFE
SUPPORT DEVICES OR SYSTEMS WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF
THE PRESIDENT AND GENERAL COUNSEL OF ZILOG CORPORATION.
As used herein
Life support devices or systems are devices which (a) are intended for surgical implant into the body, or (b)
support or sustain life and whose failure to perform when properly used in accordance with instructions for
use provided in the labeling can be reasonably expected to result in a significant injury to the user. A critical component is any component in a life support device or system whose failure to perform can be reasonably expected to cause the failure of the life support device or system or to affect its safety or effectiveness.
Document Disclaimer
©2021 Zilog, Inc. All rights reserved. Information in this publication concerning the devices, applications,
or technology described is intended to suggest possible uses and may be superseded. ZILOG, INC. DOES
NOT ASSUME LIABILITY FOR OR PROVIDE A REPRESENTATION OF ACCURACY OF THE
INFORMATION, DEVICES, OR TECHNOLOGY DESCRIBED IN THIS DOCUMENT. ZILOG ALSO
DOES NOT ASSUME LIABILITY FOR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT RELATED
IN ANY MANNER TO USE OF INFORMATION, DEVICES, OR TECHNOLOGY DESCRIBED
HEREIN OR OTHERWISE. The information contained within this document has been verified according
to the general principles of electrical and mechanical engineering.
S3 and Z8 are trademarks or registered trademarks of Zilog, Inc. All other product or service names are the
property of their respective owners.
PS031306-0621
S3F8S28/S3F8S24
Product Specification
iii
Revision History
Each instance in this document’s revision history reflects a change from its previous edition. For more details, refer to the corresponding page(s) or appropriate links furnished in
the table below.
Date
Revision
Level
Description
Page
June
2021
06
Updated IDD1 for Run Mode at 0.5MHz.
Updated logo.
19-1
All
Oct
2017
05
Added Zilog Library-based Development Platform and updated to most
current 3rd party tools.
Removed ‘Preliminary’ from footer.
CH 21
All
Jan
2015
04
Modified P0.0 and P0.1 descriptions in Figures 1-1 through 1-3 and Table 1-2 1-5,
to include SCLK and SDAT values, respectively.
1-6,
1-7,
1-9
Jan
2015
03
Updated the Third Parties for Development Tools section.
Apr
2014
02
8-1,
Modifled language in nRESET pin statement, 2nd paragraph of 8.1 System
Reset section; corrected misspelling in Figure 8-1; corrected superscript error 8-2,
19-5
in Table 19-5; corrected erroneous note, Figure 19-4.
19-6
Aug
2013
01
Original Zilog issue.
n/a
May
2012
1.1
Deleted P2.5 and P2.4 open-drain output functions.
n/a
May
2011
1.0
Released version V1.0.
n/a
PS031306-0621
22-9
Revision History
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents....................................................................................................................................................... 1
List of Figures ............................................................................................................................................................ 8
List of Tables ............................................................................................................................................................ 12
List of Examples ....................................................................................................................................................... 14
1 Product Overview................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 S3C8/S3F8 Series Microcontrollers ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Microcontroller ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Features ................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 Block Diagram .......................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.6 Pin Descriptions ....................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.7 Pin Circuits ............................................................................................................................................. 1-10
2 Address Spaces ................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Program Memory (ROM).......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.1 Normal Operating Mode ................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 Smart Option ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Register Architecture................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.3.1 Register Page Pointer (PP) .............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.3.2 Register Set 1 ................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.3 Register Set 2 ................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.4 Prime Register Space ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.5 Working Registers ............................................................................................................................ 2-9
2.3.6 Using the Register Pointers ............................................................................................................ 2-10
2.4 Register Addressing ............................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.1 Common Working Register Area (C0H to CFH) ............................................................................. 2-14
2.4.2 4-Bit Working Register Addressing ................................................................................................. 2-15
2.4.3 8-Bit Working Register Addressing ................................................................................................. 2-17
2.5 System and User Stacks ........................................................................................................................ 2-19
2.5.1 Stack Operations ............................................................................................................................ 2-19
2.5.2 User-Defined Stacks ....................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.5.3 Stack Pointers (SPL) ...................................................................................................................... 2-19
3 Addressing Modes ............................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Register Addressing Mode (R) ................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Indirect Register Addressing Mode (IR) ................................................................................................... 3-3
3.4 Indexed Addressing Mode (X).................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.5 Direct Address Mode (DA) ..................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.6 Indirect Address Mode (IA) .................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.7 Relative Address Mode (RA).................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.8 Immediate Mode (IM) ............................................................................................................................. 3-14
PS031305-1017
i
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table of Contents
4 Control Registers ................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 ADCON ............................................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.1.2 BTCON ............................................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.1.3 CLKCON ........................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.1.4 EMT .................................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.1.5 FLAGS ............................................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.1.6 FMCON ........................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.1.7 FMSECH ......................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.1.8 FMSECL ......................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.1.9 FMUSR ........................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.1.10 ICCR ............................................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.1.11 ICSR ............................................................................................................................................. 4-14
4.1.12 IMR ............................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.1.13 IPH ................................................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.1.14 IPL ................................................................................................................................................. 4-16
4.1.15 IPR ................................................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.1.16 IRQ ................................................................................................................................................ 4-18
4.1.17 LVDCON ....................................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.1.18 P0CONH ....................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.1.19 P0CONL........................................................................................................................................ 4-21
4.1.20 P0PND .......................................................................................................................................... 4-22
4.1.21 P0PUR .......................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.1.22 P1CON.......................................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.1.23 P2CONH ....................................................................................................................................... 4-26
4.1.24 P2CONL........................................................................................................................................ 4-27
4.1.25 P2PUR .......................................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.1.26 P3CON.......................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.1.27 P3PND .......................................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.1.28 PP ................................................................................................................................................. 4-31
4.1.29 PWM0CON ................................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.1.30 PWM1CON ................................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.1.31 PWM0EX ...................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.1.32 PWM1EX ...................................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.1.33 RESETID ...................................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.1.34 ROSCCON.................................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.1.35 RP0 ............................................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.1.36 RP1 ............................................................................................................................................... 4-37
4.1.37 SPL ............................................................................................................................................... 4-37
4.1.38 STOPCON .................................................................................................................................... 4-37
4.1.39 SYM .............................................................................................................................................. 4-38
4.1.40 T1CON .......................................................................................................................................... 4-39
4.1.41 T1PS ............................................................................................................................................. 4-40
4.1.42 TACON ......................................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.1.43 TBCON ......................................................................................................................................... 4-42
4.1.44 UARTCON .................................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.1.45 UARTPND..................................................................................................................................... 4-44
4.1.46 WDTCON ...................................................................................................................................... 4-45
5 Interrupt Structure ................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Levels................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 Vectors .............................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.3 Sources ............................................................................................................................................. 5-1
PS031305-1017
ii
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table of Contents
5.2 Interrupt Types ......................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Interrupt Structure .................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.1 Interrupt Vector Addresses ............................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.2 Enable/Disable Interrupt Instructions (EI, DI) ................................................................................... 5-4
5.4 System-Level Interrupt Control Registers ................................................................................................ 5-5
5.5 Interrupt Processing Control Points ......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.6 Peripheral Interrupt Control Registers ..................................................................................................... 5-7
5.7 System Mode Register (SYM).................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.8 Interrupt Mask Register (IMR) .................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.9 Interrupt Priority Register (IPR) .............................................................................................................. 5-10
5.10 Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) ......................................................................................................... 5-12
5.11 Interrupt Pending Function Types ........................................................................................................ 5-13
5.11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.11.2 Pending Bits Cleared Automatically by Hardware ........................................................................ 5-13
5.11.3 Pending Bits Cleared by the Service Routine............................................................................... 5-13
5.12 Interrupt Source Polling Sequence ...................................................................................................... 5-14
5.13 Interrupt Service Routines.................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.14 Generating Interrupt Vector Addresses ............................................................................................... 5-15
5.15 Nesting of Vectored Interrupts ............................................................................................................. 5-15
5.16 Instruction Pointer (IP) ......................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.17 Fast Interrupt Processing ..................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.18 Procedure for Initiating Fast Interrupts ................................................................................................. 5-16
5.19 Fast Interrupt Service Routine ............................................................................................................. 5-16
5.20 Relationship to Interrupt Pending Bit Types......................................................................................... 5-17
5.21 Programming Guidelines...................................................................................................................... 5-17
6 Instruction Set ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 Data Types........................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Register Addressing ......................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Addressing Modes ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Flags Register (FLAGS) ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.1 Flag Descriptions .............................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.3 Instruction Set Notation ............................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.4 Condition Codes ..................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.5 Instruction Descriptions .......................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.1 ADC (Add with Carry) ..................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.5.2 ADD (Add)....................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.5.3 AND (Logical AND) ......................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.5.4 BAND (Bit AND) .............................................................................................................................. 6-16
6.5.5 BCP (Bit Compare) ......................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.5.6 BITC (Bit Complement) ................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.5.7 BITR (Bit Reset) .............................................................................................................................. 6-19
6.5.8 BITS (Bit Set) .................................................................................................................................. 6-20
6.5.9 BOR (Bit OR) .................................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.5.10 BTJRF (Bit Test, Jump Relative on False) ................................................................................... 6-22
6.5.11 BTJRT (Bit Test, Jump Relative on True) ..................................................................................... 6-23
6.5.12 BXOR (Bit XOR) ........................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.5.13 CALL (Call Procedure).................................................................................................................. 6-25
6.5.14 CCF (Complement Carry Flag) ..................................................................................................... 6-26
6.5.15 CLR (Clear) ................................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.5.16 COM (Complement) ...................................................................................................................... 6-28
6.5.17 CP (Compare) ............................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.5.18 CPIJE (Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal) ...................................................................... 6-30
PS031305-1017
iii
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table of Contents
6.5.19 CPIJNE (Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal) ............................................................ 6-31
6.5.20 DA (Decimal Adjust) ..................................................................................................................... 6-32
6.5.21 DEC (Decrement) ......................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.5.22 DECW (Decrement Word) ............................................................................................................ 6-35
6.5.23 DI (Disable Interrupts) ................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.5.24 DIV (Divide-Unsigned) .................................................................................................................. 6-37
6.5.25 DJNZ (Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero).................................................................................... 6-38
6.5.26 EI (Enable Interrupts) .................................................................................................................... 6-39
6.5.27 ENTER (Enter) .............................................................................................................................. 6-40
6.5.28 EXIT (Exit)..................................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.5.29 IDLE (Idle Operation) .................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.5.30 INC (Increment) ............................................................................................................................ 6-43
6.5.31 INCW (Increment Word) ............................................................................................................... 6-44
6.5.32 IRET (Interrupt Return) ................................................................................................................. 6-45
6.5.33 JP (Jump)...................................................................................................................................... 6-46
6.5.34 JR (Jump Relative) ....................................................................................................................... 6-47
6.5.35 LD (Load) ...................................................................................................................................... 6-48
6.5.36 LDB (Load Bit) .............................................................................................................................. 6-49
6.5.37 LDC/LDE (Load Memory) ............................................................................................................. 6-50
6.5.38 LDCD/LDED (Load Memory and Decrement) .............................................................................. 6-52
6.5.39 LDCI/LDEI (Load Memory and Increment) ................................................................................... 6-53
6.5.40 LDCPD/LDEPD (Load Memory with Pre-Decrement) .................................................................. 6-54
6.5.41 LDCPI/LDEPI (Load Memory with Pre-Increment) ....................................................................... 6-55
6.5.42 LDW (Load Word) ......................................................................................................................... 6-56
6.5.43 MULT (Multiply-Unsigned) ............................................................................................................ 6-57
6.5.44 NEXT (Next).................................................................................................................................. 6-58
6.5.45 NOP (No Operation) ..................................................................................................................... 6-59
6.5.46 OR (Logical OR) ........................................................................................................................... 6-60
6.5.47 POP (Pop from Stack) .................................................................................................................. 6-61
6.5.48 POPUD (Pop User Stack-Decrementing) ..................................................................................... 6-62
6.5.49 POPUI (Pop User Stack-Incrementing) ........................................................................................ 6-63
6.5.50 PUSH (Push to Stack) .................................................................................................................. 6-64
6.5.51 PUSHUD (Push User Stack-Decrementing)................................................................................. 6-65
6.5.52 PUSHUI (Push User Stack-Incrementing) .................................................................................... 6-66
6.5.53 RCF (Reset Carry Flag) ................................................................................................................ 6-67
6.5.54 RET (Return)................................................................................................................................. 6-68
6.5.55 RL (Rotate Left) ............................................................................................................................ 6-69
6.5.56 RLC (Rotate Left Through Carry) ................................................................................................. 6-70
6.5.57 RR (Rotate Right) ......................................................................................................................... 6-71
6.5.58 RRC (Rotate Right Through Carry) .............................................................................................. 6-72
6.5.59 SB0 (Select Bank 0) ..................................................................................................................... 6-73
6.5.60 SB1 (Select Bank 1) ..................................................................................................................... 6-74
6.5.61 SBC (Subtract with Carry) ............................................................................................................ 6-75
6.5.62 SCF (Set Carry Flag) .................................................................................................................... 6-76
6.5.63 SRA (Shift Right Arithmetic) ......................................................................................................... 6-77
6.5.64 SRP/SRP0/SRP1 (Set Register Pointer) ...................................................................................... 6-78
6.5.65 STOP (Stop Operation) ................................................................................................................ 6-79
6.5.66 SUB (Subtract) .............................................................................................................................. 6-80
6.5.67 SWAP (Swap Nibbles) .................................................................................................................. 6-81
6.5.68 TCM (Test Complement under Mask) .......................................................................................... 6-82
6.5.69 TM (Test under Mask) .................................................................................................................. 6-83
6.5.70 WFI (Wait for Interrupt) ................................................................................................................. 6-84
6.5.71 XOR (Logical Exclusive OR)......................................................................................................... 6-85
PS031305-1017
iv
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table of Contents
7 Clock Circuit ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Main Oscillator Logic ................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3 Clock Status During Power-Down Modes ................................................................................................ 7-2
7.4 System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) .............................................................................................. 7-3
7.5 Ring Oscillator Control Register (ROSCCON) ......................................................................................... 7-4
8 RESET and Power-Down .................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 System Reset ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 External RESET Pin ......................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 MCU Initialization Sequence............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2 Power-Down Modes ................................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.1 Stop Mode......................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.2 Sources to Release Stop Mode ........................................................................................................ 8-5
8.2.3 Idle Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3 Hardware Reset Values ........................................................................................................................... 8-7
9 I/O Ports ............................................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Port Data Registers .................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.2.1 Port 0 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-3
9.2.2 Port 1 ................................................................................................................................................ 9-8
9.2.3 Port 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.2.4 Port 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 9-14
10 Basic Timer and Timer 0 .................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 Module Overview ................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Basic Timer (BT) ........................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Timer 0 .......................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Basic Timer (BT) .................................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.2.1 Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON) ........................................................................................ 10-2
10.2.2 Basic Timer Function Description ................................................................................................. 10-3
10.3 One 16-Bit Timer Mode (Timer 0) ........................................................................................................ 10-7
10.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.3.2 Function Description ..................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.3.3 Block Diagram............................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.4 Two 8-Bit Timers Mode (Timer A and B) ........................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.2 Function Description ................................................................................................................... 10-11
11 16-Bit Timer 1 .................................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.2.1 Timer 1 Interrupts ......................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2 Timer 1 Overflow Interrupt ............................................................................................................ 11-2
11.2.3 Interval Mode (Match) ................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.4 Capture Mode ............................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.3 Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON) ...................................................................................................... 11-4
12 Watchdog Timer............................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................................ 12-2
PS031305-1017
v
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table of Contents
12.2.1 Watchdog Interrupt ....................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.2 Release Stop ................................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.2.3 System Reset................................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.3 Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTCON) .................................................................................... 12-3
12.4 Interrupt ................................................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.5 System Reset ....................................................................................................................................... 12-7
12.6 Interrupt & System Reset ..................................................................................................................... 12-8
13 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) ....................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................................ 13-2
13.2.1 PWM ............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.2.2 PWM Counter ............................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2.3 PWM Data and Extension Registers ............................................................................................ 13-2
13.2.4 PWM Clock Rate........................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.2.5 PWM Function Description ........................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2.6 PWM Output Waveform ................................................................................................................ 13-5
13.3 PWM Control Register (PWM0CON/PWM1CON) ............................................................................. 13-11
13.4 PWM Extension Register (PWM0EX/PWM1EX) ............................................................................... 13-12
14 A/D Converter .................................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2 Using A/D Pins for Standard digital Input ............................................................................................. 14-2
14.3 A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON) ........................................................................................... 14-2
14.4 Internal Reference Voltage Levels ....................................................................................................... 14-4
14.5 Conversion timing ................................................................................................................................ 14-6
14.6 Internal A/D Conversion Procedure ..................................................................................................... 14-7
15 UART ............................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.1.1 Programming Procedure............................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.2 UART Control Register (UARTCON) ............................................................................................ 15-2
15.1.3 UART Interrupt Pending Register (UARTPND) ............................................................................ 15-3
15.1.4 UART Data Register (UDATA) ..................................................................................................... 15-4
15.1.5 UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA) ................................................................................. 15-4
15.1.6 Baud Rate Calculations ................................................................................................................ 15-5
15.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.2.1 UART Mode 0 Function Description ............................................................................................. 15-7
15.2.2 UART Mode 1 Function Description ............................................................................................. 15-8
15.2.3 UART Mode 2 Function Description ............................................................................................. 15-9
15.2.4 UART Mode 3 Function Description ........................................................................................... 15-10
15.2.5 Serial Communication for Multiprocessor Configurations .......................................................... 15-11
16 IIC Bus Interface .............................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.1 Multi-Master IIC Bus Control Register (ICCR) .............................................................................. 16-2
16.1.2 Multi-Master IIC Bus Control/Status Register (ICSR) ................................................................... 16-4
16.1.3 Multi-Master IIC Bus Transmit/Receive Data Shift Register (IDSR) ............................................. 16-5
16.1.4 Multi-Master IIC Bus Address Register (IAR) ............................................................................... 16-6
16.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................................... 16-7
16.3 The IIC Bus Interface ........................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.4 Start and Stop Conditions .................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.5 Data Transfer Formats ....................................................................................................................... 16-10
16.6 ACK Signal Transmission .................................................................................................................. 16-11
PS031305-1017
vi
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table of Contents
16.7 Read/Write Operations....................................................................................................................... 16-14
16.8 Bus Arbitration Procedures ................................................................................................................ 16-14
16.9 Abort Conditions ................................................................................................................................. 16-14
16.10 Configuring the IIC-Bus .................................................................................................................... 16-14
17 Low Voltage Detector....................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 17-1
17.2 Low Voltage Detector Control Register (LVDCON) ............................................................................. 17-2
17.3 Voltage (VDD) Level Detection Sequence-LVD Usage ....................................................................... 17-4
18 Embedded Flash Memory Interface................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1.1 Flash ROM Configuration ............................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1.2 Tool Program Mode ...................................................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.3 User Program Mode ..................................................................................................................... 18-2
18.2 Flash Memory Control Registers (User Program Mode) ..................................................................... 18-3
18.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) ................................................................................... 18-3
18.2.2 Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) ..................................................... 18-3
18.2.3 Flash Memory Sector Address Registers ..................................................................................... 18-4
18.3 ISPTM (On-Board Programming) Sector ............................................................................................... 18-5
18.3.1 ISP Reset Vector and ISP Sector Size ......................................................................................... 18-6
18.4 Sector Erase......................................................................................................................................... 18-7
18.5 Programming ........................................................................................................................................ 18-9
18.6 Reading .............................................................................................................................................. 18-14
18.7 Hard Lock Protection.......................................................................................................................... 18-15
19 Electrical Data .................................................................................................................................................. 19-1
19.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 19-1
20 Mechanical Data .............................................................................................................................................. 20-1
20.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 20-1
21 Flash MCU ....................................................................................................................................................... 21-1
21.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 21-1
21.2 On Board Writing .................................................................................................................................. 21-4
22 Development Tools .......................................................................................................................................... 22-6
22.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 22-6
22.2 Emulator-based Development System ................................................................................................ 22-6
22.2.1 Host Software ............................................................................................................................... 22-7
22.2.2 Target Boards ............................................................................................................................... 22-7
22.2.3 SMDS2+ Selection (SAM8) ........................................................................................................ 22-10
22.3 Zilog Library-based Development Platform........................................................................................ 22-14
22.3.1 Zilog Developer Platform Components ....................................................................................... 22-14
22.3.2 Compatibility with 3rd Party Tools ............................................................................................... 22-16
22.3.3 Benefits and Limitations of Zilog Development Tools................................................................. 22-16
22.3.4 Development Tools ..................................................................................................................... 22-16
PS031305-1017
vii
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure
Number
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Figure 1-7
Figure 1-8
Figure 1-9
Figure 1-10
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 4-1
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Title
Page
Number
Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Pin Assignment Diagram (24-Pin SOP Package) ............................................................................. 1-6
Pin Assignment Diagram (24-Pin DIP/SOP/SSOP Package)........................................................... 1-7
Pin Circuit Type A ........................................................................................................................... 1-10
Pin Circuit Type B ........................................................................................................................... 1-10
Pin Circuit Type C ........................................................................................................................... 1-10
Pin Circuit Type D ........................................................................................................................... 1-11
Pin Circuit Type E ........................................................................................................................... 1-11
Pin Circuit Type E-1 ........................................................................................................................ 1-12
Pin Circuit Type E-2 ...................................................................................................................... 1-12
Program Memory Address Space ..................................................................................................... 2-2
Smart Option ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Internal Register File Organization ................................................................................................... 2-6
Register Page Pointer (PP)............................................................................................................... 2-7
Set 1, Set 2 and Prime Area Register Map....................................................................................... 2-8
8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices) ........................................................................................... 2-9
Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block .................................................................................. 2-10
Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block .......................................................................... 2-11
16-Bit Register Pair ......................................................................................................................... 2-12
Register File Addressing ............................................................................................................... 2-13
Common Working Register Area .................................................................................................. 2-14
4-Bit Working Register Addressing ............................................................................................... 2-16
4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example ................................................................................ 2-16
8-Bit Working Register Addressing ............................................................................................... 2-17
8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example ................................................................................ 2-18
Stack Operations .......................................................................................................................... 2-19
Register Addressing .......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Working Register Addressing ........................................................................................................... 3-2
Indirect Register Addressing to Register File ................................................................................... 3-3
Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory ............................................................................ 3-4
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File ..................................................................... 3-5
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory................................................. 3-6
Indexed Addressing to Register File ................................................................................................. 3-7
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset................................................. 3-8
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory ............................................................................ 3-9
Direct Addressing for Load Instructions ........................................................................................ 3-10
Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions ......................................................................... 3-11
Indirect Addressing ....................................................................................................................... 3-12
Relative Addressing ...................................................................................................................... 3-13
Immediate Addressing .................................................................................................................. 3-14
Register Description Format ............................................................................................................. 4-5
S3C8/S3F8 Series Interrupt Types ................................................................................................... 5-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Interrupt Structure ............................................................................................. 5-3
ROM Vector Address Area ............................................................................................................... 5-4
PS031305-1017
viii
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 6-1
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 8-1
Figure 8-2
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
Figure 9-1
Figure 9-2
Figure 9-3
Figure 9-4
Figure 9-5
Figure 9-6
Figure 9-7
Figure 9-8
Figure 9-9
Figure 9-10
Figure 9-11
Figure 9-12
Figure 9-13
Figure 9-14
Figure 9-15
Figure 10-1
Figure 10-2
Figure 10-3
Figure 10-4
Figure 10-5
Figure 10-6
Figure 10-7
Figure 10-8
Figure 10-9
Figure 11-1
Figure 11-2
Figure 11-3
Figure 11-4
Figure 11-5
Figure 11-6
Figure 11-7
Figure 12-1
Figure 12-2
Figure 12-3
Figure 12-4
Figure 12-5
Figure 13-1
Figure 13-2
Figure 13-3
List of Figures
Interrupt Function Diagram ............................................................................................................... 5-6
System Mode Register (SYM) .......................................................................................................... 5-8
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)........................................................................................................... 5-9
Interrupt Request Priority Groups ................................................................................................... 5-10
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)....................................................................................................... 5-11
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ) .................................................................................................... 5-12
System Flags Register (FLAGS)....................................................................................................... 6-5
Main Oscillator Circuit (Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator) .......................................................................... 7-1
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON) ...................................................................................... 7-3
Ring Oscillator Control Register (ROSCCON).................................................................................. 7-4
Stop Control Register (STOPCON) .................................................................................................. 7-4
System Clock Circuit Diagram .......................................................................................................... 7-5
Low Voltage Reset Circuit................................................................................................................. 8-2
Recommended External Reset Circuit .............................................................................................. 8-3
Reset Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 8-4
Timing for S3F8S28/S3F8S24 After Reset ....................................................................................... 8-4
Port Data Register Format ................................................................................................................ 9-2
Port 0 Circuit Diagram ....................................................................................................................... 9-3
Port 0 Control Register (P0CONH, High Byte) ................................................................................. 9-4
Port 0 Control Register (P0CONL, Low Byte)................................................................................... 9-5
Port 0 Interrupt Pending Registers (P0PND) .................................................................................... 9-6
Port 0 Pull-Up Resistor Enable Registers (P0PUR) ......................................................................... 9-7
Port 1 Circuit Diagram ....................................................................................................................... 9-8
Port 1 Control Register (P1CON) ..................................................................................................... 9-9
Port 2 Circuit Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 9-10
Port 2 Control Register (P2CONH, High Byte) ............................................................................. 9-11
Port 2 Control Register (P2CONL, Low Byte)............................................................................... 9-12
Port 2 Open-Drain Output Mode Register (P2PUR) ..................................................................... 9-13
Port 3 Circuit Diagram................................................................................................................... 9-14
Port 3 Control Register (P3CON) ................................................................................................. 9-15
Port 3 Interrupt Pending Register (P3PND) .................................................................................. 9-16
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON) ........................................................................................ 10-2
Oscillation Stabilization Time on RESET ...................................................................................... 10-4
Oscillation Stabilization Time on Stop Mode Release .................................................................. 10-5
Timer 0 Control Register (TACON) ............................................................................................... 10-8
Timer 0 Timing Diagram ............................................................................................................... 10-9
Timer 0 Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 10-10
Timer A Control Register (TACON) ............................................................................................ 10-12
Timer B Control Register (TBCON) ............................................................................................ 10-13
Timer A and B Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 10-14
Simplified Timer 1 Function Diagram: Interval Mode .................................................................... 11-2
Simplified Timer 1 Function Diagram: Capture Mode ................................................................... 11-3
Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON) ............................................................................................... 11-5
Timer 1 Prescaler Register (T1PS) ............................................................................................... 11-6
Timer 1 Data Register High (T1DATAH) ...................................................................................... 11-6
Timer 1 Data Register Low (T1DATAL) ........................................................................................ 11-6
Timer 1 Functional Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 11-7
Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTCON) ............................................................................. 12-4
Watchdog Timer Functional Block Diagram ................................................................................. 12-5
Interrupt Operation Sequence....................................................................................................... 12-6
System Reset Operation Sequence ............................................................................................. 12-7
Interrupt & System Reset Operation Sequence............................................................................ 12-8
PWM Data and Extension Registers ............................................................................................ 13-3
PWM Basic Waveform (6-Bit Base) .............................................................................................. 13-5
Extended PWM Waveform (6-Bit Base + 6-Bit Extension) ........................................................... 13-6
PS031305-1017
ix
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Figure 13-4
Figure 13-5
Figure 13-6
Figure 13-7
Figure 13-8
Figure 13-9
Figure 13-10
Figure 13-11
Figure 14-1
Figure 14-2
Figure 14-3
Figure 14-4
Figure 14-5
Figure 15-1
Figure 15-2
Figure 15-3
Figure 15-4
Figure 15-5
Figure 15-6
Figure 15-7
Figure 15-8
Figure 15-9
Figure 15-10
Figure 16-1
Figure 16-2
Figure 16-3
Figure 16-4
Figure 16-5
Figure 16-6
Figure 16-7
Figure 16-8
Figure 16-9
Figure 16-10
Figure 16-11
Figure 16-12
Figure 17-1
Figure 17-2
Figure 18-1
Figure 18-2
Figure 18-3
Figure 18-4
Figure 18-5
Figure 18-6
Figure 18-7
Figure 18-8
Figure 18-9
Figure 19-1
Figure 19-2
Figure 19-3
Figure 19-4
Figure 19-5
Figure 19-6
Figure 19-7
Figure 20-1
Figure 20-2
PS031305-1017
List of Figures
PWM Basic Waveform (6-Bit Base) .............................................................................................. 13-7
Extended PWM Waveform (6-Bit Base + 2-Bit Extension) ........................................................... 13-8
PWM Basic Waveform (8-Bit Base) .............................................................................................. 13-9
PWM Basic Waveform (8-Bit Base + 6-Bit Extension) ............................................................... 13-10
PWM Control Register (PWM0CON, PWM1CON) ..................................................................... 13-11
PWM Extension Register (PWM0EX, PWM0EX) ....................................................................... 13-12
PWM Data Register (PWM0DATA PWM1DATA) ..................................................................... 13-12
PWM/Capture Module Functional Block Diagram .................................................................... 13-13
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON).................................................................................... 14-3
A/D Converter Circuit Diagram ..................................................................................................... 14-4
A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATAH/L) ................................................................................ 14-4
A/D Converter Timing Diagram ..................................................................................................... 14-5
Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy ......................................... 14-7
UART Control Register (UARTCON) ............................................................................................ 15-2
UART Interrupt Pending Register (UARTPND) ............................................................................ 15-3
UART Data Register (UDATA)...................................................................................................... 15-4
UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA) ................................................................................. 15-4
UART Functional Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 15-6
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 0 Operation............................................................................... 15-7
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 1 Operation............................................................................... 15-8
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 2 Operation............................................................................... 15-9
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 3 Operation............................................................................. 15-10
Connection Example for Multiprocessor Serial Data Communications .................................... 15-12
Multi-Master IIC Bus Control Register (ICCR) .............................................................................. 16-2
Multi-Master IIC Bus Control/Status Register (ICSR) ................................................................... 16-4
Multi-Master IIC Bus Tx/Rx Data Shift Register (IDSR) ............................................................... 16-5
Multi-Master IIC Bus Address Register (IAR) ............................................................................... 16-6
IIC Bus Block Diagram .................................................................................................................. 16-7
Start and Stop Conditions ............................................................................................................. 16-8
Input Data Protocol ....................................................................................................................... 16-9
Interrupt Pending Information ....................................................................................................... 16-9
IIC Bus Interface Data Formats .................................................................................................. 16-10
Acknowledge Response from Receiver .................................................................................... 16-11
Write Operation Sequence........................................................................................................ 16-12
Read Operation Sequence ....................................................................................................... 16-13
LVD Control Register (LVDCON) ................................................................................................. 17-2
Block Diagram for Low Voltage Detector ...................................................................................... 17-3
Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) ................................................................................... 18-3
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) ..................................................... 18-3
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECH) .................................................................... 18-4
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECL) ..................................................................... 18-4
Program Memory Address Space ................................................................................................. 18-5
Sector configurations in User Program Mode ............................................................................... 18-7
Sector Erase Flowchart in User Program Mode ........................................................................... 18-8
Byte Program Flowchart in a User Program Mode ..................................................................... 18-10
Program Flowchart in a User Program Mode ............................................................................. 18-11
Input Timing Measurement Points ................................................................................................ 19-4
Operating Voltage Range ............................................................................................................. 19-5
Schmitt Trigger Input Characteristics Diagram ............................................................................. 19-6
Stop Mode Release Timing When Initiated by a RESET ............................................................. 19-6
Waveform for UART Timing Characteristics ................................................................................. 19-7
LVR Reset Timing ......................................................................................................................... 19-9
The Circuit Diagram to Improve EFT Characteristics ................................................................. 19-10
24-SOP-375 Package Dimensions ............................................................................................... 20-1
24-TSSOP-BD44 Package Dimensions ....................................................................................... 20-2
x
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Figure 20-3
Figure 20-4
Figure 20-5
Figure 21-1
Figure 21-2
Figure 21-3
Figure 22-1
Figure 22-2
Figure 22-3
Figure 22-4
Figure 22-5
Figure 22-6
Figure 22-7
PS031305-1017
List of Figures
20-DIP-300A Package Dimensions .............................................................................................. 20-3
20-SOP-375 Package Dimensions ............................................................................................... 20-4
20-SSOP-225 Package Dimensions............................................................................................. 20-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Pin Assignments (24-DIP/24-SOP) .............................................................. 21-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Pin Assignments (20-DIP/20-SOP/20-SSOP) .............................................. 21-2
PCB Design Guide for on Board Programming ............................................................................ 21-4
Emulator-based Development System Configuration ................................................................... 22-6
TB8S19/8S28/8S39 Target Board Configuration ......................................................................... 22-8
DIP Switch for Smart Option ....................................................................................................... 22-12
24-Pin Connector for TB8S19/8S28/8S39 .................................................................................. 22-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Probe Adapter for 24 Pin Package ............................................................. 22-13
Zilog Development Platform........................................................................................................ 22-14
PCB Design Guide for In System Programming ......................................................................... 22-15
xi
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table
Number
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 2-1
Table 4-1
Table 4-2
Table 4-3
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 6-1
Table 6-2
Table 6-3
Table 6-4
Table 6-5
Table 6-6
Table 6-7
Table 8-1
Table 8-2
Table 8-3
Table 9-1
Table 9-2
Table 12-1
Table 13-1
Table 13-2
Table 13-3
Table 13-4
Table 15-1
Table 16-1
Table 18-1
Table 18-2
Table 18-3
Table 19-1
Table 19-2
Table 19-3
Table 19-4
Table 19-5
Table 19-6
Table 19-7
Table 19-8
Table 19-9
Table 19-10
Table 19-11
Table 19-12
Table 21-1
Table 21-2
Title
Page
Number
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Pin Descriptions ................................................................................................. 1-8
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the Flash ROM ................................................................. 1-9
Register Type Summary .................................................................................................................... 2-5
System and Peripheral Control Registers, Set1 ................................................................................ 4-2
System and Peripheral Control Registers, Set1, Bank0 .................................................................... 4-3
System and Peripheral Control Registers, Set1, Bank1 .................................................................... 4-4
Interrupt Control Register Overview ................................................................................................... 5-5
Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers ..................................................................................... 5-7
Instruction Group Summary ............................................................................................................... 6-2
Flag Notation Conventions ................................................................................................................. 6-7
Instruction Set Symbols ..................................................................................................................... 6-7
Instruction Notation Conventions ....................................................................................................... 6-8
OPCODE Quick Reference ................................................................................................................ 6-9
OPCODE Quick Reference .............................................................................................................. 6-10
Condition Codes ............................................................................................................................... 6-11
Register Values After a Reset, Set1 .................................................................................................. 8-7
Register Values After a Reset, Set1, Bank0 ...................................................................................... 8-8
System and Peripheral Control Registers, Set1, Bank1 .................................................................... 8-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Port Configuration Overview .............................................................................. 9-1
Port Data Register Summary ............................................................................................................. 9-2
Watchdog Timer Presaler Select ................................................................................................... 12-5
PWM Control and Data Registers .................................................................................................. 13-3
PWM Output "Stretch" Values for Extension Data Bits Ext1 (PWM0EX.7–2, PWM1EX.7–2)....... 13-5
PWM Output "Stretch" Values for Extension Data Bits Ext0 (PWM0EX.7–6, PWM1EX.7–6)....... 13-7
PWM Output "Stretch" Values for Extension Data Bits Ext1 (PWM0EX.7–2, PWM1EX.7–2)....... 13-9
Commonly Used Baud Rates Generated by 8-Bit BRDATA.......................................................... 15-5
Sample Timing Calculations for the IIC Bus Transmit Clock (SCL) ............................................... 16-3
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the Flash in Tool Program Mode .................................. 18-2
ISP Sector Size .............................................................................................................................. 18-6
Reset Vector Address .................................................................................................................. 18-6
Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................................................................................................... 19-1
DC Electrical Characteristics.......................................................................................................... 19-2
AC Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 19-3
Oscillator Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 19-4
Oscillation Stabilization Time ......................................................................................................... 19-5
Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode................................................................................ 19-6
UART Timing Characteristics in Mode 0 (10MHz) ......................................................................... 19-7
A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics ........................................................................................ 19-8
LVD Circuit Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 19-9
LVR Circuit Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 19-9
Flash Memory AC Electrical characteristics............................................................................... 19-10
ESD Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 19-11
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the EPROM................................................................... 21-3
Comparison of S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Features ................................................................................ 21-3
PS031305-1017
xii
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 21-3
Table 22-1
Table 22-2
Table 22-3
Table 22-4
Table 22-5
Table 22-6
Table 22-7
List of Tables
Reference Table for Connection .................................................................................................... 21-5
Components of TB8S19/8S28/8S39 .............................................................................................. 22-9
Device Selection Settings for TB8S19/8S28/8S39 ........................................................................ 22-9
Power Selection Settings for TB8S19/8S28/8S39 ....................................................................... 22-10
The SMDS2+ Tool Selection Setting ........................................................................................... 22-10
Using Single Header Pins to Select Clock Source/PWM/Operation Mode .................................. 22-11
Using Single Header Pins as the Input Path for External Trigger Sources ................................. 22-12
ISP II Circuit Recommended Values ............................................................................................ 22-15
PS031305-1017
xiii
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
List of Examples
List of Examples
Example
Number
Example 2-1
Example 2-2
Example 2-3
Example 2-4
Example 2-5
Example 8-1
Example 10-1
Example 11-1
Example 13-1
Example 14-1
Example 17-1
Example 18-1
Example 18-2
Example 18-3
Example 18-4
PS031305-1017
Title
Page
Number
Smart Option Setting ..................................................................................................................... 2-4
Setting the Register Pointers ...................................................................................................... 2-10
Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers .................................................... 2-11
Addressing the Common Working Register Area ....................................................................... 2-15
Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP .................................................................... 2-20
Sample S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Initialization Routine ...................................................................... 8-10
Configuring the Basic Timer ...................................................................................................... 10-6
Using the Timer 1 ...................................................................................................................... 11-8
Programming the PWM Module to Sample Specifications ..................................................... 13-14
Configuring A/D Converter ........................................................................................................ 14-8
LVD Using Method .................................................................................................................... 17-4
Sector Erase ............................................................................................................................. 18-8
1Byte Programming ................................................................................................................ 18-12
Reading ................................................................................................................................... 18-14
Hard Lock Protection............................................................................................................... 18-15
xiv
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
1
Chapter 1. Product Overview
Product Overview
1.1 S3C8/S3F8 Series Microcontrollers
Zilog's S3C8/S3F8 Series of 8-bit single-chip CMOS microcontrollers offers a fast and efficient CPU, a wide range
of integrated peripherals, and various mask-programmable ROM sizes. Important CPU features include:
•
Efficient register-oriented architecture
•
Selectable CPU clock sources
•
Idle and Stop power-down mode release by interrupt
•
Built-in basic timer with watchdog function
A sophisticated interrupt structure recognizes up to eight interrupt levels. Each level can have one or more
interrupt sources and vectors. Fast interrupt processing (within a minimum of four CPU clocks) can be assigned to
specific interrupt levels.
1.2 S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Microcontroller
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 single-chip CMOS micro-controller is fabricated using a highly advanced CMOS process
and is based on Zilog's newest CPU architecture. Its design is based on the powerful SAM8RC CPU core. Stop
and idle (power-down) modes were implemented to reduce power consumption.
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 is a micro-controller with 8K/4Kbyte multi-time-programmable Flash ROM embedded.
Using the SAM8RC design approach, the following peripherals were integrated with the powerful core:
•
Three configurable I/O ports (22 pins)
•
18 interrupt sources with 18 vectors and 8 interrupt levels
•
A 16-bit Timer 0 with one 16-bit timer or two 8-bit timer mode.
•
A 16-bit Timer 1 with interval & Capture function.
•
A free running Watchdog Timer with interrupt and Reset.
•
Analog to digital converter with thirteen input channels (MAX.) and 12-bit resolution
•
One UART module
•
One IIC module
•
Two PWM outputs with three optional mode: 12-bit (6 + 6); 8-bit (6 + 2); 14-bit (8 + 6);
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontroller is ideal for use in a wide range of electronic applications requiring simple
timer/counter, PWM, ADC. S3F8S28/S3F8S24 is available in a 24/20-pin SOP Package and a 24-pin TSSOP
package and a 20-pin DIP package.
PS031305-1017
1-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 1. Product Overview
1.3 Features
•
CPU
−
•
SAM8RC CPU core
Memory
−
Internal multi-time program Full-Flash memory:
8K 8 bits program memory (S3F8S28)
4K 8 bits program memory (S3F8S24)
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
−
•
•
•
•
272byte general-purpose register area
Instruction Set
−
78 instructions
−
Idle and Stop instructions added for power-down modes
Instruction Execution Time
−
•
Sector size: 128 bytes
User programmable by "LDC" instruction
Sector erase available
Fast programming time
External serial programming support
Endurance: 10,000 erase/program cycles
10 Years data retention
333ns at 12MHz fOSC (minimum)
Interrupts
−
8 interrupt levels and 17 interrupt sources (8 external interrupt and 9 internal interrupt)
−
Fast interrupt processing feature
−
Watchdog interrupt can release Stop Mode.
General I/O
−
Three I/O ports (Max. 22 pins)
−
Bit programmable ports
2-ch High-speed PWM with Three Selectable Resolutions
−
12-bit PWM: 6-bit base + 6-bit extension
−
8-bit PWM: 6-bit base + 2-bit extension
−
14-bit PWM: 8-bit base + 6-bit extension
PS031305-1017
1-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 1. Product Overview
Timer/Counters
−
One 8-bit basic timer for watchdog function
−
One 16-bit timer(Timer 0) or two 8-bit timers A/B with time interval mode
−
One 16-bit timer/counter (Timer 1) with two operating modes; Interval mode, Capture mode
−
One free running Watchdog Timer with programmable timer-out period. It can be used to generate RESET
or release STOP when clocked by Ring Oscillator.
A/D Converter
−
Thirteen analog input pins (Max.)
−
12-bit conversion resolution
−
Integrated sample and hold circuitry
Asynchronous UART
−
Programmable baud rate generator
−
Support serial data transmit/receive operations with 8-bit, 9-bit UART
Multi-Master IIC-Bus
−
Serial Peripheral Interface
−
Serial, 8-bit Data Transfers
−
Programmable Clock Prescale
Oscillation Frequency
−
0.1MHz to 1MHz external low gain (LG) crystal oscillator
−
0.4MHz to 12MHz external high gain (HG) crystal oscillator
−
Internal RC: 0.5MHz (typ.), 1 MHz (typ.), 2MHz (typ.), 4MHz (typ.), 8MHz (typ.), in VDD = 5V with 1%
tolerance
−
On-Chip Ring oscillator with 32kHz frequency for free running Watchdog Timer.
−
Maximum 12MHz CPU clock
Built-in RESET Circuit (LVR)
−
Low-Voltage check to make system reset
−
VLVR = 1.9/2.3/3.0/3.9V (by Smart Option)
Low Voltage Detect Circuit (LVD)
−
Programmable detection voltage
−
VLVD = 2.1/2.5/3.2/4.1V
−
En/Disable S/W selectable.
Operating Temperature Range
−
– 40C to + 85C
PS031305-1017
1-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
•
•
•
Chapter 1. Product Overview
Operating Voltage Range
−
1.8V to 5.5V @ 0.1 – 4MHz
−
2.7V to 5.5V @ 0.1 – 12MHz
Smart Option
−
LVR enable/disable
−
Oscillator selection
Package Types
−
S3F8S28/F8S24:
o 24-SOP-375
o 24-TSSOP-BD44
o 20-DIP-300A
o 20-SOP-375
o 20-SSOP-225
PS031305-1017
1-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 1. Product Overview
1.4 Block Diagram
Figure 1-1
Block Diagram
Note: The Internal Voltage Converter (IVC) for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 MCU’s 0.13µm process is not configurable.
PS031305-1017
1-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 1. Product Overview
1.5 Pin Assignments
Figure 1-2
PS031305-1017
Pin Assignment Diagram (24-Pin SOP Package)
1-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Figure 1-3
PS031305-1017
Chapter 1. Product Overview
Pin Assignment Diagram (24-Pin DIP/SOP/SSOP Package)
1-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 1. Product Overview
1.6 Pin Descriptions
Table 1-1
Pin
Name
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Pin Descriptions
Pin
Type
Share
Pins
I/O
Bit-programmable I/O port for Schmitt trigger input or
push-pull output. Pull-up resistors are assignable by
software. Port0 pins can also be used as A/D
converter input, PWM output, external interrupt input
P0.2-.3 shared with IIC ports SCK and SDA
E-1
ADC0 to ADC7
INT0 to INT3
PWM, SCK
SDA
I/O
Bit-programmable I/O port for Schmitt trigger input or
push-pull, open-drain output. Pull-up resistors or pulldown resistors are assignable by software. P1.2 is
used as Schmitt trigger input port and Open-drain
output
E-2
B
XIN, XOUT
RESET
I/O
Bit-programmable I/O port for Schmitt trigger input or
push-pull, open-drain output(P2.6, P2.3-.0). Pull-up
resistors are assignable by software.
P2.2 can be used for T1CAP input.
P2.2-.3 shared with UART ports RxD and TxD
E
ADC8 to ADC10
CLO
T0; T1;
T1CAP;
RxD,TxD
P3.0 to P3.3
I/O
Bit-programmable I/O port for Schmitt trigger input or
push-pull. Pull-up resistors are assignable by
software. Port3 pins can also be used as A/D
converter input, external interrupt input
E-1
ADC11 to ADC12
INT4 to INT7
XIN, XOUT
–
Crystal/Ceramic oscillator signal for system clock.
–
P1.0 to P1.1
nRESET
I
Internal LVR or external RESET
B
P1.2
VDD, VSS
–
Voltage input pin and ground
–
–
CLO
O
System clock output port
E
P2.6
INT0 to INT7
I
External interrupt input port
E-1
P0.0 to P0.3
P3.0 to P3.3
PWM0
O
8-Bit high speed PWM0 output
E-1
P0.6
PWM1
O
8-Bit high speed PWM1 output
E-1
P0.5
T0
O
Timer0/A match output
E
P2.0
T1
O
Timer1 match output
E
P2.1
T1CAP
I
T1 capture input
E
P2.2
ADC0 to DC12
I
A/D converter input
E-1
E
P0.0 to P0.7
P2.4 to P2.6
P3.0 to P3.1
RxD
I/O
Serial data RXD pin for receive input and transmit
output (mode 0)
E-1
P2.2
TxD
O
Serial data TXD pin for transmit output and shift clock
output (mode 0)
E-1
P2.3
SCK, SDA
I/O
IIC Pins
E-1
P0.2, P0.3
P0.0 to P0.7
P1.0 to P1.2
P2.0 to P2.6
PS031305-1017
Input/
Output
Pin Description
1-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 1-2
Chapter 1. Product Overview
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the Flash ROM
Main Chip
During Programming
Pin Name
Pin Name
Pin No.
I/O
P0.1
SDAT
22 (24-pin), 18 (20-pin)
I/O
P0.0
SCLK
23(24-pin), 19 (20-pin)
I
Serial clock pin (input only pin)
RESET, P1.2
VPP
4
I
Power supply pin for Flash ROM cell writing
(indicates that MTP enters into tool mode).
When 11V is applied, MTP is in tool mode.
VDD/VSS
VDD/VSS
24 (24-pin), 20 (20-pin)
1 (24-pin), 1 (20-pin)
I
Logic power supply pin.
PS031305-1017
Function
Serial data pin (output when reading, Input
when writing) Input and push-pull output port
can be assigned
1-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 1. Product Overview
1.7 Pin Circuits
VDD
P-channel
IN
N-channel
Figure 1-4
Data
Output
Disable
Pin Circuit Type A
Circuit
Type C
I/O
Digital
Input
Figure 1-5
Pin Circuit Type B
VDD
Data
Out
Output
DIsable
Figure 1-6
PS031305-1017
Pin Circuit Type C
1-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 1. Product Overview
VDD
Pull-up
Enable
Data
Output
Disable
Circuit
Type C
I/O
Digital
Input
Figure 1-7
Pin Circuit Type D
VDD
Open-drain
Enable
P2CONH
P2CONL
Alternative
Output
P2.x
Pull-up
enable
VDD
P-CH
M
U
X
Data
I/O
N-CH
Output Disable
(Input Mode)
Digital
Input
Analog Input
Enable
ADC
Figure 1-8
PS031305-1017
Pin Circuit Type E
1-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 1. Product Overview
VDD
Pull-up
enable
VDD
P0CONH
P-CH
Alternative
Output
M
U
X
P0.x
Data
I/O
N-CH
Output Disable
(Input Mode)
Digital Input
Interrupt Input
Analog Input
Enable
Analog
Input
Figure 1-9
Pin Circuit Type E-1
VDD
Open-drain
Enable
Pull-up
enable
VDD
P1.x
I/O
Output Disable
(Input Mode)
Pull-down
enable
Digital
Input
XIN
XOUT
Figure 1-10
PS031305-1017
Pin Circuit Type E-2
1-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
2
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
Address Spaces
2.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontroller has two kinds of address space:
•
Internal program memory (ROM)
•
Internal register file
A 12-bit address bus supports program memory operations. A separate 8-bit register bus carries addresses and
data between the CPU and the internal register file.
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 have 8K/4Kbytes of multi-time-programmable Flash program memory: which is configured
as the Internal ROM mode, all of the 8K/4Kbyte internal program memory is used.
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontroller has 272 general-purpose registers in its internal register file. 69bytes in
the register file are mapped for system and peripheral control functions.
PS031305-0117
2-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.2 Program Memory (ROM)
2.2.1 Normal Operating Mode
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 MCU has 8K/4Kbytes (locations 0H to 0FFFH) of internal multi-time-programmable Flash
program memory.
The first 256 bytes of the ROM (0H to 0FFH) are reserved for interrupt vector addresses. Unused locations
(except 3CH, 3DH, 3EH, 3FH) in this address range can be used as normal program memory. If you use the
vector address area to store a program code, be careful not to overwrite the vector addresses stored in these
locations.
3CH, 3DH, 3EH, 3FH is used as Smart Option ROM cell.
The program Reset address in the ROM is 0100H.
(Decimal)
4,095
(HEX)
0FFFH
4K-Byte
Internal
Program
Memory Area
255
FFH
Interrupt
Vector Area
0
Figure 2-1
PS031305-0117
0H
Program Memory Address Space
2-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.2.2 Smart Option
Smart Option is the ROM option for starting condition of the chip.
The ROM addresses used by Smart Option are from 003CH to 003FH. The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 only uses 003EH
and 003FH. Not used ROM address 003CH, 003DH should be initialized to 0FFH. The default value of ROM is
FFH (LVR enable, Internal RC oscillator).
ROM Address: 003CH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
.1
.0
LSB
.1
.0
LSB
Not Used
ROM Address: 003DH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
Not Used
ROM Address: 003EH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
ISP protection size selection: (note)
00 = 256 bytes
01 = 512 bytes
10 = 1024 bytes
11 = 2048 bytes
Not used.
ISP reset vector change enable/disable bit:
0 = OBP reset vector address
1 = Normal vector (address 0100H)
ISP protection enable/disable bit:
0 = Enable (not erasable by LDC)
1 = Disable (erasable by LDC)
ISP reset vector address selection bit:
00 = 200H (ISP area size: 256 byte)
01 = 300H (ISP area size: 512 byte)
10 = 500H (ISP area size: 1024 byte)
11 = 900H (ISP area size: 2048 byte)
ROM Address: 003FH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
LVR Enable/Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
LVR Level Selection bits
00 = 1.9V
01 = 2.3V
10 = 3.0V
11 = 3.9V
Oscillator selection bits:
0100 = External low gain(LG) crystal/ceramic oscillator
1100 = External high gain(HG) crystal/ceramic oscillator
1010 = Internal RC (1 MHz in VDD = 5 V)
1111 = Internal RC (8 MHz in VDD = 5 V)
1000 = Internal RC (0.5 MHz in VDD = 5 V)
1001 = Internal RC (2 MHz in VDD = 5 V)
1011 = Internal RC (4 MHz in VDD = 5 V)
P1.2/RESET pin Selection bit Other values = Not valid
0 = P1.2 pin enable
1 = RESET pin enable
NOTES:
1. When you use external oscillator, P1.0, P1.1 must be set to output port to prevent current consumption.
2. Although user can write any value to the unused bits of 3CH, 3DH, 3EH, and 3FH, We recommend that the unused bits be set to "1".
3. After selecting ISP reset vector address in selecting ISP protection size, don't select upper than ISP area size.
4. The data for Smart Option should be written in the Smart Option area (003CH to 003FH) by OTP/MTP tools. When user written any
value in the Smart Option area by LDC instruction, the data of the area may be changed, but the Smart Option is not affected.
5. External low gain (LG) crystal/ceramic frequency range from 100KHz to 1MHz with low power consumption
External high gain (HG) crystal/ceramic frequency range from 400KHz to 12MHz with high power consumption.
Figure 2-2
PS031305-0117
Smart Option
2-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example 2-1
ORG
;----------------
0000H
>
003CH
DB
0FFH
; 003CH, must be initialized to 0FFH.
DB
0FFH
; 003DH, must be initialized to 0FFH.
DB
0FFH
; 003EH, enable LVR (3.0V)
DB
0FEH
; 003FH, Internal RC oscillator 1MHz
>
VECTOR 0F6H, INT_TIMER0
;
Smart Option Setting
ORG
;----------------
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
; Timer 0 interrupt
>
ORG
0100H
RESET:
DI
•
•
•
PS031305-0117
2-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.3 Register Architecture
In the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 implementation, the upper 64byte area of register files is expanded two 64byte areas,
called set 1 and set 2. The upper 32byte area of set 1 is further expanded two 32byte register banks (bank 0 and
bank 1), and the lower 32byte area is a single 32byte common area.
The 64bytes of set 1 are addressed as working registers, system control registers and peripheral control registers.
The 64bytes of set 2 are for general-purpose use, and commonly used for stack operations. You must use
Register Indirect addressing mode or Indexed addressing mode to access registers in set 2.
In case of S3F8S28/S3F8S24 the total number of addressable 8-bit registers is 341. Of these 341 registers,
69bytes are for CPU and system control registers and peripheral control and data registers, 16 bytes are used as
shared working registers, and 256 registers are for general-purpose use.
For many SAM8RC microcontrollers, the addressable area of the internal register file is further expanded by
additional register pages at the general-purpose register space (00H to BFH: page0). This register file expansion
is not implemented in the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 however.
The specific register types and the area (in bytes) that they occupy in the internal register file are summarized in
Table 2-1.
Table 2-1
Register Type Summary
Register Type
PS031305-0117
Number of Bytes
CPU and system control registers, peripherals, I/O, and
clock control and data registers
69
General-purpose registers (including the 16-bit common
working register area)
272
Total Addressable Bytes
341
2-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Set 2
Set1
Page 0
Bank 1
FFH
32
Bytes
64
Bytes
System
0 and
Bank
Peripheral Control
Registers
and
System
Peripheral Control
Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
D0H
CFH
FFH
General Purpose
Data Register
E0H
E0H
DFH
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
(Indirect Register or
Indexed Addressing
Modes or
Stack Operations)
System Registers
(Register Addressing Mode)
256
Bytes
General Purpose Register
(Register Addressing Mode)
C0H
C0H
BFH
Page 0
192
Bytes
Prime
Data Register
(All Addressing
Mode)
00H
Figure 2-3
PS031305-0117
Internal Register File Organization
2-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.3.1 Register Page Pointer (PP)
The S3C8/S3F8 Series architecture supports the logical expansion of the physical 314byte internal register files
(using an 8-bit data bus) into as many as 16 separately addressable register pages. Page addressing is controlled
by the register page pointer PP (DFH, Set 1, Bank0). In the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontroller, a paged register
file expansion is not implemented and the register page pointer settings therefore always point to "page 0".
Following a reset, the page pointer's source value (lower nibble) and destination value (upper nibble) are always
"0000" automatically. Therefore, S3F8S28/S3F8S24 is always selected page 0 as the source and destination page
for register addressing. These page pointer (PP) register settings, as shown in Figure 2-4, should not be modified
during normal operation.
Register Page Pointer (PP)
DFH ,Set 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
Destination Register Page Seleciton Bits:
0 0 0 0
NOTE:
Destination: page 0
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Source Register Page Selection Bits:
0 0 0 0
Source: page 0
A hardware reset operation writes the 4-bit destination and source values shown
above to the register page pointer. These values should not be modified to
address other pages.
Figure 2-4
Register Page Pointer (PP)
2.3.2 Register Set 1
The term set 1 refers to the upper 64 bytes of the register file, locations C0H to FFH.
The upper 32byte area of set 1, (E0H to FFH) contains 27 mapped system and peripheral control registers. The
lower 32byte area contains 15 system registers (D0H to DFH) and a 16byte common working register area (C0H
to CFH). You can use the common working register area as a "scratch" area for data operations being performed
in other areas of the register file.
Registers in set 1 locations are directly accessible at all times using the Register addressing mode. The 16byte
working register area can only be accessed using working register addressing. (For more information about
working register addressing, please refer to 3 Addressing Modes.
PS031305-0117
2-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.3.3 Register Set 2
The same 64byte physical space that is used for set 1 locations C0H to FFH is logically duplicated to add another
64 bytes of register space. This expanded area of the register file is called set 2. The set 2 locations (C0H to FFH)
is accessible on page 0 in the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 register space.
The logical division of set 1 and set 2 is maintained by means of addressing mode restrictions: You can use only
Register addressing mode to access set 1 locations; to access registers in set 2, you must use Register Indirect
addressing mode or Indexed addressing mode.
The set 2 register area is commonly used for stack operations.
2.3.4 Prime Register Space
The lower 192 bytes of the 256byte physical internal register file (00H to BFH) are called the prime register space
or, more simply, the prime area. You can access registers in this address using any addressing mode. (In other
words, there is no addressing mode restriction for these registers, as is the case for set 1 and set 2 registers.).
The prime register area on page 0 is immediately addressable following a reset.
Set 1
Bank 0
Bank 1
FFH
Page 0
FFH
Set 2
FCH
E0H
D0H
C0H
BFH
C0H
Page 0
Prime
Space
CPU and system control
General-purpose
Peripheral and I/O
00H
Figure 2-5
PS031305-0117
Set 1, Set 2 and Prime Area Register Map
2-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.3.5 Working Registers
Instructions can access specific 8-bit registers or 16-bit register pairs using either 4-bit or 8-bit address fields.
When 4-bit working register addressing is used, the 256byte register file can be seen by the programmer as
consisting of 328byte register groups or "slices." Each slice consists of eight 8-bit registers.
Using the two 8-bit register pointers, RP1 and RP0, two working register slices can be selected at any one time to
form a 16byte working register block. Using the register pointers, you can move this 16byte register block
anywhere in the addressable register file, except for the set 2 area.
The terms slice and block are used in this manual to help you visualize the size and relative locations of selected
working register spaces:
•
One working register slice is 8 bytes (eight 8-bit working registers; R0 to R7 or R8 to R15)
•
One working register block is 16 bytes (sixteen 8-bit working registers; R0 to R15)
All of the registers in an 8byte working register slice have the same binary value for their five most significant
address bits. This makes it possible for each register pointer to point to one of the 24 slices in the register file. The
base addresses for the two selected 8byte register slices are contained in register pointers RP0 and RP1.
After a reset, RP0 and RP1 always point to the 16byte common area in set 1 (C0H to CFH).
Slice 32
FFH
F8H
F7H
F0H
1 1 1 1 1 X X X
Set 1
Only
RP1 (Registers R8-R15)
Each register pointer points to
one 8-byte slice of the register
space, selecting a total 16-byte
working register block.
CFH
C0H
~
~
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
RP0 (Registers R0-R7)
Slice 1
Figure 2-6
PS031305-0117
10H
0FH
08H
07H
00H
8-Byte Working Register Areas (Slices)
2-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.3.6 Using the Register Pointers
Register pointers RP0 and RP1, mapped to addresses D6H and D7H in set 1, are used to select two movable
8byte working register slices in the register file. After a reset, they point to the working register common area: RP0
points to addresses C0H to C7H, and RP1 points to addresses C8H to CFH.
To change a register pointer value, you load a new value to RP0 and/or RP1 using an SRP or LD instruction (see
Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8).
With working register addressing, you can only access those two 8-bit slices of the register file that are currently
pointed to by RP0 and RP1. You cannot, however, use the register pointers to select a working register space in
set 2, C0H to FFH, because these locations can be accessed only using the Indirect Register or Indexed
addressing modes.
The selected 16byte working register block usually consists of two contiguous 8byte slices. As a general
programming guideline, we recommend that RP0 point to the "lower" slice and RP1 point to the "upper" slice (see
Figure 2-6). In some cases, it may be necessary to define working register areas in different (non-contiguous)
areas of the register file. In Figure 2-8, RP0 points to the "upper" slice and RP1 to the "lower" slice.
Because a register pointer can point to the either of the two 8byte slices in the working register block, you can
define the working register area very flexibly to support program requirements.
Example 2-2
SRP
#70H
; RP0
SRP1
#48H
; RP0
SRP0
#0A0H
; RP0
CLR
RP0
; RP0
LD
RP1, #0F8H
; RP0
70H, RP1
no change, RP1
A0H, RP1
00H, RP1
no change, RP1
Setting the Register Pointers
78H
48H,
no change
no change
0F8H
Register File
Contains 32
8-Byte Slices
0 0 0 0 1 X X X
0FH (R15)
RP1
8-Byte Slice
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
8-Byte Slice
08H
07H
00H (R0)
RP0
Figure 2-7
PS031305-0117
16-byte
contiguous
working
register block
Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
2-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
F7H (R7)
8-Byte Slice
F0H (R0)
Register File
Contains 32
8-Byte Slices
1 1 1 1 0 X X X
16-byte non-contiguous
working register block
RP0
07H (R15)
0 0 0 0 0 X X X
8-Byte Slice
00H (R0)
RP1
Figure 2-8
Example 2-3
Non-Contiguous 16-Byte Working Register Block
Using the RPs to Calculate the Sum of a Series of Registers
Calculate the sum of registers 80H to 85H using the register pointer. The register addresses 80H
through 85H contains the values 10H, 11H, 12H, 13H, 14H, and 15 H, respectively:
SRP0
#80H
; RP0
ADD
R0,R1
; R0
ADC
R0,R2
; R0
ADC
R0,R3
; R0
ADC
R0,R4
; R0
ADC
R0,R5
; R0
80H
R0 + R1
R0 + R2 + C
R0 + R3 + C
R0 + R4 + C
R0 + R5 + C
The sum of these six registers, 6FH, is located in the register R0 (80H). The instruction string used
in this example takes 12 bytes of instruction code and its execution time is 36 cycles. If the
register pointer is not used to calculate the sum of these registers, the following instruction
sequence would have to be used:
ADD
80H,81H
; 80H
ADC
80H,82H
; 80H
ADC
80H,83H
; 80H
ADC
80H,84H
; 80H
ADC
80H,85H
; 80H
(80H) + (81H)
(80H) + (82H) + C
(80H) + (83H) + C
(80H) + (84H) + C
(80H) + (85H) + C
Now, the sum of the six registers is also located in register 80H. However, this instruction string
takes 15 bytes of instruction code instead of 12 bytes, and its execution time is 50 cycles instead of
36 cycles.
PS031305-0117
2-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.4 Register Addressing
The S3C8 Series register architecture provides an efficient method of working register addressing that takes full
advantage of shorter instruction formats to reduce execution time.
With Register (R) addressing mode, in which the operand value is the content of a specific register or register pair,
you can access all locations in the register file except for set 2. With working register addressing, you use a
register pointer to specify an 8byte working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space.
Registers are addressed either as a single 8-bit register or as a paired 16-bit register space. In a 16-bit register
pair, the address of the first 8-bit register is always an even number and the address of the next register is always
an odd number. The most significant byte of the 16-bit data is always stored in the even-numbered register; the
least significant byte is always stored in the next (+ 1) odd-numbered register.
Working register addressing differs from Register addressing because it uses a register pointer to identify a
specific 8byte working register space in the internal register file and a specific 8-bit register within that space.
MSB
LSB
Rn
Rn+1
Figure 2-9
PS031305-0117
n = Even address
16-Bit Register Pair
2-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Special-Purpose Registers
Bank 1
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
General-Purpose Register
Bank 0
FFH
FFH
Control
Registers
E0H
Set 2
System
Registers
D0H
CFH
C0H
C0H
BFH
RP1
Register
Pointers
RP0
Each register pointer (RP) can independently point
to one of the 24 8byte "slices" of the register file
(other than set 2). After a reset, RP0 points to
locations C0H-C7H and RP1 to locations C8H to
CFH (that is, to the common working register area).
NOTE:
Prime
Registers
In the S3F8S28/F8S24 microcontroller,
page 0-1 are implemented.
00H
Register Addressing Only
Page 0
Page 0
All
Addressing
Modes
Indirect Register,
Indexed
Addressing
Modes
Can be Pointed by Register Pointer
Figure 2-10
PS031305-0117
Register File Addressing
2-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.4.1 Common Working Register Area (C0H to CFH)
After a reset, register pointers RP0 and RP1 automatically select two 8byte register slices in set 1, locations C0H
to CFH, as the active 16byte working register block:
•
RP0 → C0H to C7H
•
RP1 → C8H to CFH
This 16byte address range is called common area. That is, locations in this area can be used as working registers
by operations that address any location on any page in the register file. Typically, these working registers serve as
temporary buffers for data operations.
FFH
Set 1
FFH
Page 0
F0H
E0H
Set 2
D0H
C0H
BFH
C0H
Page 0
Following a hareware reset, register
pointers RP0 and RP1 point to the
common working register area,
locations C0H-CFH.
RP0 =
1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
RP1 =
1 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
Figure 2-11
PS031305-0117
~
Prime
Area
~
00H
Common Working Register Area
2-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example 2-4
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
Addressing the Common Working Register Area
As the following examples show, you should access working registers in the common area, locations C0H
to CFH, using working register addressing mode only.
Example 1:
LD
0C2H,40H
; Invalid addressing mode!
Use working register addressing instead:
SRP
#0C0H
LD
R2,40H
; R2 (C2H)
0C3H,#45H
; Invalid addressing mode!
the value in location 40H
Example 2:
ADD
Use working register addressing instead:
SRP
#0C0H
ADD
R3,#45H
; R3 (C3H)
R3 + 45H
2.4.2 4-Bit Working Register Addressing
Each register pointer defines a movable 8byte slice of working register space. The address information stored in a
register pointer serves as an addressing "window" that makes it possible for instructions to access working
registers very efficiently using short 4-bit addresses. When an instruction addresses a location in the selected
working register area, the address bits are concatenated in the following way to form a complete 8-bit address:
•
The high-order bit of the 4-bit address selects one of the register pointers ("0" selects RP0; "1" selects RP1);
•
The five high-order bits in the register pointer select an 8byte slice of the register space;
•
The three low-order bits of the 4-bit address select one of the eight registers in the slice.
As shown in Figure 2-12, the result of this operation is that the five high-order bits from the register pointer are
concatenated with the three low-order bits from the instruction address to form the complete address. As long as
the address stored in the register pointer remains unchanged, the three bits from the address will always point to
an address in the same 8-byte register slice.
Figure 2-13 shows a typical example of 4-bit working register addressing. The high-order bit of the instruction "INC
R6" is "0", which selects RP0. The five high-order bits stored in RP0 (01110B) are concatenated with the three
low-order bits of the instruction's 4-bit address (110B) to produce the register address 76H (01110110B).
PS031305-0117
2-15
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
RP0
RP1
Selects
RP0 or RP1
Address
OPCODE
4-bit address
procides three
low-order bits
Register pointer
provides five
high-order bits
Together they create an
8-bit register address
Figure 2-12
4-Bit Working Register Addressing
RP1
RP0
0 1 1 1 0
0 0 0
0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0
Selects RP0
0 1 1 1 0
1 1 0
Figure 2-13
PS031305-0117
Register
address
(76H)
R6
OPCODE
0 1 1 0
1 1 1 0
Instruction:
'INC R6'
4-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-16
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.4.3 8-Bit Working Register Addressing
You can also use 8-bit working register addressing to access registers in a selected working register area. To
initiate 8-bit working register addressing, the upper four bits of the instruction address must contain the value
1100B. This 4-bit value (1100B) indicates that the remaining four bits have the same effect as 4-bit working
register addressing.
As shown in Figure 2-14, the lower nibble of the 8-bit address is concatenated in much the same way as for 4-bit
addressing: Bit 3 selects either RP0 or RP1, which then supplies the five high-order bits of the final address. The
three low-order bits of the complete address are provided by the original instruction.
Figure 2-15 shows an example of 8-bit working register addressing. The four high-order bits of the instruction
address (1100B) specify 8-bit working register addressing. Bit 4 ("1") selects RP1 and the five high-order bits in
RP1 (10101B) become the five high-order bits of the register address. The three low-order bits of the register
address (011) are provided by the three low-order bits of the 8-bit instruction address. The five-address bits from
RP1 and the three address bits from the instruction are concatenated to form the complete register address, 0ABH
(10101011B).
RP0
RP1
Selects
RP0 or RP1
Address
These address
bits indicate
8-bit working
register
addressing
1
1
0
0
Register pointer
provides five
high-order bits
8-bit logical
address
Three loworder bits
8-bit physical address
Figure 2-14
PS031305-0117
8-Bit Working Register Addressing
2-17
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
RP1
RP0
0 1 1 1 0
0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1
0 0 0
Selects RP1
R11
1 1 0 0
1
0 1 1
8-bit address
from instruction
'LD R11, R2'
Specifies working
register addressing
Register address (0ABH)
Figure 2-15
PS031305-0117
1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1
8-Bit Working Register Addressing Example
2-18
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
2.5 System and User Stacks
S3C8 Series microcontrollers use the system stack for subroutine calls and returns and to store data. The PUSH
and POP instructions are used to control system stack operations. The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 architecture supports
stack operations in the internal register file.
2.5.1 Stack Operations
Return addresses for procedure calls, interrupts and data are stored on the stack. The contents of the PC are
saved to stack by a CALL instruction and restored by the RET instruction. When an interrupt occurs, the contents
of the PC and the FLAGS registers are pushed to the stack. The IRET instruction then pops these values back to
their original locations. The stack address value is always decreased by one before a push operation and
increased by one after a pop operation. The stack pointer (SP) always points to the stack frame stored on the top
of the stack, as shown in Figure 2-16.
High Address
PCL
PCL
PCH
Top of
stack
PCH
Top of
stack
Stack contents
after a call
instruction
Flags
Stack contents
after an
interrupt
Low Address
Figure 2-16
Stack Operations
2.5.2 User-Defined Stacks
You can freely define stacks in the internal register file as data storage locations. The instructions PUSHUI,
PUSHUD, POPUI, and POPUD support user-defined stack operations.
2.5.3 Stack Pointers (SPL)
Register location D9H contains the 8-bit stack pointer (SPL) that is used for system stack operations. After a reset,
the SPL value is undetermined. Because only internal memory 256byte is implemented in The
S3F8S28/S3F8S24, the SPL must be initialized to an 8-bit value in the range 00 to FFH.
PS031305-0117
2-19
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example 2-5
Chapter 2. Address Spaces
Standard Stack Operations Using PUSH and POP
The following example shows you how to perform stack operations in the internal register file using
PUSH and POP instructions:
LD
SPL,#0FFH
; SP: FFH (Normally, the SP is set to FFH by the initialization routine)
PUSH
SYM
; Stack address 0BFH SYM
PUSH
R15
; Stack address 0BEH R15
PUSH
20H
; Stack address 0BDH 20H
PUSH
R3
; Stack address 0BCH R3
POP
R3
; R3
Stack address 0BCH
POP
20H
; 20H
Stack address 0BDH
POP
R15
; R15
Stack address 0BEH
POP
SYM
; SYM
Stack address 0BFH
•
•
•
•
•
•
PS031305-0117
2-20
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
3
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
Addressing Modes
3.1 Overview
Instructions that are stored in program memory are fetched for execution using the program counter. Instructions
indicate the operation to be performed and the data to be operated on. Addressing mode is the method used to
determine the location of the data operand. The operands specified in SAM88RC instructions may be condition
codes, immediate data, or a location in the register file, program memory, or data memory.
The S3F Series instruction set supports seven explicit addressing modes. Not all of these addressing modes are
available for each instruction. The seven addressing modes and their symbols are:
•
Register (R)
•
Indirect Register (IR)
•
Indexed (X)
•
Direct Address (DA)
•
Indirect Address (IA)
•
Relative Address (RA)
•
Immediate (IM)
PS031305-1017
3-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
3.2 Register Addressing Mode (R)
In Register addressing mode (R), the operand value is the content of a specified register or register pair (see
Figure 3-1).
Working register addressing differs from Register addressing in that it uses a register pointer to specify an 8byte
working register space in the register file and an 8-bit register within that space (see Figure 3-2).
Program Memory
8-bit Register
File Address
dst
OPCODE
Register File
OPERAND
Point to One
Register in Register
File
One-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Value used in
Instruction Execution
Sample Instruction:
DEC
CNTR
;
Where CNTR is the label of an 8-bit register address
Figure 3-1
Register Addressing
Register File
MSB Point to
RP0 ot RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start
of working
register
block
Program Memory
4-bit
Working Register
dst
3 LSBs
src
Point to the
Working Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
Two-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
OPERAND
Sample Instruction:
ADD
R1, R2
;
Figure 3-2
PS031305-1017
Where R1 and R2 are registers in the currently
selected working register area.
Working Register Addressing
3-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
3.3 Indirect Register Addressing Mode (IR)
In Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode, the content of the specified register or register pair is the address of the
operand. Depending on the instruction used, the actual address may point to a register in the register file, to
program memory (ROM), or to an external memory space (see Figure 3-3 through Figure 3-6).
You can use any 8-bit register to indirectly address another register. Any 16-bit register pair can be used to
indirectly address another memory location. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations C0H to FFH
in set 1 using the Indirect Register addressing mode.
Program Memory
8-bit Register
File Address
dst
OPCODE
One-Operand
Instruction
(Example)
Register File
Point to One
Register in Register
File
ADDRESS
Address of Operand
used by Instruction
Value used in
Instruction Execution
OPERAND
Sample Instruction:
RL
@SHIFT
Figure 3-3
PS031305-1017
;
Where SHIFT is the label of an 8-bit register address
Indirect Register Addressing to Register File
3-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
Register File
Program Memory
Example
Instruction
References
Program
Memory
dst
OPCODE
REGISTER
PAIR
Points to
Register Pair
Program Memory
Sample Instructions:
CALL
JP
@RR2
@RR2
Figure 3-4
PS031305-1017
Value used in
Instruction
16-Bit
Address
Points to
Program
Memory
OPERAND
Indirect Register Addressing to Program Memory
3-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Program Memory
4-bit
Working
Register
Address
dst
src
OPCODE
~
~
3 LSBs
Point to the
Working Register
(1 of 8)
ADDRESS
~
Sample Instruction:
OR
R3, @R6
Figure 3-5
PS031305-1017
Value used in
Instruction
Selected
RP points
to start fo
working register
block
~
OPERAND
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Register File
3-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
Program Memory
4-bit Working
Register Address
Example Instruction
References either
Program Memory or
Data Memory
dst
src
OPCODE
Next 2-bit Point
to Working
Register Pair
(1 of 4)
LSB Selects
Value used in
Instruction
Register
Pair
Program Memory
or
Data Memory
16-Bit
address
points to
program
memory
or data
memory
OPERAND
Sample Instructions:
LCD
LDE
LDE
Figure 3-6
PS031305-1017
R5,@RR6
R3,@RR14
@RR4, R8
; Program memory access
; External data memory access
; External data memory access
Indirect Working Register Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
3.4 Indexed Addressing Mode (X)
Indexed (X) addressing mode adds an offset value to a base address during instruction execution in order to
calculate the effective operand address (see Figure 3-7). You can use Indexed addressing mode to access
locations in the internal register file or in external memory. Please note, however, that you cannot access locations
C0H to FFH in set 1 using Indexed addressing mode.
In short offset Indexed addressing mode, the 8-bit displacement is treated as a signed integer in the range – 128
to + 127. This applies to external memory accesses only (see Figure 3-8.)
For register file addressing, an 8-bit base address provided by the instruction is added to an 8-bit offset contained
in a working register. For external memory accesses, the base address is stored in the working register pair
designated in the instruction. The 8-bit or 16-bit offset given in the instruction is then added to that base address
(see Figure 3-9).
The only instruction that supports Indexed addressing mode for the internal register file is the Load instruction
(LD). The LDC and LDE instructions support Indexed addressing mode for internal program memory and for
external data memory, when implemented.
Register File
RP0 or RP1
~
Value used in
Instruction
+
Program Memory
Two-Operand
Instruction
Example
Base Address
dst/src
x
3 LSBs
Point to One of the
Woking Register
(1 of 8)
OPCODE
~
Selected RP
points to
start of
working
register
block
OPERAND
~
~
INDEX
Sample Instruction:
LD
R0, #BASE[R1]
Figure 3-7
PS031305-1017
;
Where BASE is an 8-bit immediate value
Indexed Addressing to Register File
3-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
~
~
Program Memory
4-bit Working
Register Address
OFFSET
dst/src
x
OPCODE
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
NEXT 2 Bits
Point to Working
Register Pair
(1 of 4)
LSB Selects
+
8-Bits
Register
Pair
Program Memory
or
Data Memory
16-Bit
address
added to
offset
16-Bits
16-Bits
OPERAND
Value used in
Instruction
Sample Instructions:
LDC
R4, #04H[RR2]
LDE
R4,#04H[RR2]
Figure 3-8
PS031305-1017
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 04H)
are loaded into register R4.
; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory with Short Offset
3-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
Register File
MSB Points to
RP0 or RP1
RP0 or RP1
Program Memory
~
~
OFFSET
4-bit Working
Register Address
OFFSET
dst/src
src
NEXT 2 Bits
Point to Working
Register Pair
OPCODE
Selected
RP points
to start of
working
register
block
LSB Selects
+
8-Bits
Register
Pair
Program Memory
or
Data Memory
16-Bit
address
added to
offset
16-Bits
16-Bits
OPERAND
Value used in
Instruction
Sample Instructions:
LDC
R4, #1000H[RR2]
LDE
R4,#1000H[RR2]
Figure 3-9
PS031305-1017
; The values in the program address (RR2 + 1000H)
are loaded into register R4.
; Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Indexed Addressing to Program or Data Memory
3-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
3.5 Direct Address Mode (DA)
In Direct Address (DA) mode, the instruction provides the operand's 16-bit memory address. Jump (JP) and Call
(CALL) instructions use this addressing mode to specify the 16-bit destination address that is loaded into the PC
whenever a JP or CALL instruction is executed.
The LDC and LDE instructions can use Direct Address mode to specify the source or destination address for Load
operations to program memory (LDC) or to external data memory (LDE), if implemented.
Program or
Data Memory
Program Memory
Upper Address Byte
Lower Address Byte
dst/src
"0" or "1"
OPCODE
Memory
Address
Used
LSB Selects Program
Memory or Data Memory:
"0" = Program Memory
"1" = Data Memory
Sample Instructions:
LDC
R5,1234H
;
LDE
R5,1234H
;
Figure 3-10
PS031305-1017
The values in the program address (1234H)
are loaded into register R5.
Identical operation to LDC example, except that
external program memory is accessed.
Direct Addressing for Load Instructions
3-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Memory
Address
Used
Upper Address Byte
Lower Address Byte
OPCODE
Sample Instructions:
JP
CALL
C,JOB1
DISPLAY
Figure 3-11
PS031305-1017
;
;
Where JOB1 is a 16-bit immediate address
Where DISPLAY is a 16-bit immediate address
Direct Addressing for Call and Jump Instructions
3-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
3.6 Indirect Address Mode (IA)
In Indirect Address (IA) mode, the instruction specifies an address located in the lowest 256 bytes of the program
memory. The selected pair of memory locations contains the actual address of the next instruction to be executed.
Only the CALL instruction can use the Indirect Address mode.
Because the Indirect Address mode assumes that the operand is located in the lowest 256 bytes of program
memory, only an 8-bit address is supplied in the instruction; the upper bytes of the destination address are
assumed to be all zeros.
Program Memory
Next Instruction
LSB Must be Zero
Current
Instruction
dst
OPCODE
Lower Address Byte
Upper Address Byte
Program Memory
Locations 0-255
Sample Instruction:
CALL
#40H
; The 16-bit value in program memory addresses 40H
and 41H is the subroutine start address.
Figure 3-12
PS031305-1017
Indirect Addressing
3-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
3.7 Relative Address Mode (RA)
In Relative Address (RA) mode, a two-complement signed displacement between – 128 and + 127 is specified in
the instruction. The displacement value is then added to the current PC value. The result is the address of the next
instruction to be executed. Before this addition occurs, the PC contains the address of the instruction immediately
following the current instruction.
Several program control instructions use the Relative Address mode to perform conditional jumps. The instructions
that support RA addressing are BTJRF, BTJRT, DJNZ, CPIJE, CPIJNE, and JR.
Program Memory
Next OPCODE
Program Memory
Address Used
Displacement
OPCODE
Current Instruction
Current
PC Value
+
Signed
Displacement Value
Sample Instructions:
JR
ULT,$+OFFSET
;
Where OFFSET is a value in the range +127 to -128
Figure 3-13
PS031305-1017
Relative Addressing
3-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 3. Addressing Modes
3.8 Immediate Mode (IM)
In Immediate (IM) addressing mode, the operand value used in the instruction is the value supplied in the operand
field itself. The operand may be one byte or one word in length, depending on the instruction used. Immediate
addressing mode is useful for loading constant values into registers.
Program Memory
OPERAND
OPCODE
(The Operand value is in the instruction)
Sample Instruction:
LD
Figure 3-14
PS031305-1017
R0,#0AAH
Immediate Addressing
3-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
4
Chapter 4. Control Registers
Control Registers
4.1 Overview
In this section, detailed descriptions of the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 control registers are presented in an easy-to-read
format. These descriptions will help familiarize you with the mapped locations in the register file. You can also use
them as a quick-reference source when writing application programs.
System and peripheral registers are summarized in Table 4-1, Table 4-2, and Table 4-3.
Figure 4-1 illustrates the important features of the standard register description format.
Control register descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order according to register mnemonic. More information
about control registers is presented in the context of the various peripheral hardware descriptions in Part II of this
manual.
PS031305-1017
4-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 4-1
Register Name
Chapter 4. Control Registers
System and Peripheral Control Registers, Set1
Mnemonic
Address & Location
RESET Value (Bit)
Address
RW
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TACNT
D0H
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer A data register
TADATA
D1H
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer 0/A control register
TACON
D2H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Basic Timer control register
BTCON
D3H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Clock control register
CLKCON
D4H
RW
0
–
–
0
0
–
–
–
System flags register
FLAGS
D5H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
Register Pointer 0
RP0
D6H
RW
1
1
0
0
0
–
–
–
Register Pointer 1
RP1
D7H
RW
1
1
0
0
1
–
–
–
Stack Pointer register
SPL
D9H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Instruction Pointer (High Byte)
IPH
DAH
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Instruction Pointer (Low Byte)
IPL
DBH
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Interrupt Request register
IRQ
DCH
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Interrupt Mask Register
IMR
DDH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
System Mode Register
SYM
DEH
RW
0
–
–
x
x
x
0
0
Register Page Pointer
PP
DFH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer A counter register
Location D8H is not mapped
NOTE: –: Not mapped or not used, x: Undefined
PS031305-1017
4-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 4-2
Chapter 4. Control Registers
System and Peripheral Control Registers, Set1, Bank0
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address & Location
RESET Value (Bit)
Address
RW
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 0 data register
P0
E0H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 1 data register
P1
E1H
RW
–
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
Port 2 data register
P2
E2H
RW
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 data register
P3
E3H
RW
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
Port 2 pull-up resistor enable register
P2PUR
E4H
RW
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 pull-up resistor enable register
P0PUR
E5H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 control register (High Byte)
P0CONH
E6H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 control register (Low Byte)
P0CONL
E7H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 interrupt pending register
P0PND
E8H
RW
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
Port 1 control register
P1CON
E9H
RW
0
0
–
–
0
0
0
0
Port 2 control register (High Byte)
P2CONH
EAH
RW
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 2 control register (Low Byte)
P2CONL
EBH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TBCNT
ECH
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer B data register
TBDATA
EDH
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer B control register
TBCON
EEH
RW
–
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 interrupt pending register
P3PND
EFH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 control register
P3CON
F0H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM0EX
F1H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM0 data register
PWM0DATA
F2H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM0 control register
PWM0CON
F3H
RW
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
STOP control register
STOPCON
F4H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ring Oscillator control register
ROSCCON
F5H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
WDTCON
F6H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ADCON
F7H
RW
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
A/D converter data register (High)
ADDATAH
F8H
R
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
A/D converter data register (Low)
ADDATAL
F9H
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
BTCNT
FDH
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
External memory timing register
EMT
FEH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Interrupt priority register
IPR
FFH
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Timer B counter register
PWM0 extension data register
Watchdog Timer control register
A/D control register
Locations FAH to FCH are not mapped
Basic Timer counter
NOTE: –: Not mapped or not used, x: Undefined
PS031305-1017
4-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 4-3
Chapter 4. Control Registers
System and Peripheral Control Registers, Set1, Bank1
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address & Location
RESET Value (Bit)
Address
RW
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Timer 1 Data Register (High Byte)
T1DATAH
E0H
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer 1 Data Register (Low Byte)
T1DATAL
E1H
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer 1 Counter Register (High Byte)
T1CNTH
E2H
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1 Counter Register (Low Byte)
T1CNTL
E3H
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1 Control Register
T1CON
E4H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1 prescaler register
T1PS
E5H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM1EX
E6H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM1 data register
PWM1DATA
E7H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM1 control register
PWM1CON
E8H
RW
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
RESETID
EAH
RW
Refer to the detail description
Flash memory control register
FMCON
ECH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
0
Flash memory user programming
enable register
FMUSR
EDH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flash memory sector address register
(High Byte)
FMSECH
EEH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flash memory sector address register
(Low Byte)
FMSECL
EFH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IIC Control Register
ICCR
F0H
RW
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
IIC Status Register
ICSR
F1H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IIC Data Shift Register
IDSR
F2H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
IAR
F3H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LVDCON
F4H
RW
0
–
0
–
–
–
0
0
UART control register
UARTCON
F5H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UART pending register
UARTPND
F6H
RW
–
–
–
–
–
–
0
0
BRDATA
F7H
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UDATA
F8H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PWM1 extension data register
Locations E9H are not mapped
Reset source indicating register
IIC Address Register
Low Voltage Detector Control
Register
UART Baud rate data register
UART data register
Location F9H to FFH is not mapped
NOTE: –: Not mapped or not used, x: Undefined
PS031305-1017
4-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
Bit number(s) that is/are appended to the
register name for bit addressing
Name of individual
Register
bit or related bits
Register name
ID
Register address
(hexadecimal)
D5H
FLAGS - System Flags Register
Bit Identifier
RESET Value
Read/Write
.7
.6
.5
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
x
R/W
x
R/W
x
R/W
x
R/W
x
R/W
x
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
Carry Flag (C)
0
Operation dose not generate a carry or borrow condition
1
Operation generates carry-out or borrow into high-order bit7
Zero Flag
0
Operation result is a non-zero value
1
Operation result is zero
Sign Flag
0
Operation generates positive number (MSB = "0")
1
Operation generates negative number (MSB = "1")
R = Read-only
W = Write-only
R/W = Read/write
' - ' = Not used
Figure 4-1
PS031305-1017
Description of the
effect of specific
bit settings
RESET value notation:
'-' = Not used
'x' = Undetermind value
'0' = Logic zero
'1' = Logic one
Bit number:
MSB = Bit 7
LSB = Bit 0
Register Description Format
4-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.1 ADCON
•
A/D Converter Control Register: F7H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.4
.3
A/D Converter Input Pin Selection Bits
0
0
0
0
ADC0 (P0.0)
0
0
0
1
ADC1 (P0.1)
0
0
1
0
ADC2 (P0.2)
0
0
1
1
ADC3 (P0.3)
0
1
0
0
ADC4 (P0.4)
0
1
0
1
ADC5 (P0.5)
0
1
1
0
ADC6 (P0.6)
0
1
1
1
ADC7 (P0.7)
1
0
0
0
ADC8 (P2.6)
1
0
0
1
ADC9 (P2.5)
1
0
1
0
ADC10 (P2.)
1
0
1
1
ADC11 (P3.0)
1
1
0
0
ADC12 (P3.1)
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
Disable ADC (Power Down)
End-of-Conversion Status Bit
.2–.1
.0
0
A/D conversion is in progress
1
A/D conversion complete
Clock Source Selection Bit (NOTE)
0
0
fOSC/16 (fOSC 12MHz)
0
1
fOSC/12 (fOSC 10MHz)
1
0
fOSC/8 (fOSC 4MHz)
1
1
fOSC/4 (fOSC 3.2MHz)
Conversion Start Bit
0
No meaning
1
A/D conversion start
NOTE:
1.
Maximum ADC clock input = 850kHz.
PS031305-1017
4-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
2.
Chapter 4. Control Registers
When you select one ADC channel, the ADC module was enabled; when disable ADC, the ADC enter Power Down mode.
4.1.2 BTCON
•
Basic Timer Control Register: D3H, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.4
Watchdog Timer Function Enable Bit
1
0
1
0
Others
.3–.2
Disable watchdog timer function
Enable watchdog timer function
Basic Timer Input Clock Selection Code
.1
0
0
fOSC/4096
0
1
fOSC/1024
1
0
fOSC/128
1
1
Invalid setting
Basic Timer 8-Bit Counter Clear Bit
.0
0
No effect
1
Clear the basic timer counter value
Basic Timer Divider Clear Bit
0
No effect
1
Clear both dividers
NOTE: When you write a "1" to BTCON.0 (or BTCON.1), the basic timer counter (or basic timer divider) is cleared.
The bit is then cleared automatically to "0".
PS031305-1017
4-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.3 CLKCON
•
Clock Control Register: D4H, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
–
–
0
0
–
–
–
Read/Write
RW
–
–
RW
RW
–
–
–
.7
Oscillator IRQ Wake-up Function Enable Bit
0
Enable IRQ for main system oscillator wake-up function
1
Disable IRQ for main system oscillator wake-up function
.6–.5
Not used for S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.4–.3
Divided by Selection Bits for CPU Clock frequency
.2–.0
PS031305-1017
0
0
Divide by 16 (fOSC/16)
0
1
Divide by 8 (fOSC/8)
1
0
Divide by 2 (fOSC/2)
1
1
Non-divided clock (fOSC)
Not used for S3F8S28/S3F8S24
4-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.4 EMT
•
External Memory Timing Register: FEH, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
R
R
R
R
R
RW
R
.7
External wait Input Function Enable Bit
.6
0
Disable wait input function for external device
1
Disable wait input function for external device
Slow Memory Timing Enable Bit
.5 and .4
.3 and .2
.1
0
Disable slow memory timing
1
Enable slow memory timing
Program Memory Automatic Wait Control Bits
0
0
No wait
0
1
Wait one cycle
1
0
Wait two cycles
1
1
Wait three cycles
Data Memory Automatic Wait Control Bits
0
0
No wait
0
1
Wait one cycle
1
0
Wait two cycles
1
1
Wait three cycles
Stack Area Selection Bit
.0
0
Select internal register file area
1
Select external register file area
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
NOTE: The EMT register is not used, because an external peripheral interface is not implemented. The program initialization
routine should clear the EMT register to "00H" following a reset. Modification of EMT values during normal operation
may cause a system malfunction
PS031305-1017
4-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.5 FLAGS
•
System Flags Register: D5H, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
R
RW
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Carry Flag (C)
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
PS031305-1017
0
Operation does not generate a carry or borrow condition
1
Operation generates a carry-out or borrow into high-order bit 7
Zero Flag (Z)
0
Operation result is a non-zero value
1
Operation result is zero
Sign Flag (S)
0
Operation generates a positive number (MSB = "0")
1
Operation generates a negative number (MSB = "1")
Overflow Flag (V)
0
Operation result is + 127 or – 128
1
Operation result is + 127 or – 128
Decimal Adjust Flag (D)
0
Add operation completed
1
Subtraction operation completed
Half-Carry Flag (H)
0
No carry-out of bit 3 or no borrow into bit 3 by addition or subtraction
1
Addition generated carry-out of bit 3 or subtraction generated borrow into bit 3
Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FIS)
0
Interrupt return (IRET) in progress (when read)
1
Fast interrupt service routine in progress (when read)
Bank Address Selection Flag (BA)
0
Bank 0 is selected
1
Bank 1 is selected
4-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.6 FMCON
•
Flash Memory Control Register: ECH, SET 1, BANK 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
–
–
–
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
–
–
–
RW
.7–.4
Flash Memory Mode Selection Bits
0
1
0
1
Programming mode
1
0
1
0
Sector erase mode
0
1
1
0
Hard lock mode
Other values
Not available
.3–.1
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.0
Flash Operation Start Bit
0
Operation stop
1
Operation start (This bit will be cleared automatically just after the
corresponding operator completed).
4.1.7 FMSECH
•
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (High Byte): EEH, SET 1, BANK 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
.7–.0
Flash Memory Sector Address Bits (High Byte)
The 15th to 8th bits to select a sector of Flash ROM
NOTE: The high-byte Flash memory sector address pointer value is the higher eight bits of the 16-bit pointer address.
PS031305-1017
4-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.8 FMSECL
•
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (Low Byte): EFH, SET 1, BANK 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
Flash Memory Sector Address Bit (Low Byte)
The 7th bit to select a sector of Flash ROM
.6–.0
Bits 6–0
Don't care
NOTE: The low-byte Flash memory sector address pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit pointer address.
4.1.9 FMUSR
•
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register: EDH, SET 1, BANK 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.0
PS031305-1017
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Bits
10100101
Enable user programming mode
Other values
Disable user programming mode
4-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.10 ICCR
•
Multi-master IIC Bus Clock Control Register: F0H, SET1, BANK1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
nRESET Value
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Read/Write
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7
Acknowledgement Enable Bit
.6
.5
.4
.3–.0
0
Acknowledgement disable mode
1
Acknowledgement enable mode
Tx Clock Selection Bit
0
fOSC/16
1
fOSC/512
Multi-master IIC Bus Tx/Rx Interrupt Enable Bit
0
Disable
1
Enable
Multi-master
0
Interrupt request is not pending; (when read) pending bit clear when write 0
1
Interrupt request is pending (when read)
ICCR.3–0: Transmit Clock 4-Bit prescaler Bits
SCL clock = IICLK/CCR[3:0] + 1
where, IICLK = fOSC/16 when IICR.6 is "0", IICLK = fOSC/512 when ICCR.6 is "1"
PS031305-1017
4-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.11 ICSR
•
IIC Status Register: F1H, SET1, BANK1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
nRESET Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Read/Write
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
IIC Bus Master/Slave Tx/Rx Mode Selection Bits
.5
.4
.3
0
0
Slave receiver mode (default mode)
0
1
Slave transmitter mode
1
0
Master receiver mode
1
1
Master transmitter mode
IIC Bus Busy Bit
0
IIC-bus is not busy
0
Stop condition generation
1
IIC-bus is busy (when read)
1
Stop condition generation (when write)
IIC-bus Interface Module Enable Bit
0
Disable IIC-bus data transmit/receive
1
Enable IIC-bus data transmit/receive
Arbitration Lost Bit
This bit is set by H/W when the serial I/O interface, in master transmit mode, loses a
bus arbitration procedure. In slave mode this flag is set to "1" when ICCR.5 is "1" and
ICSR.2 is "0"
.2
.1
.0
PS031305-1017
Address Match Bit
0
When Start or Stop or Reset
1
When received slave address matches to IAR register or general call
General Call Bit
0
When Start/Stop condition is generated
1
When received slave address is "00000000" (general call)
Received Acknowledge Bit
0
ACK is received
1
ACK is not received
4-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.12 IMR
•
Interrupt Mask Register: DDH, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Interrupt Level 7 (IRQ7)
0
Disable (mask)
1
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 6 (IRQ6)
0
Disable (mask)
1
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 5 (IRQ5)
0
Disable (mask)
1
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 4 (IRQ4)
0
Disable (mask)
1
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 3 (IRQ3)
0
Disable (mask)
1
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 2 (IRQ2)
0
Disable (mask)
1
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 1 (IRQ1)
0
Disable (mask)
1
Enable (unmask)
Interrupt Level 0 (IRQ0)
0
Disable (mask)
1
Enable (unmask)
NOTE: When an interrupt level is masked, the CPU does not recognize any interrupt requests that may be issued.
PS031305-1017
4-15
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.13 IPH
•
Instruction Pointer (High Byte): DAH, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.0
Instruction Pointer Address (High Byte)
The high-byte instruction pointer value is the upper eight bits of the 16-bit instruction
pointer address (IP15 to IP8). The lower byte of the IP address is located in the IPL
register (DBH).
4.1.14 IPL
•
Instruction Pointer (Low Byte): DBH, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.0
Instruction Pointer Address (Low Byte)
The low-byte instruction pointer value is the lower eight bits of the 16-bit instruction
pointer address (IP7 to IP0). The upper byte of the IP address is located in the IPH
register (DAH).
PS031305-1017
4-16
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.15 IPR
•
Interrupt Priority Register: FFH, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7, .4 and .1
.6
Priority Control Bits for Interrupt Groups A, B, and C (NOTE)
0
0
0
Group priority undefined
0
0
1
B>C>A
0
1
0
A>B>C
0
1
1
B>A>C
1
0
0
C>A>B
1
0
1
C>B>A
1
1
0
A>C>B
1
1
1
Group priority undefined
Interrupt Subgroup C Priority Control Bit
.5
0
IRQ6 > IRQ7
1
IRQ7 > IRQ6
Interrupt Group C Priority Control Bit
.3
0
IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7)
1
(IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
Interrupt Subgroup B Priority Control Bit
.2
0
IRQ3 > IRQ4
1
IRQ4 > IRQ3
Interrupt Group B Priority Control Bit
.0
0
IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4)
1
(IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
Interrupt Group A Priority Control Bit
0
IRQ0 > IRQ1
1
IRQ1 > IRQ0
NOTE: Interrupt Group A: IRQ0, IRQ1
Interrupt Group B: IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4
Interrupt Group C: IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7
PS031305-1017
4-17
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.16 IRQ
•
Interrupt Request Register: DCH, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
PS031305-1017
Level 7 (IRQ7) Request Pending Bit;
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 6 (IRQ6) Request Pending Bit;
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 5 (IRQ5) Request Pending Bit;
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 4 (IRQ4) Request Pending Bit;
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 3 (IRQ3) Request Pending Bit;
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 2 (IRQ2) Request Pending Bit;
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 1 (IRQ1) Request Pending Bit;
0
Not pending
1
Pending
Level 0 (IRQ0) Request Pending Bit;
0
Not pending
1
Pending
4-18
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.17 LVDCON
•
Interrupt Request Register: F4H, SET 1, BANK 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
–
0
–
–
–
0
0
Read/Write
RW
–
R
–
–
–
RW
RW
.7
LVD Enable/Disable Bit
0
LVD Disable
1
LVD Enable
.6
Not Used in S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.5
LVD Output Bit (Read Only)
0
VDD > VLVD
1
VDD < VLVD
.4
Not Used in S3F8S28/S3F8S24 (must be kept as "0")
.3-.2
Not Used in S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.1–.0
Detection Voltage Level Selection Bits
PS031305-1017
0
0
VLVD0 = 4.1V
0
1
VLVD1 = 3.2V
1
0
VLVD2 = 2.5V
1
1
VLVD3 = 2.1V
4-19
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.18 P0CONH
•
Port 0 Control Register (High Byte): E6H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
PS031305-1017
Port 0, P0.7/INT7 Configuration Bits
0
x
Schmitt trigger input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
A/D converter input (ADC7); Schmitt trigger input off
Port 0, P0.6/ADC6/PWM0 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input
0
1
Alternative function (PWM0 output)
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
A/D converter input (ADC6); Schmitt trigger input off
Port 0, P0.5/ADC5/PWM1 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input
0
1
Alternative function (PWM1 output)
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
A/D converter input (ADC5); Schmitt trigger input off
Port 0, P0.4/ADC4 Configuration Bits
0
x
Schmitt trigger input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
A/D converter input (ADC4); Schmitt trigger input off
4-20
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.19 P0CONL
•
Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte): E7H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
PS031305-1017
Port 0, P0.3/INT3 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
0
1
Alternative function: SDA input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
A/D converter input (ADC3); Schmitt trigger input off
Port 0, P0.2/ADC2 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
0
1
Alternative function: SCK input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
A/D converter input (ADC2); Schmitt trigger input off
Port 0, P0.1/ADC1/INT1 Configuration Bits
0
x
Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
A/D converter input (ADC1); Schmitt trigger input off
Port 0, P0.0/ADC0/INT0 Configuration Bits
0
x
Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
A/D converter input (ADC0); Schmitt trigger input off
4-21
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.20 P0PND
•
Port 0 Interrupt Pending Register: E8H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
PS031305-1017
Port 0.3/ADC3/INT3 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
INT3 falling edge interrupt disable
1
INT3 falling edge interrupt enable
Port 0.3/ADC3/INT3 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Pending bit clear (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
Port 0.2/ADC2/INT2 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
INT2 falling edge interrupt disable
1
INT2 falling edge interrupt enable
Port 0.2/ADC2/INT2 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Pending bit clear (when write)
1
Interrupt pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
Port 0.1/ADC1/INT1 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
INT1 falling edge interrupt disable
1
INT1 falling edge interrupt enable
Port 0.1/ADC1/INT1 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Pending bit clear (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
Port 0.0/ADC0/INT0 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
INT0 falling edge interrupt disable
1
INT0 falling edge interrupt enable
4-22
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
.0
PS031305-1017
Chapter 4. Control Registers
Port 0.0/ADC0/INT0 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Pending bit clear (when write)
1
Interrupt pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
4-23
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.21 P0PUR
•
Port 0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Register: E5H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
PS031305-1017
Port 0.7 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Port 0.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Port 0.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Port 0.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Port 0.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable Pull-up Resistor
1
Enable Pull-up Resistor
Port 0.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable Pull-up Resistor
1
Enable Pull-up Resistor
Port 0.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable Pull-up Resistor
1
Enable Pull-up Resistor
Port 0.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Disable Pull-up Resistor
1
Enable Pull-up Resistor
4-24
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.22 P1CON
•
Port 1 Control Register: E9H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
–
–
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
–
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
.6
Part 1.1 N-channel open-drain Enable Bit
0
Configure P1.1 as a push-pull output
1
Configure P1.1 as a n-channel open-drain output
Port 1.0 N-channel open-drain Enable Bit
0
Configure P1.0 as a push-pull output
1
Configure P1.0 as a n-channel open-drain output
.5
Not used for S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.4
Port 1.2 Configuration Bit
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
Configure P1.2 as a Schmitt trigger input;
1
Configure P1.2 as a open-drain output
Port 1, P1.1 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input;
0
1
Schmitt trigger input; pull-up enable
1
0
Output
1
1
Schmitt trigger input; pull-down enable
Port 1, P1.0 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input;
0
1
Schmitt trigger input; pull-up enable
1
0
Output
1
1
Schmitt trigger input; pull-down enable
NOTE: When you use external oscillator, P1.0, P1.1 must be set to output port to prevent current consumption.
PS031305-1017
4-25
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.23 P2CONH
•
Port 2 Control Register (High Byte): EAH, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.6–.4
Port 2, P2.6/ADC8/CLO Configuration Bits
.3–.2
.1–.0
0
0
x
Schmitt trigger input
0
1
x
ADC input
1
0
0
Push-pull output
1
0
1
Open-drain output; pull-up enable
1
1
0
Open-drain output
1
1
1
Alternative function; CLO output
Port 2, 2.5/ADC9 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input
0
1
Alternative function: ADC Input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
Invalid
Port 2, 2.4/ADC10 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input
0
1
Alternative function: ADC Input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
Invalid
NOTE: When noise problem is important issue, you had better not use CLO output.
PS031305-1017
4-26
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.24 P2CONL
•
Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte): EBH, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
PS031305-1017
Part 2, P2.3 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input
0
1
Alternative function: TxD output
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
Open-drain output
Port 2, P2.2 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input T1 capture input; RxD input
0
1
Alternative function: RxD output
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
Open-drain output
Port 2, P2.1 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input
0
1
Alternative function:T1 match output
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
Open-drain output
Port 2, P2.0 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input
0
1
Alternative function:T0 match output
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
Open-drain output
4-27
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.25 P2PUR
•
Port 2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Register: E4H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.6
Port 2.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
PS031305-1017
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Port 2.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Part 2.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Part 2.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Part 2.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Part 2.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
Part 2.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0
Enable Pull-up Resistor
1
Disable Pull-up Resistor
4-28
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.26 P3CON
•
Port 3 Control Register: F0H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.6
.5–.4
.3–.2
.1–.0
PS031305-1017
Part 3, P3.3 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
0
1
Schmitt trigger input with pull-up/falling edge interrupt input
1
x
Push-pull output
Port 3, P3.2 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
0
1
Schmitt trigger input with pull-up /falling edge interrupt input
1
x
Push-pull output
Port 3, P3.1/ADC12 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
0
1
Schmitt trigger input with pull-up /falling edge interrupt input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
Alternative function: ADC input
Port 3, P3.0/ADC11 Configuration Bits
0
0
Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
0
1
Schmitt trigger input with pull-up /falling edge interrupt input
1
0
Push-pull output
1
1
Alternative function: ADC input
4-29
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.27 P3PND
•
Port 3 Interrupt Pending Register: EFH, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
PS031305-1017
Port 3.3/ADC12/INT7 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
INT7 falling edge interrupt disable
1
INT7 falling edge interrupt enable
Port 3.3/ADC12/INT7 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Pending bit clear (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
Port 3.2/ADC11/INT6 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
INT6 falling edge interrupt disable
1
INT6 falling edge interrupt enable
Port 3.2/ADC11/INT6 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Pending bit clear (when write)
1
Interrupt pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
Port 3.1/ADC10/INT5 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
INT5 falling edge interrupt disable
1
INT5 falling edge interrupt enable
Port 3.1/ADC10/INT5 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Pending bit clear (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
Port 3.0/ADC9/INT4 Interrupt Enable Bit
0
INT4 falling edge interrupt disable
1
INT4 falling edge interrupt enable
4-30
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
.0
Chapter 4. Control Registers
Port 3.0/ADC9/INT4 Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Pending bit clear (when write)
1
Interrupt pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
4.1.28 PP
•
Register Page Pointer: DFH, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.0
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24.
NOTE: In S3F8S28/S3F8S24, only page 0 settings are valid. Register page pointer values for the source and destination
register page are automatically set to "00F" following a hardware reset. These values should not be changed during
normal operation.
PS031305-1017
4-31
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.29 PWM0CON
•
PWM0 Control Register: F3H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.6
PWM Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
fOSC/64
0
1
fOSC/8
1
0
fOSC/2
1
1
fOSC/1
.5
Not used for S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.4
PWM0DATA Reload Interval Selection Bit
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Reload from extension up counter overflow
1
Reload from base up counter overflow
PWM Counter Clear Bit
0
No effect
1
Clear the PWM counter (when write)
PWM Counter Enable Bit
0
Stop counter
1
Start (Resume countering)
PWM Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit (12-bit overflow)
0
Disable interrupt
1
Enable interrupt
PWM Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
NOTE: PWM0CON.3 is not autocleared. You must pay attention when clear pending bit. (Refer to page 13-14).
PS031305-1017
4-32
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.30 PWM1CON
•
PWM1 Control Register: E8H, SET 1, BANK 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.6
PWM Input Clock Selection Bits
0
0
fOSC/64
0
1
fOSC/8
1
0
fOSC/2
1
1
fOSC/1
.5
Not used for S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.4
PWM1DATA Reload Interval Selection Bit
.3
.2
.1
.0
0
Reload from extension up counter overflow
1
Reload from base up counter overflow
PWM Counter Clear Bit
0
No effect
1
Clear the PWM counter (when write)
PWM Counter Enable Bit
0
Stop counter
1
Start (Resume countering)
PWM Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit (12-bit overflow)
0
Disable interrupt
1
Enable interrupt
PWM Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
NOTE: PWM1CON.3 is not autocleared. You must pay attention when clear pending bit. (Refer to page 13-14).
PS031305-1017
4-33
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.31 PWM0EX
•
PWM0 Extension Register: F1H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.2
PWM Extension Bits
PWM extension bits:
Bit .7–.2 for 6+6 resolution and 8+6 resolution;
Bit .7–.6 for 6+2 resolution
.1–.0
PWM Base/extension Control bits:
0
0
1
0
0
1
Base 6-bit (PWM0DATA.5–.0) + Extension 2-bit (PWM0EX.7–.6)
1
1
Base 8-bit (PWM0DATA.7–.0) + Extension 6-bit (PWM0EX.7–.2)
Base 6-bit (PWM0DATA.7–.2) + Extension 6-bit (PWM0EX.7–.2)
4.1.32 PWM1EX
•
PWM1 Extension Register: E6H, SET 1, BANK 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.2
PWM Extension Bits
PWM extension bits:
Bit .7–.2 for 6+6 resolution and 8+6 resolution
Bit .7–.6 for 6+2 resolution
.1–.0
PS031305-1017
PWM Base/extension Control bits:
0
0
1
0
0
1
Base 6-bit (PWM1DATA.5–.0) + Extension 2-bit (PWM1EX.7–.6)
1
1
Base 8-bit (PWM1DATA.7–.0) + Extension 6-bit (PWM1EX.7–.2)
Base 6-bit (PWM1DATA.7–.2) + Extension 6-bit (PWM1EX.7–.2)
4-34
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.33 RESETID
•
Reset Source Indicating Register: EAH, SET 1, BANK1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
–
RW
RW
RW
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.3
Watchdog Timer Reset Indicating Bit
.2
0
Reset is not generated by Watch dog (when read)
1
Reset is generated by Watch dog (when read)
nReset pin Indicating Bit
.1
0
Reset is not generated by nReset pin (when read)
1
Reset is generated by nReset pin (when read)
Basic Timer Reset Indicating Bit
.0
0
Reset is not generated by Basic Timer (when read)
1
Reset is generated by Basic Timer (when read)
LVR Reset Indicating Bit
0
Reset is not generated by LVR (when read)
1
Reset is generated by LVR (when read)
State of RESETID depends on reset source
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LVR
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
1
WDT, or nReset pin
–
–
–
–
(4)
(4)
(4)
(3)
NOTE:
1.
When LVR is disabled (Smart Option 3FH.7 = 0), RESETID.0 is invalid; when P1.2 is set to be IO (Smart Option 3FH.4 =
0), RESETID.3 is invalid.
2.
To clear an indicating register, write a "0" to indicating flag bit; writing a "1" has no effect.
3.
Once a LVR reset happens, RESETID.1 will be set and all the other bits will be cleared to "0" at the same time.
4.
Once a WDT reset, Basic Timer reset or nRESET pin reset happens, corresponding bit will be set, but leave all other
indicating bits unchanged.
PS031305-1017
4-35
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.34 ROSCCON
•
Ring Oscillator Control Register: F5H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
Ring OSC Enable Bit
.6
0
Disable Ring OSC
1
Enable Ring OSC
Free Running Watchdog Timer Clock Source Selection Bit
.5–.0
0
System Clock: Fosc
1
Ring OSC clock
Ring OSC Frequency Trimming Bits
000000
Maximum frequency
111111
Minimum frequency.
4.1.35 RP0
•
Register Pointer 0: D6H, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
1
1
0
0
0
–
–
–
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
–
–
–
.7–.3
Register Pointer 0 Address Value
Register pointer 0 can independently point to one of the 208byte working register
areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two
8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP0
points to address C0H, selecting the 8byte working register slice C0H to C7H.
.2–.0
PS031305-1017
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
4-36
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.36 RP1
•
Register Pointer 1: D7H, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
1
1
0
0
1
–
–
–
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
–
–
–
.7–.3
Register Pointer 1 Address Value
Register pointer 1 can independently point to one of the 208byte working register
areas in the register file. Using the register pointers RP0 and RP1, you can select two
8-byte register slices at one time as active working register space. After a reset, RP1
points to address C8H, selecting the 8byte working register slice C8H to CFH.
.2–.0
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
4.1.37 SPL
•
Stack Pointer: D9H, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.0
Stack Pointer Address (Low Byte)
The SP value is undefined following a reset.
4.1.38 STOPCON
•
Stop Mode Control Register: F4H, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7–.0
Watchdog Timer Function Enable Bit
10100101
Enable STOP instruction
Other value
Disable STOP instruction
NOTE:
1.
Before execute the STOP instruction, set this STPCON register as "10100101b".
2.
When STOPCON register is not #0A5H value, if you use STOP instruction, PC is changed to reset address.
PS031305-1017
4-37
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.39 SYM
•
System Mode Register: DEH, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
–
–
x
x
x
0
0
Read/Write
RW
–
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Tri-state External Interface Control Bit (1)
.7
0
Normal operation (disable tri-state operation)
1
Set external interface lines to high impedance (enable tri-state operation)
.6–.5
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.4–.2
Fast Interrupt Level Selection Bits (2)
0
0
0
IRQ0
0
0
1
IRQ1
0
1
0
IRQ2
0
1
1
IRQ3
1
0
0
IRQ4
1
0
1
IRQ5
1
1
0
IRQ6
1
1
1
IRQ7
Fast Interrupt Enable Bit (3)
.1
0
Disable fast interrupt processing
1
Enable fast interrupt processing
Global Interrupt Enable Bit (4)
.0
0
Disable all interrupt processing
1
Enable all interrupt processing
NOTE:
1.
Because an external interface is not implemented, SYM.7 must always be "0".
2.
You can select only one interrupt level at a time for fast interrupt processing.
3.
Setting SYM.1 to "1" enables fast interrupt processing for the interrupt level currently selected by SYM.2 to SYM.4.
4.
Following a reset, you must enable global interrupt processing by executing an EI instruction (not by writing a "1" to
SYM.0).
PS031305-1017
4-38
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.40 T1CON
•
Timer 1 Control Register: E4H, SET 1, Bank1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
Timer 1 Operating Mode Selection Bits
.5
0
0
Interval timer mode (counter cleared by match signal)
0
1
Capture mode (rising edges, counter running, OVF interrupt can occur)
1
0
Capture mode (falling edges, counter running, OVF interrupt can occur)
1
1
Capture mode (both falling edges and rising edges, counter running, OVF
interrupt can occur)
Timer 1 Counter Run Enable Bit
.4
0
Stop Timer 1 (Disable Counter Run)
1
Start Timer 1 (Enable Counter Run)
Timer 1 Counter Clear Bit
.3
0
No effect
1
Clear T1 counter, T1CNT (when write, After clearing, return to "0")
Timer 1 Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit
.2
0
Disable T1 overflow interrupt
1
Enable T1 overflow interrupt
Timer 1 Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit
.1
0
No interrupt pending (when read); Clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read); No effect (when write)
Timer 1 Match/Capture Interrupt Enable Bit
.0
0
Disable T1 match/capture interrupt
1
Enable T1 match/capture interrupt
Timer 1 Match/Capture Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read); Clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read); No effect (when write)
NOTE: A Timer 1 overflow interrupt pending condition is automatically cleared by hardware. However, the Timer 1
match/capture interrupt, IRQ3, vector ECH, must be cleared by the interrupt service routine (S/W).
PS031305-1017
4-39
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.41 T1PS
•
Timer 1 Prescaler Register (Low Byte): E5H, SET 1, Bank1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.4
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.3–.0
Timer 1 prescaler bits
T1 clock = FOSC/(2T1PS[3–0]) prescaler values above 12 are invalid
4.1.42 TACON
•
Timer 0/A Control Register: D2H, SET 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
Timer 0 Operating Mode Selection Bit
0
Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A/B)
1
One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 0)
.6
Must be always "0"
.5–.4
Timer 0/A Clock Selection Bits
.3
.2
0
0
fxx/256
0
1
fxx/64
1
0
fxx/8
1
1
fxx
Timer 0/A Counter Clear Bit (NOTE)
0
No effect
1
Clear the Timer 0/A counter (when write)
Timer 0/A Counter Run Enable Bit
0
PS031305-1017
Disable Counter Running
4-40
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
1
.1
Chapter 4. Control Registers
Enable Counter Running
Timer 0/A Interrupt Enable Bit
.0
0
Disable interrupt
1
Enable interrupt
Timer 0/A Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
NOTE:
1.
When you write "1" to TACON.3, the Timer 0/A counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write
operation, the TACON.3 value is automatically cleared to "0".
2.
TACON.6 must be always "0" during normal operation.
PS031305-1017
4-41
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.43 TBCON
•
Timer B Control Register: EEH, SET 1, BANK 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
–
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
–
–
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7 and .6
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.5 and .4
Timer B Clock Selection Bits
0
0
fxx/256
0
1
fxx/64
1
0
fxx/8
1
1
fxx
Timer B Counter Clear Bit (NOTE)
.3
.2
0
No effect
1
Clear the timer B counter (when write)
Timer B Counter Run Enable Bit
.1
0
Disable Counter Running
1
Enable Counter Running
Timer B Interrupt Enable Bit
.0
0
Disable interrupt
1
Enable interrupt
Timer B Interrupt Pending Bit
0
No interrupt pending (when read)
0
Clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt is pending (when read)
1
No effect (when write)
NOTE: When you write a "1" to TBCON.3, the Timer B counter value is cleared to "00H". Immediately following the write
operation, the TBCON.3 value is automatically cleared to "0".
PS031305-1017
4-42
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.44 UARTCON
•
UART Control Register: F5H, Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Addressing Mode
Register addressing mode only
.7–.6
Operating mode and baud rate selection bits
0
0
Mode 0: SIO mode [fxx/(16 (BRDATA + 1))]
0
1
Mode 1: 8-bit UART [fxx/(16 (BRDATA + 1))]
1
0
Mode 2: 9-bit UART [fxx/16]
1
1
Mode 3: 9-bit UART [fxx/(16 (BRDATA + 1))]
Multiprocessor communication (1) enable bit (for modes 2 and 3 only)
.5
.4
0
Disable
1
Enable
Serial data receive enable bit
0
Disable
1
Enable
.3
Location of the 9th data bit to be transmitted in UART Mode 2 or 3 ("0" or "1")
.2
Location of the 9th data bit that was received in UART Mode 2 or 3 ("0" or "1")
.1
Receive interrupt enable bit
.0
0
Disable Receive interrupt
1
Enable Receive interrupt
Transmit interrupt enable bit
0
Disable Transmit interrupt
1
Enable Transmit Interrupt
NOTE:
1.
In mode 2 or 3, if the MCE (UARTCON.5) bit is set to "1", then the receive interrupt will not be activated if the received 9th
data bit is "0". In mode 1, if MCE = "1", then the receive interrupt will not be activated if a valid stop bit was not received.
In mode 0, the MCE (UARTCON.5) bit should be "0".
2.
The descriptions for 8-bit and 9-bit UART Mode do not include start and stop bits for serial data receive and transmit.
PS031305-1017
4-43
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.45 UARTPND
•
UART Pending and parity control: F6H, Set 1, Bank 1
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
–
–
–
–
–
–
0
0
Read/Write
–
–
–
–
–
–
RW
RW
.7–.2
Not used for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24
.1
UART receive interrupt pending flag
.0
0
Not pending
0
Clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt pending
UART transmit interrupt pending flag
0
Not pending
0
Clear pending bit (when write)
1
Interrupt pending
NOTE:
1.
In order to clear a data transmit or receive interrupt pending flag, you must write a "0" to the appropriate pending bit.
2.
To avoid programming errors, we recommend using load instruction (except for LDB), when manipulating UARTPND
values.
PS031305-1017
4-44
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 4. Control Registers
4.1.46 WDTCON
•
Watchdog Timer Control Register: F6H, Set 1, Bank 0
Bit Identifier
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
Reset Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Read/Write
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3–.0
Watchdog Timer Enable bit
0
Disable Watchdog Timer
1
Enable Watchdog Timer
Watchdog Time Overflow Reset Enable bit
0
Disable Overflow Reset
1
Enable Overflow Reset
Watchdog Timer Interrupt Enable bit
0
Disable Interrupt
1
Enable Interrupt
Watchdog Timer Counter bit 10 Clear bit
0
No effect
1
Clear counter bit 10 (when write)
Watchdog clock prescaler bits
Watchdog clock = FLCLK/(2WDPS[3–0])
NOTE: FLCLK means the clock source for free running Watchdog Timer, that was selected by ROSCCON.6
PS031305-1017
4-45
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
5
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
Interrupt Structure
5.1 Overview
The S3C8/S3F8 Series interrupt structure has three basic components: levels, vectors, and sources. The
SAM8RC CPU recognizes up to eight interrupt levels and supports up to 128 interrupt vectors. When a specific
interrupt level has more than one vector address, the vector priorities are established in hardware. A vector
address can be assigned to one or more sources.
5.1.1 Levels
Interrupt levels are the main unit for interrupt priority assignment and recognition. All peripherals and I/O blocks
can issue interrupt requests. In other words, peripheral and I/O operations are interrupt-driven. There are eight
possible interrupt levels: IRQ0 to IRQ7, also called level 0 to level 7. Each interrupt level directly corresponds to an
interrupt request number (IRQn). The total number of interrupt levels used in the interrupt structure varies from
device to device. The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 interrupt structure recognizes eight interrupt levels.
The interrupt level numbers 0 through 7 do not necessarily indicate the relative priority of the levels. They are just
identifiers for the interrupt levels that are recognized by the CPU. The relative priority of different interrupt levels is
determined by settings in the interrupt priority register, IPR. Interrupt group and subgroup logic controlled by IPR
settings let you define more complex priority relationships between different levels.
5.1.2 Vectors
Each interrupt level can have one or more interrupt vectors, or it may have no vector address assigned at all. The
maximum number of vectors that can be supported for a given level is 128 (The actual number of vectors used for
S3C8/S3F8 Series devices is always much smaller). If an interrupt level has more than one vector address, the
vector priorities are set in hardware. S3F8S28/S3F8S24 uses 17 vectors.
5.1.3 Sources
A source is any peripheral that generates an interrupt. A source can be an external pin or a counter overflow.
Each vector can have several interrupt sources. In the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 interrupt structure, there are 17
possible interrupt sources.
When a service routine starts, the respective pending bit should be either cleared automatically by hardware or
cleared "manually" by program software. The characteristics of the source's pending mechanism determine which
method would be used to clear its respective pending bit.
PS031305-1017
5-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.2 Interrupt Types
The three components of the S3C8/S3F8 interrupt structure described before - levels, vectors, and sources - are
combined to determine the interrupt structure of an individual device and to make full use of its available interrupt
logic. There are three possible combinations of interrupt structure components, called interrupt types 1, 2, and 3.
The types differ in the number of vectors and interrupt sources assigned to each level (see Figure 5-1):
•
Type 1: One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + one source (S1)
•
Type 2: One level (IRQn) + one vector (V1) + multiple sources (S1 – Sn)
•
Type 3: One level (IRQn) + multiple vectors (V1 – Vn) + multiple sources (S1 – Sn, Sn + 1 – Sn + m)
In the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontroller, two interrupt types are implemented.
Type 1:
Levels
Vectors
Sources
IRQn
V1
S1
S1
Type 2:
IRQn
V1
S2
S3
Sn
Type 3:
IRQn
V1
S1
V2
S2
V3
S3
Vn
Sn
NOTES:
1. The number of Sn and Vn value is expandable.
2. In the S3F8S28/F8S24 implementation, interrupt
types 1 and 3 are used.
Figure 5-1
PS031305-1017
Sn + 1
Sn + 2
Sn + m
S3C8/S3F8 Series Interrupt Types
5-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.3 S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Interrupt Structure
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontroller supports 17 interrupt sources. Every interrupt source has a corresponding
interrupt address. Eight interrupt levels are recognized by the CPU in this device-specific interrupt structure, as
shown in Figure 5-2.
When multiple interrupt levels are active, the interrupt priority register (IPR) determines the order in which
contending interrupts are to be serviced. If multiple interrupts occur within the same interrupt level, the interrupt
with the lowest vector address is usually processed first (The relative priorities of multiple interrupts within a single
level are fixed in hardware).
When the CPU grants an interrupt request, interrupt processing starts. All other interrupts are disabled and the
program counter value and status flags are pushed to stack. The starting address of the service routine is fetched
from the appropriate vector address (plus the next 8-bit value to concatenate the full 16-bit address) and the
service routine is executed.
Levels
Vectors
RESET
100H
Basic timer overflow
H/W
FEH
External interrupt 0
S/W
FCH
External interrupt 1
S/W
FAH
External interrupt 2
S/W
F8H
External interrupt 3
S/W
F6H
Timer 0/A match interrupt
S/W
F4H
Timer B match interrupt
S/W
F2H
PWM0 overflow interrupt
S/W
F0H
PWM1 overflow interrupt
S/W
ECH
Timer 1 match/capture interrupt
S/W
EAH
Timer 1 overflow interrupt
H/W
E6H
Watchdog interrupt
H/W
E4H
UART transmit interrupt
S/W
E2H
UART Receive interrupt
S/W
E0H
IIC transmit / receive interrupt
S/W
DEH
External interrupt 4
S/W
DCH
External interrupt 5
S/W
DAH
External interrupt 6
S/W
D8H
External interrupt 7
S/W
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
NOTE:
Reset/Clear
External interrupts are triggered by a falling edge.
Figure 5-2
PS031305-1017
Sources
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Interrupt Structure
5-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.3.1 Interrupt Vector Addresses
All interrupt vector addresses for the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 interrupt structure is stored in the vector address area of
the first 256 bytes of the program memory (ROM).
You can allocate unused locations in the vector address area as normal program memory. If you do so, please be
careful not to overwrite any of the stored vector addresses.
The program reset address in the ROM is 0100H.
(Decimal)
8,191
(HEX)
1FFFH
S3F8S28: 8K-byte
Program Memory
Area
0FFFH
4,095
S3F8S24: 4K-byte
Program Memory
Area
100H
FFH
255
Reset
Address
Interrupt Vector
Address Area
0
Figure 5-3
00H
ROM Vector Address Area
5.3.2 Enable/Disable Interrupt Instructions (EI, DI)
Executing the Enable Interrupts (EI) instruction globally enables the interrupt structure. All interrupts are then
serviced as they occur according to the established priorities.
NOTE: The system initialization routine executed after a reset must always contain an EI instruction to globally enable the
interrupt structure.
During the normal operation, you can execute the DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction at any time to globally disable
interrupt processing. The EI and DI instructions change the value of bit 0 in the SYM register.
PS031305-1017
5-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.4 System-Level Interrupt Control Registers
In addition to the control registers for specific interrupt sources, four system-level registers control interrupt
processing:
•
The interrupt mask register, IMR, enables (un-masks) or disables (masks) interrupt levels.
•
The interrupt priority register, IPR, controls the relative priorities of interrupt levels.
•
The interrupt request register, IRQ, contains interrupt pending flags for each interrupt level (as opposed to
each interrupt source).
•
The system mode register, SYM, enables or disables global interrupt processing (SYM settings also enable
fast interrupts and control the activity of external interface, if implemented).
Table 5-1
Control Register
Interrupt mask register
Interrupt Control Register Overview
ID
RW
Function Description
IMR
RW
Bit settings in the IMR register enable or disable interrupt
processing for each of the eight interrupt levels: IRQ0 to IRQ7.
Interrupt priority register
IPR
RW
Controls the relative processing priorities of the interrupt levels.
The eight levels of S3F8S28/S3F8S24 are organized into three
groups: A, B, and C. Group A is IRQ0 and IRQ1, group B is IRQ2,
IRQ3 and IRQ4, and group C is IRQ5, IRQ6, and IRQ7.
Interrupt request register
IRQ
R
This register contains a request pending bit for each interrupt level.
System mode register
SYM
RW
This register enables/disables fast interrupt processing, and
dynamic global interrupt processing.
NOTE: All interrupts must be disabled before IMR register is changed to any value. Using DI instruction is recommended.
PS031305-1017
5-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.5 Interrupt Processing Control Points
Interrupt processing can therefore be controlled in two ways: globally or by specific interrupt level and source. The
system-level control points in the interrupt structure are:
•
Global interrupt enable and disable (by EI and DI instructions or by direct manipulation of SYM.0)
•
Interrupt level enable/disable settings (IMR register)
•
Interrupt level priority settings (IPR register)
•
Interrupt source enable/disable settings in the corresponding peripheral control registers
NOTE: When writing an application program that handles interrupt processing, be sure to include the necessary register file
address (register pointer) information.
EI
S
nRESET
R
Q
Interrupt Request Register
(Read-only)
Polling
Cycle
IRQ0-IRQ7,
Interrupts
Interrupt Priority
Register
Vector
Interrupt
Cycle
Interrupt Mask
Register
Global Interrupt Control
(EI, DI or SYM.0
manipulation)
Figure 5-4
PS031305-1017
Interrupt Function Diagram
5-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.6 Peripheral Interrupt Control Registers
For each interrupt source there is one or more corresponding peripheral control registers that let you control the
interrupt generated by the related peripheral (see Table 5-2).
Table 5-2
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Source Control and Data Registers
Interrupt Level
Register (s)
Location (s)
P0.0 to P0.3 external interrupt
IRQ0
P0CONL
P0PND
E7H, Bank0
E8H, Bank0
Timer 0/A match interrupt
Timer B match interrupt
IRQ1
TACON
P2CONL
TBCON
D0H, Bank0
EBH, Bank0
D1H, Bank0
PWM0 overflow interrupt
PWM1 overflow interrupt
IRQ2
PWM0CON
PWM1CON
P0CONH
F3H, Bank0
E8H, Bank1
E6H, Bank0
Timer 1 match/capture interrupt
Timer 1 overflow interrupt
IRQ3
T1CON
E4H, Bank1
Watchdog interrupt
IRQ4
WDTCON
F6H, Bank0
IRQ5
UARTCON
UARTPND
BRDATA
UDATA
F5H, Bank1
F6H, Bank1
F7H, Bank1
F8H, Bank1
IIC Transmit/Receive interrupt
IRQ6
ICCR
ICSR
IDSR
IAR
F0H, Bank1
F1H, Bank1
F2H, Bank1
F3H, Bank1
P3.0 to P3.3 external interrupt
IRQ7
P3CON
P3PND
F0H, Bank0
EFH, Bank0
UART Transmit interrupt
UART Receive interrupt
PS031305-1017
5-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.7 System Mode Register (SYM)
The system mode register, SYM (DEH), is used to globally enable and disable interrupt processing and to control
fast interrupt processing (see Figure 5-5).
A reset clears SYM.1 and SYM.0 to "0". The 3-bit value for fast interrupt level selection, SYM.4 to SYM.2, is
undetermined.
The instructions EI and DI enable and disable global interrupt processing, respectively, by modifying the bit 0
value of the SYM register. In order to enable interrupt processing an Enable Interrupt (EI) instruction must be
included in the initialization routine, which follows a reset operation. Although you can manipulate SYM.0 directly
to enable and disable interrupts during the normal operation, it is recommended to use the EI and DI instructions
for this purpose.
System Mode Register (SYM)
DEH, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.3
.4
.2
Always logic "0".
Fast interrupt level
selection bits:
Not used for the
S3F8S28/F8S24
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Figure 5-5
PS031305-1017
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
.1
.0
LSB
Global interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable all interrupts processing
1 = Enable all interrupts processing
Fast interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable fast interrupts processing
1 = Enable fast interrupts processing
System Mode Register (SYM)
5-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.8 Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
The interrupt mask register, IMR (DDH) is used to enable or disable interrupt processing for individual interrupt
levels. After a reset, all IMR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be written to their required settings by
the initialization routine.
Each IMR bit corresponds to a specific interrupt level: bit 1 to IRQ1, bit 2 to IRQ2, and so on. When the IMR bit of
an interrupt level is cleared to "0", interrupt processing for that level is disabled (masked). When you set a level's
IMR bit to "1", interrupt processing for the level is enabled (not masked).
The IMR register is mapped to register location DDH. Bit values can be read and written by instructions using the
Register addressing mode.
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
DDH, R/W
MSB
.7
IRQ7
NOTE:
.6
IRQ6
.5
IRQ5
IRQ4
.3
IRQ3
.2
IRQ2
.1
IRQ1
.0
LSB
IRQ0
Interrupt level enable bit:
0 = Disable (mask) interrupt level
1 = Enable (un-mask) interrupt level
Before IMR register is changed to any value,
all interrupts must be disable.
Using DI instruction is recommended.
Figure 5-6
PS031305-1017
.4
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
5-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.9 Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
The interrupt priority register, IPR (FFH), is used to set the relative priorities of the interrupt levels in the
microcontroller’s interrupt structure. After a reset, all IPR bit values are undetermined and must therefore be
written to their required settings by the initialization routine.
When more than one interrupt sources are active, the source with the highest priority level is serviced first. If two
sources belong to the same interrupt level, the source with the lower vector address usually has the priority (This
priority is fixed in hardware).
To support programming of the relative interrupt level priorities, they are organized into groups and subgroups by
the interrupt logic. Please note that these groups (and subgroups) are used only by IPR logic for the IPR register
priority definitions (see Figure 5-7):
•
Group A
IRQ0, IRQ1
•
Group B
IRQ2, IRQ3, IRQ4
•
Group C
IRQ5, IRQ6, IRQ7
IPR
Group A
A1
IPR
Group B
A2
B1
B2
B21
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2 IRQ3
Figure 5-7
PS031305-1017
IPR
Group C
C1
B22
IRQ4
C2
C21
IRQ5 IRQ6
C22
IRQ7
Interrupt Request Priority Groups
5-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
As you can see in Figure 5-8, IPR.7, IPR.4, and IPR.1 control the relative priority of interrupt groups A, B, and C.
For example, the setting "001B" for these bits would select the group relationship B > C > A. The setting "101B"
would select the relationship C > B > A.
The functions of the other IPR bit settings are as follows:
•
IPR.5 controls the relative priorities of group C interrupts.
•
Interrupt group C includes a subgroup that has an additional priority relationship among the interrupt levels 5,
6, and 7. IPR.6 defines the subgroup C relationship. IPR.5 controls the interrupt group C.
•
IPR.0 controls the relative priority setting of IRQ0 and IRQ1 interrupts.
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
FFH, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
Group priority:
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
= Undefined
=B>C>A
=A>B>C
=B>A>C
=C>A>B
=C>B>A
=A>C>B
= Undefined
Group B
0 = IRQ2 > (IRQ3, IRQ4)
1 = (IRQ3, IRQ4) > IRQ2
Subgroup B
0 = IRQ3 > IRQ4
1 = IRQ4 > IRQ3
Group C
0 = IRQ5 > (IRQ6, IRQ7)
1 = (IRQ6, IRQ7) > IRQ5
Subgroup C
0 = IRQ6 > IRQ7
1 = IRQ7 > IRQ6
Figure 5-8
PS031305-1017
LSB
Group A
0 = IRQ0 > IRQ1
1 = IRQ1 > IRQ0
D7 D4 D1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
.0
Interrupt Priority Register (IPR)
5-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.10 Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
You can poll bit values in the interrupt request register, IRQ (DCH), to monitor interrupt request status for all levels
in the microcontroller's interrupt structure. Each bit corresponds to the interrupt level of the same number: bit 0 to
IRQ0, bit 1 to IRQ1, and so on. A "0" indicates that no interrupt request is currently being issued for that level. A
"1" indicates that an interrupt request has been generated for that level.
IRQ bit values are read-only addressable using Register addressing mode. You can read (test) the contents of the
IRQ register at any time using bit or byte addressing to determine the current interrupt request status of specific
interrupt levels. After a reset, all IRQ status bits are cleared to "0".
You can poll IRQ register values even if a DI instruction has been executed (that is, if global interrupt processing is
disabled). If an interrupt occurs while the interrupt structure is disabled, the CPU will not service it. You can,
however, still detect the interrupt request by polling the IRQ register. In this way, you can determine which events
occurred while the interrupt structure was globally disabled.
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
DCH, Read-only
MSB
.7
IRQ7
.6
IRQ6
.5
IRQ5
Figure 5-9
PS031305-1017
.4
.3
IRQ4
IRQ3
.2
IRQ2
.1
IRQ1
.0
LSB
IRQ0
Interrupt level request pending bits:
0 = Interrupt level is not pending
1 = Interrupt level is pending
Interrupt Request Register (IRQ)
5-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.11 Interrupt Pending Function Types
5.11.1 Overview
There are two types of interrupt pending bits: one type that is automatically cleared by hardware after the interrupt
service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared in the interrupt service routine.
5.11.2 Pending Bits Cleared Automatically by Hardware
For interrupt pending bits that are cleared automatically by hardware, interrupt logic sets the corresponding
pending bit to "1" when a request occurs. It then issues an IRQ pulse to inform the CPU that an interrupt is waiting
to be serviced. The CPU acknowledges the interrupt source by sending an IACK, executes the service routine,
and clears the pending bit to "0". This type of pending bit is not mapped and cannot, therefore, be read or written
by application software.
In the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 interrupt structure, Timer 1 overflow interrupt and Watchdog Timer interrupt belong to
this category of interrupts in which pending condition is cleared automatically by hardware.
5.11.3 Pending Bits Cleared by the Service Routine
The second type of pending bit is the one that should be cleared by program software. The service routine must
clear the appropriate pending bit before a return-from-interrupt subroutine (IRET) occurs. To do this, a "0" must be
written to the corresponding pending bit location in the source’s mode or control register.
PS031305-1017
5-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.12 Interrupt Source Polling Sequence
The interrupt request polling and servicing sequence is as follows:
1. A source generates an interrupt request by setting the interrupt request bit to "1".
2. The CPU polling procedure identifies a pending condition for that source.
3. The CPU checks the source's interrupt level.
4. The CPU generates an interrupt acknowledge signal.
5. Interrupt logic determines the interrupt's vector address.
6. The service routine starts and the source's pending bit is cleared to "0" (by hardware or by software).
7. The CPU continues polling for interrupt requests.
5.13 Interrupt Service Routines
Before an interrupt request is serviced, the following conditions must be met:
•
Interrupt processing must be globally enabled (EI, SYM.0 = "1")
•
The interrupt level must be enabled (IMR register)
•
The interrupt level must have the highest priority if more than one level is currently requesting service
•
The interrupt must be enabled at the interrupt's source (peripheral control register)
When all the above conditions are met, the interrupt request is acknowledged at the end of the instruction cycle.
The CPU then initiates an interrupt machine cycle that completes the following processing sequence:
1. Reset (clear to "0") the interrupt enable bit in the SYM register (SYM.0) to disable all subsequent interrupts.
2. Save the program counter (PC) and status flags to the system stack.
3. Branch to the interrupt vector to fetch the address of the service routine.
4. Pass control to the interrupt service routine.
When the interrupt service routine is completed, the CPU issues an Interrupt Return (IRET). The IRET restores the
PC and status flags, setting SYM.0 to "1". It allows the CPU to process the next interrupt request.
PS031305-1017
5-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.14 Generating Interrupt Vector Addresses
The interrupt vector area in the ROM (00H to FFH) contains the addresses of interrupt service routines that
correspond to each level in the interrupt structure. Vectored interrupt processing follows this sequence:
1. Push the program counter's low-byte value to the stack.
2. Push the program counter's high-byte value to the stack.
3. Push the FLAG register values to the stack.
4. Fetch the service routine's high-byte address from the vector location.
5. Fetch the service routine's low-byte address from the vector location.
6. Branch to the service routine specified by the concatenated 16-bit vector address.
NOTE: A 16-bit vector address always begins at an even-numbered ROM address within the range of 00H to FFH.
5.15 Nesting of Vectored Interrupts
It is possible to nest a higher-priority interrupt request while a lower-priority request is being serviced. To do this,
you must follow these steps:
1. Push the current 8-bit interrupt mask register (IMR) value to the stack (PUSH IMR).
2. Load the IMR register with a new mask value that enables only the higher priority interrupt.
3. Execute an EI instruction to enable interrupt processing (a higher priority interrupt will be processed if it
occurs).
4. When the lower-priority interrupt service routine ends, execute DI, restore the IMR to its original value by
returning the previous mask value from the stack (POP IMR).
5. Execute an IRET.
Depending on the application, you may be able to simplify the procedure above to some extent.
5.16 Instruction Pointer (IP)
The instruction pointer (IP) is adopted by all the S3C8/S3F8 Series microcontrollers to control the optional highspeed interrupt processing feature called fast interrupts. The IP consists of register pair DAH and DBH. The
names of IP registers are IPH (high byte, IP15 to IP8) and IPL (low byte, IP7 to IP0).
PS031305-1017
5-15
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.17 Fast Interrupt Processing
The feature called fast interrupt processing allows an interrupt within a given level to be completed in
approximately 6 clock cycles rather than the usual 16 clock cycles. To select a specific interrupt level for fast
interrupt processing, you write the appropriate 3-bit value to SYM.4 to SYM.2. Then, to enable fast interrupt
processing for the selected level, you set SYM.1 to "1".
Two other system registers support fast interrupt processing:
•
The instruction pointer (IP) contains the starting address of the service routine (and is later used to swap the
program counter values), and
•
When a fast interrupt occurs, the contents of the FLAGS register are stored in an unmapped, dedicated
register called FLAGS' ("FLAGS prime").
NOTE: For the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontroller, the service routine for any one of the eight interrupt levels:
IRQ0 to IRQ7, can be selected for fast interrupt processing.
5.18 Procedure for Initiating Fast Interrupts
To initiate fast interrupt processing, follow these steps:
1. Load the start address of the service routine into the instruction pointer (IP).
2. Load the interrupt level number (IRQn) into the fast interrupt selection field (SYM.4 to SYM.2)
3. Write a "1" to the fast interrupt enable bit in the SYM register.
5.19 Fast Interrupt Service Routine
When an interrupt occurs in the level selected for fast interrupt processing, the following events occur:
1. The contents of the instruction pointer and the PC are swapped.
2. The FLAG register values are written to the FLAGS' ("FLAGS prime") register.
3. The fast interrupt status bit in the FLAGS register is set.
4. The interrupt is serviced.
5. Assuming that the fast interrupt status bit is set, when the fast interrupt service routine ends, the instruction
pointer and PC values are swapped back.
6. The content of FLAGS ("FLAGS prime") is copied automatically back to the FLAGS register.
7. The fast interrupt status bit in FLAGS is cleared automatically.
PS031305-1017
5-16
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 5. Interrupt Structure
5.20 Relationship to Interrupt Pending Bit Types
As described previously, there are two types of interrupt pending bits: One type that is automatically cleared by
hardware after the interrupt service routine is acknowledged and executed; the other that must be cleared by the
application program's interrupt service routine. You can select fast interrupt processing for interrupts with either
type of pending condition clear function-by hardware or by software.
5.21 Programming Guidelines
Remember that the only way to enable/disable a fast interrupt is to set/clear the fast interrupt enable bit in the
SYM register, SYM.1. Executing an EI or DI instruction globally enables or disables all interrupt processing,
including fast interrupts. If you use fast interrupts, remember to load the IP with a new start address when the fast
interrupt service routine ends.
PS031305-1017
5-17
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
6
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
Instruction Set
6.1 Overview
The SAM8RC instruction set is specifically designed to support the large register files that are typical of most
SAM8 microcontrollers. There are 78 instructions. The powerful data manipulation capabilities and features of the
instruction set include:
•
A full complement of 8-bit arithmetic and logic operations, including multiply and divide
•
No special I/O instructions (I/O control/data registers are mapped directly into the register file)
•
Decimal adjustment included in binary-coded decimal (BCD) operations
•
16-bit (word) data can be incremented and decremented
•
Flexible instructions for bit addressing, rotate, and shift operations
6.1.1 Data Types
The SAM8 CPU performs operations on bits, bytes, BCD digits, and two-byte words. Bits in the register file can be
set, cleared, complemented, and tested. Bits within a byte are numbered from 7 to 0, where bit 0 is the least
significant (right-most) bit.
6.1.2 Register Addressing
To access an individual register, an 8-bit address in the range 0 to 255 or the 4-bit address of a working register is
specified. Paired registers can be used to construct 16-bit data or 16-bit program memory or data memory
addresses. For detailed information about register addressing, please refer to Chapter 2 Address Spaces.
6.1.3 Addressing Modes
There are seven explicit addressing modes: Register (R), Indirect Register (IR), Indexed (X), Direct (DA), Relative
(RA), Immediate (IM), and Indirect (IA). For detailed descriptions of these addressing modes, please refer to
Chapter 3 Addressing Modes.
PS031305-1017
6-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 6-1
Mnemonic
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
Instruction Group Summary
Operands
Instruction
Load Instructions
CLR
dst
Clear
LD
dst,src
Load
LDB
dst,src
Load bit
LDE
dst,src
Load external data memory
LDC
dst,src
Load program memory
LDED
dst,src
Load external data memory and decrement
LDCD
dst,src
Load program memory and decrement
LDEI
dst,src
Load external data memory and increment
LDCI
dst,src
Load program memory and increment
LDEPD
dst,src
Load external data memory with predecrement
LDCPD
dst,src
Load program memory with predecrement
LDEPI
dst,src
Load external data memory with preincrement
LDCPI
dst,src
Load program memory with preincrement
LDW
dst,src
Load word
POP
dst
Pop from stack
POPUD
dst,src
Pop user stack (decrementing)
POPUI
dst,src
Pop user stack (incrementing)
PUSH
src
Push to stack
PUSHUD
dst,src
Push user stack (decrementing)
PUSHUI
dst,src
Push user stack (incrementing)
ADC
dst,src
Add with carry
ADD
dst,src
Add
CP
dst,src
Compare
DA
dst
Decimal adjust
DEC
dst
Decrement
DECW
dst
Decrement word
Arithmetic Instructions
DIV
dst,src
Divide
INC
dst
Increment
INCW
dst
Increment word
MULT
dst,src
Multiply
SBC
dst,src
Subtract with carry
SUB
dst,src
Subtract
AND
dst,src
Logical AND
COM
dst
Complement
Logic Instructions
PS031305-1017
6-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Mnemonic
Operands
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
Instruction
OR
dst,src
Logical OR
XOR
dst,src
Logical exclusive OR
BTJRF
dst,src
Bit test and jump relative on false
BTJRT
dst,src
Bit test and jump relative on true
Program Control Instructions
CALL
dst
CPIJE
dst,src
Compare, increment and jump on equal
CPIJNE
dst,src
Compare, increment and jump on non-equal
DJNZ
r,dst
Call procedure
Decrement register and jump on non-zero
ENTER
–
Enter
EXIT
–
Exit
IRET
–
Interrupt return
JP
cc,dst
JP
dst
JR
cc,dst
Jump on condition code
Jump unconditional
Jump relative on condition code
NEXT
–
Next
RET
–
Return
WFI
–
Wait for interrupt
Bit Manipulation Instructions
BAND
dst,src
Bit AND
BCP
dst,src
Bit compare
BITC
dst
Bit complement
BITR
dst
Bit reset
BITS
dst
Bit set
BOR
dst,src
Bit OR
BXOR
dst,src
Bit XOR
TCM
dst,src
Test complement under mask
TM
dst,src
Test under mask
Rotate and Shift Instructions
RL
dst
Rotate left
RLC
dst
Rotate left through carry
RR
dst
Rotate right
RRC
dst
Rotate right through carry
SRA
dst
Shift right arithmetic
SWAP
dst
Swap nibbles
CPU Control Instructions
CCF
–
Complement carry flag
DI
–
Disable interrupts
PS031305-1017
6-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Mnemonic
Operands
Instruction
EI
–
Enable interrupts
IDLE
–
Enter Idle mode
NOP
–
No operation
RCF
–
Reset carry flag
SB0
–
Set bank 0
SB1
–
Set bank 1
SCF
–
Set carry flag
SRP
src
Set register pointers
SRP0
src
Set register pointer 0
SRP1
src
Set register pointer 1
STOP
–
PS031305-1017
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
Enter Stop mode
6-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.2 Flags Register (FLAGS)
The flags register FLAGS contains eight bits that describe the current status of CPU operations. Four of these bits,
FLAGS.7 to FLAGS.4, can be tested and used with conditional jump instructions; two others FLAGS.3 and
FLAGS.2 are used for BCD arithmetic.
The FLAGS register also contains a bit to indicate the status of fast interrupt processing (FLAGS.1) and a bank
address status bit (FLAGS.0) to indicate whether bank 0 or bank 1 is currently being addressed. FLAGS register
can be set or reset by instructions as long as its outcome does not affect the flags, such as, Load instruction.
Logical and Arithmetic instructions such as, AND, OR, XOR, ADD, and SUB can affect the Flags register. For
example, the AND instruction updates the Zero, Sign and Overflow flags based on the outcome of the AND
instruction. If the AND instruction uses the Flags register as the destination, then simultaneously, two write will
occur to the Flags register producing an unpredictable result.
System Flags Register (FLAGS)
D5H, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Bank address
status flag (BA)
Carry flag (C)
Fast interrupt
status flag (FIS)
Zero flag (Z)
Sign flag (S)
PS031305-1017
.4
Half-carry flag (H)
Overflow flag (V)
Decimal adjust flag (D)
Figure 6-1
System Flags Register (FLAGS)
6-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.2.1 Flag Descriptions
•
C: Carry Flag (FLAGS.7)
The C flag is set to "1" if the result from an arithmetic operation generates a carry-out from or a borrow to the
bit 7 position (MSB). After rotate and shift operations, it contains the last value shifted out of the specified
register. Program instructions can set, clear, or complement the carry flag.
•
Z: Zero Flag (FLAGS.6)
For arithmetic and logic operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result of the operation is zero. For operations
that test register bits, and for shift and rotate operations, the Z flag is set to "1" if the result is logic zero.
•
S: Sign Flag (FLAGS.5)
Following arithmetic, logic, rotate, or shift operations, the sign bit identifies the state of the MSB of the result. A
logic zero indicates a positive number and a logic one indicates a negative number.
•
V: Overflow Flag (FLAGS.4)
The V flag is set to "1" when the result of a two's-complement operation is greater than + 127 or less than –
128. It is also cleared to "0" following logic operations.
•
D: Decimal Adjust Flag (FLAGS.3)
The DA bit is used to specify what type of instruction was executed last during BCD operations, so that a
subsequent decimal adjust operation can execute correctly. The DA bit is not usually accessed by
programmers, and cannot be used as a test condition.
•
H: Half-Carry Flag (FLAGS.2)
The H bit is set to "1" whenever an addition generates a carry-out of bit 3, or when a subtraction borrows out
of bit 4. It is used by the Decimal Adjust (DA) instruction to convert the binary result of a previous addition or
subtraction into the correct decimal (BCD) result. The H flag is seldom accessed directly by a program.
•
FIS: Fast Interrupt Status Flag (FLAGS.1)
The FIS bit is set during a fast interrupt cycle and reset during the IRET following interrupt servicing. When
set, it inhibits all interrupts and causes the fast interrupt return to be executed when the IRET instruction is
executed.
•
BA: Bank Address Flag (FLAGS.0)
The BA flag indicates which register bank in the set 1 area of the internal register file is currently selected,
bank 0 or bank 1. The BA flag is cleared to "0" (select bank 0) when you execute the SB0 instruction and is
set to "1" (select bank 1) when you execute the SB1 instruction.
PS031305-1017
6-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.3 Instruction Set Notation
Table 6-2
Flag Notation Conventions
Flag
Description
C
Carry flag
Z
Zero flag
S
Sign flag
V
Overflow flag
D
Decimal-adjust flag
H
Half-carry flag
0
Cleared to logic zero
1
Set to logic one
*
Set or cleared according to operation
–
Value is unaffected
x
Value is undefined
Table 6-3
Instruction Set Symbols
Symbol
dst
Destination operand
src
Source operand
@
Indirect register address prefix
PC
Program counter
IP
Instruction pointer
FLAGS
RP
Flags register (D5H)
Register pointer
#
Immediate operand or register address prefix
H
Hexadecimal number suffix
D
Decimal number suffix
B
Binary number suffix
opc
PS031305-1017
Description
Opcode
6-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 6-4
Notation
cc
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
Instruction Notation Conventions
Description
Actual Operand Range
Condition code
See list of condition codes in Table 6-7.
r
Working register only
Rn (n = 0–15)
rb
Bit (b) of working register
Rn.b (n = 0–15, b = 0–7)
r0
Bit 0 (LSB) of working register
Rn (n = 0–15)
rr
Working register pair
RRp (p = 0, 2, 4, ..., 14)
R
Register or working register
reg or Rn (reg = 0 to 255, n = 0 to 15)
Rb
Bit (b) of register or working register
reg.b (reg = 0 to 255, b = 0 to 7)
RR
Register pair or working register pair
reg or RRp (reg = 0–254, even number only, where p
= 0, 2, ..., 14)
IA
Indirect addressing mode
addr (addr = 0 to 254, even number only)
Ir
Indirect working register only
@Rn (n = 0 to 15)
IR
Indirect register or indirect working register
@Rn or @reg (reg = 0 to 255, n = 0 to 15)
Irr
Indirect working register pair only
@RRp (p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
Indirect register pair or indirect working
register pair
@RRp or @reg (reg = 0 to 254, even only, where
p = 0, 2, ..., 14)
Indexed addressing mode
#reg [Rn] (reg = 0 to 255, n = 0 to 15)
XS
Indexed (short offset) addressing mode
#addr [RRp] (addr = range – 128 to + 127, where p =
0, 2, ..., 14)
xl
Indexed (long offset) addressing mode
#addr [RRp] (addr = range 0 to 65535, where p = 0,
2, ..., 14)
da
Direct addressing mode
addr (addr = range 0 to 65535)
ra
Relative addressing mode
addr (addr = number in the range + 127 to – 128 that
is an offset relative to the address of the next
instruction)
im
Immediate addressing mode
#data (data = 0 to 255)
iml
Immediate (long) addressing mode
#data (data = range 0 to 65535)
IRR
X
PS031305-1017
6-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 6-5
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
OPCODE Quick Reference
OPCODE Map
Lower Nibble (HEX)
–
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
U
0
DEC
R1
DEC
IR1
ADD
r1,r2
ADD
r1,Ir2
ADD
R2,R1
ADD
IR2,R1
ADD
R1,IM
BOR
r0–Rb
P
1
RLC
R1
RLC
IR1
ADC
r1,r2
ADC
r1,Ir2
ADC
R2,R1
ADC
IR2,R1
ADC
R1,IM
BCP
r1.b, R2
P
2
INC
R1
INC
IR1
SUB
r1,r2
SUB
r1,Ir2
SUB
R2,R1
SUB
IR2,R1
SUB
R1,IM
BXOR
r0–Rb
E
3
JP
IRR1
SRP/0/1
IM
SBC
r1,r2
SBC
r1,Ir2
SBC
R2,R1
SBC
IR2,R1
SBC
R1,IM
BTJR
r2.b, RA
R
4
DA
R1
DA
IR1
OR
r1,r2
OR
r1,Ir2
OR
R2,R1
OR
IR2,R1
OR
R1,IM
LDB
r0–Rb
5
POP
R1
POP
IR1
AND
r1,r2
AND
r1,Ir2
AND
R2,R1
AND
IR2,R1
AND
R1,IM
BITC
r1.b
N
6
COM
R1
COM
IR1
TCM
r1,r2
TCM
r1,Ir2
TCM
R2,R1
TCM
IR2,R1
TCM
R1,IM
BAND
r0–Rb
I
7
PUSH
R2
PUSH
IR2
TM
r1,r2
TM
r1,Ir2
TM
R2,R1
TM
IR2,R1
TM
R1,IM
BIT
r1.b
B
8
DECW
RR1
DECW
IR1
PUSHUD
IR1,R2
PUSHUI
IR1,R2
MULT
R2,RR1
MULT
IR2,RR1
MULT
IM,RR1
LD
r1, x, r2
B
9
RL
R1
RL
IR1
POPUD
IR2,R1
POPUI
IR2,R1
DIV
R2,RR1
DIV
IR2,RR1
DIV
IM,RR1
LD
r2, x, r1
L
A
INCW
RR1
INCW
IR1
CP
r1,r2
CP
r1,Ir2
CP
R2,R1
CP
IR2,R1
CP
R1,IM
LDC
r1, Irr2,
xL
E
B
CLR
R1
CLR
IR1
XOR
r1,r2
XOR
r1,Ir2
XOR
R2,R1
XOR
IR2,R1
XOR
R1,IM
LDC
r2, Irr2,
xL
C
RRC
R1
RRC
IR1
CPIJE
Ir,r2,RA
LDC
r1,Irr2
LDW
RR2,RR1
LDW
IR2,RR1
LDW
RR1,IML
LD
r1, Ir2
H
D
SRA
R1
SRA
IR1
CPIJNE
Irr,r2,RA
LDC
r2,Irr1
CALL
IA1
LD
IR1,IM
LD
Ir1, r2
E
E
RR
R1
RR
IR1
LDCD
r1,Irr2
LDCI
r1,Irr2
LD
R2,R1
LD
R2,IR1
LD
R1,IM
LDC
r1, Irr2,
xs
X
F
SWAP
R1
SWAP
IR1
LDCPD
r2,Irr1
LDCPI
r2,Irr1
CALL
IRR1
LD
IR2,R1
CALL
DA1
LDC
r2, Irr1,
xs
PS031305-1017
6-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 6-6
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
OPCODE Quick Reference
OPCODE MAP
LOWER NIBBLE (HEX)
–
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
0
LD
r1,R2
LD
r2,R1
DJNZ
r1,RA
JR
cc,RA
LD
r1,IM
JP
cc,DA
INC
r1
NEXT
P
1
ENTER
P
2
E
3
R
4
EXIT
WFI
SB0
SB1
5
N
6
I
7
B
8
B
9
L
A
E
B
IDLE
DI
EI
RET
IRET
RCF
C
H
D
E
E
X
F
PS031305-1017
STOP
SCF
CCF
LD
r1,R2
LD
r2,R1
DJNZ
r1,RA
JR
cc,RA
LD
r1,IM
JP
cc,DA
INC
r1
NOP
6-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.4 Condition Codes
The opcode of a conditional jump always contains a 4-bit field called the condition code (cc). This specifies under
which conditions it is to execute the jump. For example, a conditional jump with the condition code for "equal" after
a compare operation only jumps if the two operands are equal. Condition codes are listed in Table 6-7.
The carry (C), zero (Z), sign (S), and overflow (V) flags are used to control the operation of conditional jump
instructions.
Table 6-7
Binary
Mnemonic
Condition Codes
Description
Flags Set
0000
F
Always false
–
1000
T
Always true
–
0111 (NOTE)
C
Carry
C=1
1111 (NOTE)
NC
No carry
C=0
Zero
Z=1
0110
(NOTE)
Z
1110 (NOTE)
NZ
Not zero
Z=0
1101
PL
Plus
S=0
0101
MI
Minus
S=1
0100
OV
Overflow
V=1
1100
NOV
No overflow
V=0
0110 (NOTE)
EQ
Equal
Z=1
1110 (NOTE)
NE
Not equal
Z=0
1001
GE
Greater than or equal
(S XOR V) = 0
0001
LT
Less than
(S XOR V) = 1
1010
GT
Greater than
(Z OR (S XOR V)) = 0
LE
Less than or equal
(Z OR (S XOR V)) = 1
0010
(NOTE)
UGE
Unsigned greater than or equal
C=0
0111 (NOTE)
ULT
Unsigned less than
C=1
1011
UGT
Unsigned greater than
0011
ULE
Unsigned less than or equal
1111
(C = 0 AND Z = 0) = 1
(C OR Z) = 1
NOTE:
1.
It indicates condition codes that are related to two different mnemonics but which test the same flag. For example, Z and
EQ are both true if the zero flag (Z) is set, but after an ADD instruction, Z would probably be used; after a CP instruction,
however, EQ would probably be used.
2.
For operations involving unsigned numbers, the special condition codes UGE, ULT, UGT, and ULE must be used.
PS031305-1017
6-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5 Instruction Descriptions
This section contains detailed information and programming examples for each instruction in the SAM8 instruction
set. Information is arranged in a consistent format for improved readability and for fast referencing. The following
information is included in each instruction description:
•
Instruction name (mnemonic)
•
Full instruction name
•
Source/destination format of the instruction operand
•
Shorthand notation of the instruction's operation
•
Textual description of the instruction's effect
•
Specific flag settings affected by the instruction
•
Detailed description of the instruction's format, execution time, and addressing mode(s)
•
Programming example(s) explaining how to use the instruction
PS031305-1017
6-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.1 ADC (Add with Carry)
ADC
dst, src
Operation:
dst dst + src + c
The source operand, along with the setting of the carry flag, is added to the destination operand
and the sum is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Two'scomplement addition is performed. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the
carry from the addition of low-order operands to be carried into the addition of high-order
operands.
Flags:
C: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurs, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result is
of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise.
D: Always cleared to "0".
H: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result;
cleared otherwise.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
12
r
r
6
13
r
lr
6
14
R
R
6
15
R
IR
6
16
R
IM
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C flag = "1", Register 01H = 20H, Register 02H = 03H, and Register
03H = 0AH:
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
ADC
R1, R2
R1, @R2
01H, 02H
01H, @02H
01H, #11H
→
→
→
→
→
R1 = 14H, R2 = 03H
R1 = 1BH, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 24H, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 2BH, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 32H
In the first example, destination register R1 contains the value 10H, the carry flag is set to "1", and
the source working register R2 contains the value 03H. The statement "ADC R1, R2" adds 03H
and the carry flag value ("1") to the destination value 10H, leaving 14H in register R1.
PS031305-1017
6-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.2 ADD (Add)
ADD
dst, src
Operation:
dst dst + src
The source operand is added to the destination operand and the sum is stored in the destination.
The contents of the source are unaffected. Two's-complement addition is performed.
Flags:
C: Set if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the result; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if both operands are of the same sign and the result
is of the opposite sign; cleared otherwise.
D: Always cleared to "0".
H: Set if a carry from the low-order nibble occurred.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
02
r
r
6
03
r
lr
6
04
R
R
6
05
R
IR
6
06
R
IM
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, Register 01H = 21H, Register 02H = 03H, Register 03H = 0AH:
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
R1, R2
R1, @R2
01H, 02H
01H, @02H
01H, #25H
→
→
→
→
→
R1 = 15H, R2 = 03H
R1 = 1CH, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 24H, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 2BH, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 46H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains 12H and the source working register
R2 contains 03H. The statement "ADD R1, R2" adds 03H to 12H, leaving the value 15H in
register R1.
PS031305-1017
6-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.3 AND (Logical AND)
AND
dst, src
Operation:
dst dst AND src
The source operand is logically ANDed with the destination operand. The result is stored in the
destination. The AND operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever the corresponding bits
in the two operands are both logic ones; otherwise a "0" bit value is stored. The contents of the
source are unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
52
r
r
6
53
r
lr
6
54
R
R
6
55
R
IR
6
56
R
IM
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, Register 01H = 21H, Register 02H = 03H, Register 03H = 0AH:
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
R1, R2
R1, @R2
01H, 02H
01H, @02H
01H, #25H
→
→
→
→
→
R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H
R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 01H, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 00H, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 21H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 12H and the source
working register R2 contains 03H. The statement "AND R1, R2" logically ANDs the source
operand 03H with the destination operand value 12H, leaving the value 02H in register R1.
PS031305-1017
6-15
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.4 BAND (Bit AND)
BAND
dst, src.b
BAND
dst.b, src
Operation:
dst(0) dst(0) AND src(b)
or
dst(b) dst(b) AND src(0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ANDed with the zero bit (LSB) of the
destination (or source). The resultant bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No other
bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
67
r0
Rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
6
67
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3-byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address "b"
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and Register 01H = 05H:
BAND R1, 01H.1
BAND 01H.1, R1
→
→
R1 = 06H, Register 01H = 05H
Register 01H = 05H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, source register 01H contains the value 05H (00000101B) and destination
working register R1 contains 07H (00000111B). The statement "BAND R1, 01H.1" ANDs the1- bit
value of the source register ("0") with the 0-bit value of register R1 (destination), leaving the value
06H (00000110B) in register R1.
PS031305-1017
6-16
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.5 BCP (Bit Compare)
BCP
dst, src.b
Operation:
dst (0) – src (b)
The specified bit of the source is compared to (subtracted from) bit zero (LSB) of the destination.
The zero flag is set if the bits are the same; otherwise it is cleared. The contents of both operands
are unaffected by the comparison.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the two bits are the same; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
dst | b | 0
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
6
17
Addr Mode
dst
src
r0
Rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address "b" is three bits, and
the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H and register 01H = 01H:
BCP
R1, 01H.1
→
R1 = 07H, Register 01H = 01H
If destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and the source register
01H contains the value 01H (00000001B), the statement "BCP R1, 01H.1" compares bit one of
the source register (01H) and bit zero of the destination register (R1). Because the bit values are
not identical, the zero flag bit (Z) is cleared in the FLAGS register (0D5H).
PS031305-1017
6-17
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.6 BITC (Bit Complement)
BITC
dst.b
Operation:
dst (b) NOT dst (b)
This instruction complements the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other
bits in the destination.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
dst | b | 0
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
57
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address "b" is three bits, and
the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 7H
BITC
R1.1
→
R1 = 05H
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITC R1.1"
complements bit one of the destination and leaves the value 05H (00000101B) in register R1.
Because the result of the complement is not "0", the zero flag (Z) in the FLAGS register (0D5H) is
cleared.
PS031305-1017
6-18
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.7 BITR (Bit Reset)
BITR
dst.b
Operation:
dst (b) 0
The BITR instruction clears the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits
in the destination.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
dst | b | 0
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
77
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address "b" is three bits, and
the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BITR
R1.1
→
R1 = 05H
If the value of working register R1 is 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITR R1.1" clears bit one
of the destination register R1, leaving the value 05H (00000101B).
PS031305-1017
6-19
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.8 BITS (Bit Set)
BITS
dst.b
Operation:
dst (b) 1
The BITS instruction sets the specified bit within the destination without affecting any other bits in
the destination.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
dst | b | 1
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
77
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the destination address is four bits, the bit address "b" is three bits, and
the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BITS
R1.3
→
R1 = 0FH
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BITS R1.3" sets bit
three of the destination register R1 to "1", leaving the value 0FH (00001111B).
PS031305-1017
6-20
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.9 BOR (Bit OR)
BOR
dst, src.b
BOR
dst.b, src
Operation:
dst (0) dst (0) OR src (b)
or
dst (b) dst (b) OR src(0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically ORed with bit zero (LSB) of the
destination (or the source). The resulting bit value is stored in the specified bit of the destination.
No other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
07
r0
Rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
6
07
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address "b"
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H and Register 01H = 03H:
BOR
BOR
R1, 01H.1
01H.2, R1
→
→
R1 = 07H, Register 01H = 03H
Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B) and
source register 01H the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BOR R1, 01H.1" logically ORs
bit one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). This leaves the same value (07H)
in working register R1.
In the second example, destination register 01H contains the value 03H (00000011B) and the
source working register R1 the value 07H (00000111B). The statement "BOR 01H.2, R1" logically
ORs bit two of register 01H (destination) with bit zero of R1 (source). This leaves the value 07H in
register 01H.
PS031305-1017
6-21
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.10 BTJRF (Bit Test, Jump Relative on False)
BTJRF
dst, src.b
Operation:
If src (b) is a "0", then PC PC + dst
The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "0", the relative address is added to
the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC;
otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRF instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
(NOTE)
opc
src | b | 0
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
10
37
Addr Mode
dst
src
RA
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address "b" is three bits, and the
LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BTJRF SKIP, R1.3
→
PC jumps to SKIP location
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRF SKIP, R1.3"
tests 3-bit. Because it is "0", the relative address is added to the PC and the PC jumps to the
memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the memory location must be within the
allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
PS031305-1017
6-22
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.11 BTJRT (Bit Test, Jump Relative on True)
BTJRT
dst, src.b
Operation:
If src (b) is a "1", then PC PC + dst
The specified bit within the source operand is tested. If it is a "1", the relative address is added to
the program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC;
otherwise, the instruction following the BTJRT instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
(NOTE)
opc
src | b | 1
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
10
37
Addr Mode
dst
src
RA
rb
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction format, the source address is four bits, the bit address "b" is three bits, and the
LSB address value is one bit in length.
Example:
Given: R1 = 07H:
BTJRT SKIP, R1.1
If working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B), the statement "BTJRT SKIP, R1.1"
tests bit one in the source register (R1). Because it is a "1", the relative address is added to the
PC and the PC jumps to the memory location pointed to by the SKIP. (Remember that the
memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
PS031305-1017
6-23
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.12 BXOR (Bit XOR)
BXOR
dst, src.b
BXOR
dst.b, src
Operation:
dst (0) dst (0) XOR src (b)
or
dst (b) dst (b) XOR src (0)
The specified bit of the source (or the destination) is logically exclusive-ORed with bit zero (LSB)
of the destination (or source). The result bit is stored in the specified bit of the destination. No
other bits of the destination are affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Cleared to "0".
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
27
r0
Rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
6
27
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the 3byte instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address "b"
is three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R1 = 07H (00000111B) and register 01H = 03H (00000011B):
BXOR R1, 01H.1
BXOR 01H.2, R1
→
→
R1 = 06H, Register 01H = 03H
Register 01H = 07H, R1 = 07H
In the first example, destination working register R1 has the value 07H (00000111B) and source
register 01H has the value 03H (00000011B). The statement "BXOR R1, 01H.1" exclusive-ORs
bit one of register 01H (source) with bit zero of R1 (destination). The result bit value is stored in bit
zero of R1, changing its value from 07H to 06H. The value of source register 01H is unaffected.
PS031305-1017
6-24
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.13 CALL (Call Procedure)
CALL
dst
Operation:
SP
SP – 1
@SP
PCL
SP
SP –1
@SP
PCH
PC
dst
The current contents of the program counter are pushed onto the top of the stack. The program
counter value used is the address of the first instruction following the CALL instruction. The
specified destination address is then loaded into the program counter and points to the first
instruction of a procedure. At the end of the procedure the return instruction (RET) can be used to
return to the original program flow. RET pops the top of the stack back into the program counter.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
3
14
F6
DA
opc
dst
2
12
F4
IRR
opc
dst
2
14
D4
IA
Given: R0 = 35H, R1 = 21H, PC = 1A47H, and SP = 0002H:
CALL
3521H →
CALL
CALL
@RR0 →
#40H →
SP = 000H (Memory locations 0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 4AH, where 4AH
is the address that follows the instruction.)
SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H)
SP = 0000H (0000H = 1AH, 0001H = 49H)
In the first example, if the program counter value is 1A47H and the stack pointer contains the
value 0002H, the statement "CALL 3521H" pushes the current PC value onto the top of the stack.
The stack pointer now points to memory location 0000H. The PC is then loaded with the value
3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed.
If the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, the
statement "CALL @RR0" produces the same result except that the 49H is stored in stack location
0001H (because the two-byte instruction format was used). The PC is then loaded with the value
3521H, the address of the first instruction in the program sequence to be executed. Assuming that
the contents of the program counter and stack pointer are the same as in the first example, if
program address 0040H contains 35H and program address 0041H contains 21H, the statement
"CALL #40H" produces the same result as in the second example.
PS031305-1017
6-25
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.14 CCF (Complement Carry Flag)
CCF
Operation:
C NOT C
The carry flag (C) is complemented. If C = "1", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic zero;
if C = "0", the value of the carry flag is changed to logic one.
Flags:
C: Complemented.
No other flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4
EF
Given: The carry flag = "0":
CCF
If the carry flag = "0", the CCF instruction complements it in the FLAGS register (0D5H), changing
its value from logic zero to logic one.
PS031305-1017
6-26
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.15 CLR (Clear)
CLR
dst
Operation:
dst "0"
The destination location is cleared to "0".
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
B0
R
4
B1
IR
Given: Register 00H = 4FH, Register 01H = 02H, and Register 02H = 5EH:
CLR
CLR
00H
→
@01H →
Register 00H = 00H
Register 01H = 02H, Register 02H = 00H
In Register (R) addressing mode, the statement "CLR 00H" clears the destination register 00H
value to 00H. In the second example, the statement "CLR @01H" uses Indirect Register (IR)
addressing mode to clear the 02H register value to 00H.
PS031305-1017
6-27
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.16 COM (Complement)
COM
dst
Operation:
dst NOT dst
The contents of the destination location are complemented (one's complement); all "1s" are
changed to "0s", and vice-versa.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
60
R
4
61
IR
Given: R1 = 07H and Register 07H = 0F1H:
COM
COM
R1
@R1
→
→
R1 = 0F8H
R1 = 07H, Register 07H = 0EH
In the first example, destination working register R1 contains the value 07H (00000111B). The
statement "COM R1" complements all the bits in R1: all logic ones are changed to logic zeros,
and vice-versa, leaving the value 0F8H (11111000B).
In the second example, Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode is used to complement the value
of destination register 07H (11110001B), leaving the new value 0EH (00001110B).
PS031305-1017
6-28
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.17 CP (Compare)
CP
dst, src
Operation:
dst – src
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand, and the
appropriate flags are set accordingly. The contents of both operands are unaffected by the
comparison.
Flags:
C: Set if a "borrow" occurred (src > dst); cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
dst | src
opc
src
opc
Examples:
dst
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
A2
r
r
6
A3
r
lr
6
A4
R
R
6
A5
R
IR
6
A6
R
IM
3
src
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
1. Given: R1 = 02H and R2 = 03H:
CP
R1, R2 →
Set the C and S flags
Destination working register R1 contains the value 02H and source register R2 contains the value
03H. The statement "CP R1, R2" subtracts the R2 value (source/subtrahend) from the R1 value
(destination/minuend). Because a "borrow" occurs and the difference is negative, C and S are "1".
2. Given: R1 = 05H and R2 = 0AH:
SKIP
CP
JP
INC
LD
R1, R2
UGE, SKIP
R1
R3, R1
In this example, destination working register R1 contains the value 05H which is less than the
contents of the source working register R2 (0AH). The statement "CP R1, R2" generates C = "1"
and the JP instruction does not jump to the SKIP location. After the statement "LD R3, R1"
executes, the value 06H remains in working register R3.
PS031305-1017
6-29
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.18 CPIJE (Compare, Increment, and Jump on Equal)
CPIJE
dst, src, RA
Operation:
If dst – src = "0", PC PC + RA
Ir Ir + 1
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is "0",
the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement whose
address is now in the program counter. Otherwise, the instruction immediately following the
CPIJE instruction is executed. In either case, the source pointer is incremented by one before the
next instruction is executed.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
src
dst
RA
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
12
C2
Addr Mode
dst
src
r
Ir
NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken.
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and register 03H = 02H:
CPIJE R1, @R2, SKIP →
R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
In this example, working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 the value 03H,
and register 03 contains 02H. The statement "CPIJE R1, @R2, SKIP" compares the @R2 value
02H (00000010B) to 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is equal, the
relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by
SKIP. The source register (R2) is incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H. (Remember that
the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
PS031305-1017
6-30
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.19 CPIJNE (Compare, Increment, and Jump on Non-Equal)
CPIJNE
dst, src, RA
Operation:
If dst – src "0", PC PC + RA
Ir Ir + 1
The source operand is compared to (subtracted from) the destination operand. If the result is not
"0", the relative address is added to the program counter and control passes to the statement
whose address is now in the program counter; otherwise the instruction following the CPIJNE
instruction is executed. In either case the source pointer is incremented by one before the next
instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
src
dst
RA
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
12
D2
Addr Mode
dst
src
r
Ir
NOTE: Execution time is 18 cycles if the jump is taken or 16 cycles if it is not taken.
Example:
Given: R1 = 02H, R2 = 03H, and Register 03H = 04H:
CPIJNE R1, @R2, SKIP →
R2 = 04H, PC jumps to SKIP location
Working register R1 contains the value 02H, working register R2 (the source pointer) the value
03H, and general register 03 the value 04H. The statement "CPIJNE R1, @R2, SKIP" subtracts
04H (00000100B) from 02H (00000010B). Because the result of the comparison is non-equal, the
relative address is added to the PC and the PC then jumps to the memory location pointed to by
SKIP. The source pointer register (R2) is also incremented by one, leaving a value of 04H.
(Remember that the memory location must be within the allowed range of + 127 to – 128.)
PS031305-1017
6-31
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.20 DA (Decimal Adjust)
DA
dst
Operation:
dst DA dst
The destination operand is adjusted to form two 4-bit BCD digits following an addition or
subtraction operation. For addition (ADD, ADC) or subtraction (SUB, SBC), the following table
indicates the operation performed. (The operation is undefined if the destination operand was not
the result of a valid addition or subtraction of BCD digits):
Instruction
Carry
Before DA
Bits 4–7
Value (Hex)
H Flag
Before DA
Bits 0–3
Value (Hex)
Number Added
to Byte
Carry
After DA
–
0
0–9
0
0–9
00
0
–
0
0–8
0
A–F
06
0
–
0
0–9
1
0–3
06
0
ADD
0
A–F
0
0–9
60
1
ADC
0
9–F
0
A–F
66
1
–
0
A–F
1
0–3
66
1
–
1
0–2
0
0–9
60
1
–
1
0–2
0
A–F
66
1
–
1
0–3
1
0–3
66
1
–
0
0–9
0
0–9
00 = – 00
0
SUB
0
0–8
1
6–F
FA = – 06
0
SBC
1
7–F
0
0–9
A0 = – 60
1
–
1
6–F
1
6–F
9A = – 66
1
Flags:
C: Set if there was a carry from the most significant bit; cleared otherwise (see table).
Z: Set if result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
PS031305-1017
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
40
R
4
41
IR
6-32
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example:
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
Given: Working register R0 contains the value 15 (BCD), working register R1 contains 27 (BCD),
and address 27H contains 46 (BCD):
ADD
DA
R1, R0 ;
R1
;
C "0", H "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, Bits 0–3 = C, R1 3CH
R1 3CH + 06
If addition is performed using the BCD values 15 and 27, the result should be 42. The sum is
incorrect, however, when the binary representations are added in the destination location using
standard binary arithmetic:
0001
+ 0010
0011
0101
0111
1100
=
15
27
3CH
The DA instruction adjusts this result so that the correct BCD representation is obtained:
0011
+ 0000
0100
1100
0110
0010
=
42
Assuming the same values given above, the statements
SUB
27H,R0 ;
C "0", H "0", Bits 4–7 = 3, Bits 0–3 = 1
DA
@R1 ;
@R1 31–0
Leave the value 31 (BCD) in address 27H (@R1).
PS031305-1017
6-33
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.21 DEC (Decrement)
DEC
dst
Operation:
dst dst – 1
The contents of the destination operand are decremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
00
R
4
01
IR
Given: R1 = 03H and Register 03H = 10H:
DEC
DEC
R1
@R1
→
→
R1 = 02H
Register 03H = 0FH
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 03H, the statement "DEC R1"
decrements the hexadecimal value by one, leaving the value 02H. In the second example, the
statement "DEC @R1" decrements the value 10H contained in the destination register 03H by
one, leaving the value 0FH.
PS031305-1017
6-34
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.22 DECW (Decrement Word)
DECW
dst
Operation:
dst dst – 1
The contents of the destination location (which must be an even address) and the operand
following that location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is decremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8
80
RR
8
81
IR
Given: R0 = 12H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 30H, register 30H = 0FH, and Register 31H = 21H:
DECW RR0
DECW @R2
→
→
R0 = 12H, R1 = 33H
Register 30H = 0FH, Register 31H = 20H
In the first example, destination register R0 contains the value 12H and register R1 the value 34H.
The statement "DECW RR0" addresses R0 and the following operand R1 as a 16-bit word and
decrements the value of R1 by one, leaving the value 33H.
A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero flag (FLAGS.6) result together with a DECW
instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use DECW as shown in the following
example:
LOOP: DECW
LD
OR
JR
PS031305-1017
RR0
R2, R1
R2, R0
NZ, LOOP
6-35
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.23 DI (Disable Interrupts)
DI
Operation:
SYM (0) 0
Bit zero of the system mode control register, SYM.0, is cleared to "0", globally disabling all
interrupt processing. Interrupt requests will continue to set their respective interrupt pending bits,
but the CPU will not service them while interrupt processing is disabled.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4
8F
Given: SYM = 01H:
DI
If the value of the SYM register is 01H, the statement "DI" leaves the new value 00H in the
register and clears SYM.0 to "0", disabling interrupt processing.
Before changing IMR, interrupt pending and interrupt source control register, be sure DI state.
PS031305-1017
6-36
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.24 DIV (Divide-Unsigned)
DIV
dst, src
Operation:
dst ÷ src
dst (upper) REMAINDER
dst (lower) QUOTIENT
The destination operand (16 bits) is divided by the source operand (8 bits). The quotient (8 bits) is
stored in the lower half of the destination. The remainder (8 bits) is stored in the upper half of the
destination. When the quotient is 28, the numbers stored in the upper and lower halves of the
destination for quotient and remainder are incorrect. Both operands are treated as unsigned
integers.
Flags:
C: Set if the V flag is set and quotient is between 28 and 29–1; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if divisor or quotient = "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if MSB of quotient = "1"; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if quotient is 28 or if divisor = "0"; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
src
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
3
26/10
94
RR
R
26/10
95
RR
IR
26/10
96
RR
IM
NOTE: Execution takes 10 cycles if the divide-by-zero is attempted; otherwise it takes 26 cycles.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 10H, R1 = 03H, R2 = 40H, Register 40H = 80H:
DIV
DIV
DIV
RR0, R2
RR0, @R2
RR0, #20H
→
→
→
R0 = 03H, R1 = 40H
R0 = 03H, R1 = 20H
R0 = 03H, R1 = 80H
In the first example, destination working register pair RR0 contains the values 10H (R0) and 03H
(R1), and register R2 contains the value 40H. The statement "DIV RR0, R2" divides the 16-bit
RR0 value by the 8-bit value of the R2 (source) register. After the DIV instruction, R0 contains the
value 03H and R1 contains 40H. The 8-bit remainder is stored in the upper half of the destination
register RR0 (R0) and the quotient in the lower half (R1).
PS031305-1017
6-37
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.25 DJNZ (Decrement and Jump if Non-Zero)
DJNZ
r, dst
Operation:
rr–1
If r 0, PC PC + dst
The working register being used as a counter is decremented. If the contents of the register are
not logic zero after decrementing, the relative address is added to the program counter and
control passes to the statement whose address is now in the PC. The range of the relative
address is +127 to –128, and the original value of the PC is taken to be the address of the
instruction byte following the DJNZ statement.
NOTE: In case of using DJNZ instruction, the working register being used as a counter should be set at the
one of location 0C0H to 0CFH with SRP, SRP0, or SRP1 instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
r | opc
Example:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8 (jump taken)
rA
RA
8 (no jump)
r = 0 to F
Given: R1 = 02H and LOOP is the label of a relative address:
SRP
DJNZ
#0C0H
R1, LOOP
DJNZ is typically used to control a "loop" of instructions. In many cases, a label is used as the
destination operand instead of a numeric relative address value. In the example, working register
R1 contains the value 02H, and LOOP is the label for a relative address.
The statement "DJNZ R1, LOOP" decrements register R1 by one, leaving the value 01H.
Because the contents of R1 after the decrement are non-zero, the jump is taken to the relative
address specified by the LOOP label.
PS031305-1017
6-38
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.26 EI (Enable Interrupts)
EI
Operation:
SYM (0) 1
An EI instruction sets bit zero of the system mode register, SYM.0 to "1". This allows interrupts to
be serviced as they occur (assuming they have highest priority). If an interrupt's pending bit was
set while interrupt processing was disabled (by executing a DI instruction), it will be serviced when
you execute the EI instruction.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4
9F
Given: SYM = 00H:
EI
If the SYM register contains the value 00H, that is, if interrupts are currently disabled, the
statement "EI" sets the SYM register to 01H, enabling all interrupts. (SYM.0 is the enable bit for
global interrupt processing.)
PS031305-1017
6-39
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.27 ENTER (Enter)
ENTER
Operation:
SP
SP – 2
@SP
IP
IP
PC
PC
@IP
IP
IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The contents of the
instruction pointer are pushed to the stack. The program counter (PC) value is then written to the
instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is
loaded into the PC, and the instruction pointer is incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
14
1F
opc
Example:
The diagram below shows one example of how to use an ENTER statement.
Before
Address
After
Data
IP
0050
PC
0040
SP
0022
Address
Address
22
Data
Stack
PS031305-1017
40
41
42
43
Data
IP
0043
PC
0110
SP
0020
20
21
22
IPH
IPL
Data
Data
Enter
Address H
Address L
Address H
Memory
1F
01
10
Address
40
41
42
43
00
50
110
Data
Enter
Address H
Address L
Address H
1F
01
10
Routine
Memory
Stack
6-40
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.28 EXIT (Exit)
EXIT
Operation:
IP
@SP
SP
SP + 2
PC
@IP
IP
IP + 2
This instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The stack value is
popped and loaded into the instruction pointer. The program memory word that is pointed to by
the instruction pointer is then loaded into the program counter, and the instruction pointer is
incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
14 (internal stack)
2F
opc
16 (internal stack)
Example:
The diagram below shows one example of how to use an EXIT statement.
Before
Address
After
Data
IP
0050
PC
0040
Address
Address
50
51
SP
0022
20
21
22
IPH
IPL
Data
140
Stack
PS031305-1017
00
50
Data
IP
0052
PC
0060
Data
PCL old
PCH
Exit
Memory
Address
60
00
60
SP
0022
22
Data
Data
Main
2F
Memory
Stack
6-41
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.29 IDLE (Idle Operation)
IDLE
Operation:
The IDLE instruction stops the CPU clock while allowing system clock oscillation to continue. Idle
mode can be released by an interrupt request (IRQ) or an external reset operation.
In application programs, a IDLE instruction must be immediately followed by at least three NOP
instructions. This ensures an adeguate time interval for the clock to stabilize before the next
instruction is executed. If three or more NOP instructons are not used after IDLE instruction,
leakage current could be flown because of the floating state in the internal bus.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
6F
Addr Mode
dst
src
–
–
The instruction
IDLE
; stops the CPU clock but not the system clock
NOP
NOP
NOP
PS031305-1017
6-42
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.30 INC (Increment)
INC
dst
Operation:
dst dst + 1
The contents of the destination operand are incremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
dst | opc
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
1
4
rE
r
r = 0 to F
opc
Examples:
dst
2
4
20
R
4
21
IR
Given: R0 = 1BH, Register 00H = 0CH, and Register 1BH = 0FH:
INC
INC
INC
R0
00H
@R0
→
→
→
R0 = 1CH
Register 00H = 0DH
R0 = 1BH, Register 01H = 10H
In the first example, if destination working register R0 contains the value 1BH, the statement "INC
R0" leaves the value 1CH in that same register.
The next example shows the effect an INC instruction has on register 00H, assuming that it
contains the value 0CH.
In the third example, INC is used in Indirect Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the value
of register 1BH from 0FH to 10H.
PS031305-1017
6-43
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.31 INCW (Increment Word)
INCW
dst
Operation:
dst dst + 1
The contents of the destination (which must be an even address) and the byte following that
location are treated as a single 16-bit value that is incremented by one.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8
A0
RR
8
A1
IR
Given: R0 = 1AH, R1 = 02H, Register 02H = 0FH, and Register 03H = 0FFH:
INCW RR0
INCW @R1
→
→
R0 = 1AH, R1 = 03H
Register 02H = 10H, Register 03H = 00H
In the first example, the working register pair RR0 contains the value 1AH in register R0 and 02H
in register R1. The statement "INCW RR0" increments the 16-bit destination by one, leaving the
value 03H in register R1. In the second example, the statement "INCW @R1" uses Indirect
Register (IR) addressing mode to increment the contents of general register 03H from 0FFH to
00H and register 02H from 0FH to 10H.
NOTE:
PS031305-1017
A system malfunction may occur if you use a Zero (Z) flag (FLAGS.6) result together with an INCW
instruction. To avoid this problem, we recommend that you use INCW as shown in the following example:
LOOP: INCW RR0
LD
R2, R1
OR
R2, R0
JR
NZ, LOOP
6-44
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.32 IRET (Interrupt Return)
IRET
IRET (Normal)
IRET (Fast)
Operation:
FLAGS @SP
PC IP
SP SP + 1
FLAGS FLAGS
PC @SP
FIS 0
SP SP + 2
SYM(0) 1
This instruction is used at the end of an interrupt service routine. It restores the flag register and
the program counter. It also reenables global interrupts. A "normal IRET" is executed only if the
fast interrupt status bit (FIS, bit one of the FLAGS register, 0D5H) is cleared (= "0"). If a fast
interrupt occurred, IRET clears the FIS bit that was set at the beginning of the service routine.
Flags:
All flags are restored to their original settings (that is, the settings before the interrupt occurred).
Format:
IRET (Normal)
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
opc
1
10 (internal stack)
BF
12 (internal stack)
Example:
IRET (Fast)
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
opc
1
6
BF
In the figure below, the instruction pointer is initially loaded with 100H in the main program before
interrupts are enabled. When an interrupt occurs, the program counter and instruction pointer are
swapped. This causes the PC to jump to address 100H and the IP to keep the return address.
The last instruction in the service routine normally is a jump to IRET at address FFH. This causes
the instruction pointer to be loaded with 100H "again" and the program counter to jump back to
the main program. Now, the next interrupt can occur and the IP is still correct at 100H.
0H
FFH
100H
IRET
Interrupt
Service
Routine
JP to FFH
FFFFH
NOTE:
PS031305-1017
In the fast interrupt example above, if the last instruction is not a jump to IRET, you must pay attention to the
order of the last two instructions. The IRET cannot be immediately proceeded by a clearing of the interrupt
status (as with a reset of the IPR register).
6-45
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.33 JP (Jump)
JP
cc, dst (Conditional)
JP
dst
Operation:
If cc is true, PC dst
The conditional JUMP instruction transfers program control to the destination address if the
condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true; otherwise, the instruction following the JP
instruction is executed. The unconditional JP simply replaces the contents of the PC with the
contents of the specified register pair. Control then passes to the statement addressed by the PC.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
(Unconditional)
Format: (1)
(2)
cc | opc
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
3
8
ccD
DA
cc = 0 to F
opc
dst
2
8
30
IRR
NOTE:
1.
The 3byte format is used for a conditional jump and the 2byte format for an unconditional jump.
2.
In the first byte of the three-byte instruction format (conditional jump), the condition code and the opcode are both four bits.
Examples:
Given: The carry flag (C) = "1", Register 00 = 01H, and Register 01 = 20H:
JP
JP
C, LABEL_W
@00H
→
→
LABEL_W = 1000H, PC = 1000H
PC = 0120H
The first example shows a conditional JP. Assuming that the carry flag is set to "1", the statement
"JP C, LABEL_W" replaces the contents of the PC with the value 1000H and transfers control to
that location. Had the carry flag not been set, control would then have passed to the statement
immediately following the JP instruction.
The second example shows an unconditional JP. The statement "JP @00" replaces the contents
of the PC with the contents of the register pair 00H and 01H, leaving the value 0120H.
PS031305-1017
6-46
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.34 JR (Jump Relative)
JR
cc, dst
Operation:
If cc is true, PC PC + dst
If the condition specified by the condition code (cc) is true, the relative address is added to the
program counter and control passes to the statement whose address is now in the program
counter; otherwise, the instruction following the JR instruction is executed. (See list of condition
codes).
The range of the relative address is + 127, – 128, and the original value of the program counter is
taken to be the address of the first instruction byte following the JR statement.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
(NOTE)
cc | opc
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
6
ccB
RA
dst
cc = 0 to F
NOTE: In the first byte of the two-byte instruction format, the condition code and the opcode are each four bits.
Example:
Given: The carry flag = "1" and LABEL_X = 1FF7H:
JR
C, LABEL_X
→
PC = 1FF7H
If the carry flag is set (that is, if the condition code is true), the statement "JR C, LABEL_X" will
pass control to the statement whose address is now in the PC. Otherwise, the program instruction
following the JR would be executed.
PS031305-1017
6-47
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.35 LD (Load)
LD
dst, src
Operation:
dst src
The contents of the source are loaded into the destination. The source's contents are unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
dst | opc
src | opc
src
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
rC
r
IM
4
r8
r
R
4
r9
R
r
2
Addr Mode
dst
src
r = 0 to F
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
PS031305-1017
dst | src
src
2
dst
dst
src
3
3
4
C7
r
lr
4
D7
Ir
r
6
E4
R
R
6
E5
R
IR
6
E6
R
IM
6
D6
IR
IM
opc
src
dst
3
6
F5
IR
R
opc
dst | src
x
3
6
87
r
x [r]
opc
src | dst
x
3
6
97
x [r]
r
Given: R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, Register 00H = 01H, Register 01H = 20H,
Register 02H = 02H, LOOP = 30H, and Register 3AH = 0FFH:
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
R0, #10H
R0, 01H
01H, R0
R1, @R0
@R0, R1
00H, 01H
02H, @00H
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
00H, #0AH
→
@00H, #10H →
@00H, 02H
→
R0, #LOOP[R1] →
#LOOP[R0], R1 →
R0 = 10H
R0 = 20H, Register 01H = 20H
Register 01H = 01H, R0 = 01H
R1 = 20H, R0 = 01H
R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH, Register 01H = 0AH
Register 00H = 20H, Register 01H = 20H
Register 02H = 20H, Register 00H = 01H
Register 00H = 0AH
Register 00H = 01H, Register 01H = 10H
Register 00H = 01H, Register 01H = 02, Register 02H = 02H
R0 = 0FFH, R1 = 0AH
Register 31H = 0AH, R0 = 01H, R1 = 0AH
6-48
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.36 LDB (Load Bit)
LDB
dst, src.b
LDB
dst.b, src
Operation:
dst (0) src (b)
or
dst (b) src (0)
The specified bit of the source is loaded into bit zero (LSB) of the destination, or bit zero of the
source is loaded into the specified bit of the destination. No other bits of the destination are
affected. The source is unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
opc
dst | b | 0
src
3
6
47
r0
Rb
opc
src | b | 1
dst
3
6
47
Rb
r0
NOTE: In the second byte of the instruction formats, the destination (or source) address is four bits, the bit address "b" is
three bits, and the LSB address value is one bit in length.
Examples:
Given: R0 = 06H and general register 00H = 05H:
LDB
LDB
R0, 00H.2
00H.0, R0
→
→
R0 = 07H, Register 00H = 05H
R0 = 06H, Register 00H = 04H
In the first example, destination working register R0 contains the value 06H and the source
general register 00H the value 05H. The statement "LD R0, 00H.2" loads the bit two value of the
00H register into bit zero of the R0 register, leaving the value 07H in register R0.
In the second example, 00H is the destination register. The statement "LD 00H.0, R0" loads bit
zero of register R0 to the specified bit (bit zero) of the destination register, leaving 04H in general
register 00H.
PS031305-1017
6-49
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.37 LDC/LDE (Load Memory)
LDC/LDE
dst, src
Operation:
dst src
This instruction loads a byte from program or data memory into a working register or vice-versa.
The source values are unaffected. LDC refers to program memory and LDE to data memory. The
assembler makes "Irr" or "rr" values an even number for program memory and odd an odd
number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
1.
opc
dst | src
2
10
C3
r
Irr
2.
opc
src | dst
2
10
D3
Irr
r
3.
opc
dst | src
XS
3
12
E7
r
XS [rr]
4.
opc
src | dst
XS
3
12
F7
XS [rr]
r
5.
opc
dst | src
XLL
XLH
4
14
A7
r
XL [rr]
6.
opc
src | dst
XLL
XLH
4
14
B7
XL [rr]
r
7.
opc
dst | 0000
DAL
DAH
4
14
A7
r
DA
8.
opc
src | 0000
DAL
DAH
4
14
B7
DA
r
9.
opc
dst | 0001
DAL
DAH
4
14
A7
r
DA
10.
opc
src | 0001
DAL
DAH
4
14
B7
DA
r
NOTE:
1.
The source (src) or working register pair [rr] for formats 5 and 6 cannot use register pair 0–1.
2.
For formats 3 and 4, the destination address "XS [rr]" and the source address "XS [rr]" are each one byte.
3.
For formats 5 and 6, the destination address "XL [rr]" and the source address "XL [rr]" are each two bytes.
4.
The DA and r source values for formats 7 and 8 are used to address program memory; the second set of values, used in
formats 9 and 10, are used to address data memory.
PS031305-1017
6-50
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Examples:
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
Given: R0 = 11H, R1 = 34H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H;
Program memory locations 0103H = 4FH, 0104H = 1A, 0105H = 6DH, and 1104H = 88H.
External data memory locations 0103H = 5FH, 0104H = 2AH, 0105H = 7DH, and 1104H = 98H:
LDC
R0, @RR2
LDE
R0, @RR2
LDC (NOTE) @RR2, R0
LDE
@RR2, R0
LDC
R0, #01H[RR2]
LDE
R0, #01H[RR2]
LDC (NOTE) #01H[RR2], R0
LDE
#01H[RR2], R0
LDC
R0, #1000H[RR2]
LDE
R0, #1000H[RR2]
LDC
R0, 1104H
LDE
R0, 1104H
LDC (NOTE) 1105H, R0
LDE
1105H, R0
; R0 contents of program memory location 0104H
; R0 = 1AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
; R0 contents of external data memory location 0104H
; R0 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
; location 0104H (RR2),
; working registers R0, R2, R3 → no change
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
; location 0104H (RR2),
; working registers R0, R2, R3 → no change
; R0 contents of program memory location 0105H
; (01H + RR2),
; R0 = 6DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
; R0 contents of external data memory location 0105H
; (01H + RR2), R0 = 7DH, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
; 0105H (01H + 0104H)
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
; location 0105H (01H + 0104H)
; R0 contents of program memory location 1104H
; (1000H + 0104H), R0 = 88H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
; R0 contents of external data memory location 1104H
; (1000H + 0104H), R0 = 98H, R2 = 01H, R3 = 04H
; R0 contents of program memory location 1104H,
; R0 = 88H
; R0 contents of external data memory location 1104H,
; R0 = 98H
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
; 1105H, (1105H) 11H
; 11H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
; location 1105H, (1105H) 11H
NOTE: These instructions are not supported by masked ROM type devices.
PS031305-1017
6-51
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.38 LDCD/LDED (Load Memory and Decrement)
LDCD/LDED
dst, src
Operation:
dst src
rr rr – 1
These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data
memory to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register
pair. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory
address is then decremented. The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCD references program memory and LDED references external data memory. The assembler
makes "Irr" an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst | src
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
10
E2
Addr Mode
dst
src
r
Irr
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory location 1033H = 0CDH, and
external data memory location 1033H = 0DDH:
LDCD R8, @RR6
LDED R8, @RR6
PS031305-1017
Bytes
; 0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded
; into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one
; R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H (RR6 RR6 – 1)
; 0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded
; into R8 and RR6 is decremented by one (RR6 RR6 – 1)
; R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 32H
6-52
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.39 LDCI/LDEI (Load Memory and Increment)
LDCI/LDEI
dst,src
Operation:
dst src
rr rr + 1
These instructions are used for user stacks or block transfers of data from program or data
memory to the register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register
pair. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The memory
address is then incremented automatically. The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCI refers to program memory and LDEI refers to external data memory. The assembler makes
"Irr" even for program memory and odd for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
PS031305-1017
dst | src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
10
E3
Addr Mode
dst
src
r
Irr
Given: R6 = 10H, R7 = 33H, R8 = 12H, program memory locations 1033H = 0CDH and 1034H =
0C5H; external data memory locations 1033H = 0DDH and 1034H = 0D5H:
LDCI
R8, @RR6
LDEI
R8, @RR6
; 0CDH (contents of program memory location 1033H) is loaded
; into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6 RR6 + 1)
; R8 = 0CDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H
; 0DDH (contents of data memory location 1033H) is loaded
; into R8 and RR6 is incremented by one (RR6 RR6 + 1)
; R8 = 0DDH, R6 = 10H, R7 = 34H
6-53
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.40 LDCPD/LDEPD (Load Memory with Pre-Decrement)
LDCPD/
LDEPD
dst, src
Operation:
rr rr – 1
dst src
These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the
register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first
decremented. The contents of the source location are then loaded into the destination location.
The contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCPD refers to program memory and LDEPD refers to external data memory. The assembler
makes "Irr" an even number for program memory and an odd number for external data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
src | dst
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
14
F2
Addr Mode
dst
src
Irr
r
Given: R0 = 77H, R6 = 30H, and R7 = 00H:
LDCPD @RR6, R0
LDEPD @RR6, R0
PS031305-1017
Bytes
; (RR6 RR6 – 1)
; 77H (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory location
; 2FFFH (3000H to 1H)
; R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH
; (RR6 RR6 – 1)
; 77H (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
; location 2FFFH (3000H to 1H)
; R0 = 77H, R6 = 2FH, R7 = 0FFH
6-54
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.41 LDCPI/LDEPI (Load Memory with Pre-Increment)
LDCPI/LDEPI dst, src
Operation:
rr rr + 1
dst src
These instructions are used for block transfers of data from program or data memory from the
register file. The address of the memory location is specified by a working register pair and is first
incremented. The contents of the source location are loaded into the destination location. The
contents of the source are unaffected.
LDCPI refers to program memory and LDEPI refers to external data memory. The assembler
makes "Irr" an even number for program memory and an odd number for data memory.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
src | dst
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
14
F3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Irr
r
Given: R0 = 7FH, R6 = 21H, and R7 = 0FFH:
LDCPI @RR6, R0
LDEPI @RR6, R0
PS031305-1017
Bytes
; (RR6 RR6 + 1)
; 7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into program memory
; location 2200H (21FFH + 1H) R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
; (RR6 RR6 + 1)
; 7FH (contents of R0) is loaded into external data memory
; location 2200H (21FFH + 1H) R0 = 7FH, R6 = 22H, R7 = 00H
6-55
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.42 LDW (Load Word)
LDW
dst, src
Operation:
dst src
The contents of the source (a word) are loaded into the destination. The contents of the source
are unaffected.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
opc
Examples:
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
C4
RR
RR
8
C5
RR
IR
8
C6
RR
IML
4
Addr Mode
dst
src
Given: R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH, R6 = 05H, R7 = 02H, Register 00H = 1AH, Register 01H = 02H,
Register 02H = 03H, and Register 03H = 0FH:
LDW
LDW
RR6, RR4
00H, 02H
→
→
LDW
LDW
LDW
LDW
RR2, @R7
04H, @01H
RR6, #1234H
02H, #0FEDH
→
→
→
→
R6 = 06H, R7 = 1CH, R4 = 06H, R5 = 1CH
Register 00H = 03H, Register 01H = 0FH, Register 02H = 03H,
Register 03H = 0FH
R2 = 03H, R3 = 0FH
Register 04H = 03H, Register 05H = 0FH
R6 = 12H, R7 = 34H
Register 02H = 0FH, Register 03H = 0EDH
In the second example, please note that the statement "LDW 00H,02H" loads the contents of
the source word 02H, 03H into the destination word 00H, 01H. This leaves the value 03H in
general register 00H and the value 0FH in register 01H.
The other examples show how to use the LDW instruction with various addressing modes and
formats.
PS031305-1017
6-56
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.43 MULT (Multiply-Unsigned)
MULT
dst, src
Operation:
dst dst src
The 8-bit destination operand (even register of the register pair) is multiplied by the source
operand (8 bits) and the product (16 bits) is stored in the register pair specified by the destination
address. Both operands are treated as unsigned integers.
Flags:
C: Set if result is 255; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if MSB of the result is a "1"; cleared otherwise.
V: Cleared.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
src
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
src
3
22
84
RR
R
22
85
RR
IR
22
86
RR
IM
Given: Register 00H = 20H, Register 01H = 03H, register 02H = 09H, Register 03H = 06H:
MULT 00H, 02H
MULT 00H, @01H
MULT 00H, #30H
→
→
→
Register 00H = 01H, Register 01H = 20H, Register 02H = 09H
Register 00H = 00H, Register 01H = 0C0H
Register 00H = 06H, Register 01H = 00H
In the first example, the statement "MULT 00H, 02H" multiplies the 8-bit destination operand (in
the register 00H of the register pair 00H, 01H) by the source register 02H operand (09H). The 16bit product, 0120H, is stored in the register pair 00H, 01H.
PS031305-1017
6-57
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.44 NEXT (Next)
NEXT
Operation:
PC @ IP
IP IP + 2
The NEXT instruction is useful when implementing threaded-code languages. The program
memory word that is pointed to by the instruction pointer is loaded into the program counter.
The instruction pointer is then incremented by two.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
10
0F
opc
Example:
The following diagram shows one example of how to use the NEXT instruction.
Before
Address
IP
After
Data
Address
0043
IP
Address
PC
0120
43
44
45
120
Data
Address H
Address L
Address H
Next
Memory
PS031305-1017
Data
0045
01
10
Address
PC
0130
43
44
45
130
Data
Address H
Address L
Address H
Routine
Memory
6-58
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.45 NOP (No Operation)
NOP
Operation:
No action is performed when the CPU executes this instruction. Typically, one or more NOPs are
executed in sequence in order to effect a timing delay of variable duration.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4
FF
When the instruction
NOP
Is encountered in a program, no operation occurs. Instead, there is a delay in instruction
execution time.
PS031305-1017
6-59
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.46 OR (Logical OR)
OR
dst,src
Operation:
dst dst OR src
The source operand is logically ORed with the destination operand and the result is stored in the
destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. The OR operation results in a "1" being
stored whenever either of the corresponding bits in the two operands is a "1"; otherwise a "0" is
stored.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
42
r
r
6
43
r
lr
6
44
R
R
6
45
R
IR
6
46
R
IM
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Given: R0 = 15H, R1 = 2AH, R2 = 01H, Register 00H = 08H, Register 01H = 37H, and Register
08H = 8AH:
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
R0, R1
R0, @R2
00H, 01H
01H, @00H
00H, #02H
→
→
→
→
→
R0 = 3FH, R1 = 2AH
R0 = 37H, R2 = 01H, Register 01H = 37H
Register 00H = 3FH, Register 01H = 37H
Register 00H = 08H, Register 01H = 0BFH
Register 00H = 0AH
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 15H and register R1 the value 2AH,
the statement "OR R0, R1" logical-ORs the R0 and R1 register contents and stores the result
(3FH) in destination register R0.
The other examples show the use of the logical OR instruction with the various addressing modes
and formats.
PS031305-1017
6-60
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.47 POP (Pop from Stack)
POP
dst
Operation:
dst @SP
SP SP + 1
The contents of the location addressed by the stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The
stack pointer is then incremented by one.
Flags:
No flags affected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8
50
R
8
51
IR
Given: Register 00H = 01H, Register 01H = 1BH, SPH (0D8H) = 00H, SPL (0D9H) = 0FBH, and
Stack Register 0FBH = 55H:
POP
POP
00H
→
@00H →
Register 00H = 55H, SP = 00FCH
Register 00H = 01H, Register 01H = 55H, SP = 00FCH
In the first example, general register 00H contains the value 01H. The statement "POP 00H"
loads the contents of location 00FBH (55H) into destination register 00H and then increments the
stack pointer by one. Register 00H then contains the value 55H and the SP points to location
00FCH.
PS031305-1017
6-61
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.48 POPUD (Pop User Stack-Decrementing)
POPUD
dst, src
Operation:
dst src
IR IR – 1
This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the register file
location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user stack
pointer is then decremented.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
src
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
92
Addr Mode
dst
src
R
IR
Given: Register 00H = 42H (user stack pointer register), Register 42H = 6FH, and
Register 02H = 70H:
POPUD 02H, @00H
→
Register 00H = 41H, Register 02H = 6FH, Register 42H = 6FH
If general register 00H contains the value 42H and register 42H the value 6FH, the statement
"POPUD 02H, @00H" loads the contents of register 42H into the destination register 02H. The
user stack pointer is then decremented by one, leaving the value 41H.
PS031305-1017
6-62
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.49 POPUI (Pop User Stack-Incrementing)
POPUI
dst, src
Operation:
dst src
IR IR + 1
The POPUI instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. The contents of the
register file location addressed by the user stack pointer are loaded into the destination. The user
stack pointer is then incremented.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
src
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
93
Addr Mode
dst
src
R
IR
Given: Register 00H = 01H and Register 01H = 70H:
POPUI 02H, @00H
→
Register 00H = 02H, Register 01H = 70H, Register 02H = 70H
If general register 00H contains the value 01H and register 01H the value 70H, the statement
"POPUI 02H, @00H" loads the value 70H into the destination general register 02H. The user
stack pointer (register 00H) is then incremented by one, changing its value from 01H to 02H.
PS031305-1017
6-63
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.50 PUSH (Push to Stack)
PUSH
src
Operation:
SP SP – 1
@SP src
A PUSH instruction decrements the stack pointer value and loads the contents of the source (src)
into the location addressed by the decremented stack pointer. The operation then adds the new
value to the top of the stack.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
8 (internal clock)
70
R
71
IR
8 (external clock)
8 (internal clock)
8 (external clock)
Examples:
Given: Register 40H = 4FH, register 4FH = 0AAH, SPH = 00H, and SPL = 00H:
PUSH 40H
→
PUSH @40H →
Register 40H = 4FH, Stack Register 0FFH = 4FH,
SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
Register 40H = 4FH, Register 4FH = 0AAH,
Stack Register 0FFH = 0AAH, SPH = 0FFH, SPL = 0FFH
In the first example, if the stack pointer contains the value 0000H, and general register 40H the
value 4FH, the statement "PUSH 40H" decrements the stack pointer from 0000 to 0FFFFH. It
then loads the contents of register 40H into location 0FFFFH and adds this new value to the top
of the stack.
PS031305-1017
6-64
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.51 PUSHUD (Push User Stack-Decrementing)
PUSHUD
dst, src
Operation:
IR IR – 1
dst src
This instruction is used to address user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUD decrements
the user stack pointer and loads the contents of the source into the register addressed by the
decremented stack pointer.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
82
Addr Mode
dst
src
IR
R
Given: Register 00H = 03H, Register 01H = 05H, and Register 02H = 1AH:
PUSHUD @00H, 01H
→
Register 00H = 02H, Register 01H = 05H, Register 02H = 05H
If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement
"PUSHUD @00H, 01H" decrements the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 02H. The
01H register value, 05H, is then loaded into the register addressed by the decremented user
stack pointer.
PS031305-1017
6-65
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.52 PUSHUI (Push User Stack-Incrementing)
PUSHUI
dst, src
Operation:
IR IR + 1
dst src
This instruction is used for user-defined stacks in the register file. PUSHUI increments the user
stack pointer and then loads the contents of the source into the register location addressed by the
incremented user stack pointer.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
3
8
83
Addr Mode
dst
src
IR
R
Given: Register 00H = 03H, Register 01H = 05H, and Register 04H = 2AH:
PUSHUI @00H, 01H
→
Register 00H = 04H, Register 01H = 05H, Register 04H = 05H
If the user stack pointer (register 00H, for example) contains the value 03H, the statement
"PUSHUI @00H, 01H" increments the user stack pointer by one, leaving the value 04H. The 01H
register value, 05H, is then loaded into the location addressed by the incremented user stack
pointer.
PS031305-1017
6-66
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.53 RCF (Reset Carry Flag)
RCF
RCF
Operation:
C0
The carry flag is cleared to logic zero, regardless of its previous value.
Flags:
C: Cleared to "0".
No other flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4
CF
Given: C = "1" or "0":
The instruction RCF clears the carry flag (C) to logic zero.
PS031305-1017
6-67
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.54 RET (Return)
RET
Operation:
PC @SP
SP SP + 2
The RET instruction is normally used to return to the previously executing procedure at the end of
a procedure entered by a CALL instruction. The contents of the location addressed by the stack
pointer are popped into the program counter. The next statement that is executed is the one that
is addressed by the new program counter value.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
8 (internal stack)
AF
10 (internal stack)
Example:
Given: SP = 00FCH, (SP) = 101AH, and PC = 1234:
RET
→
PC = 101AH, SP = 00FEH
The statement "RET" pops the contents of stack pointer location 00FCH (10H) into the high byte
of the program counter. The stack pointer then pops the value in location 00FEH (1AH) into the
PC's low byte and the instruction at location 101AH is executed. The stack pointer now points to
memory location 00FEH.
PS031305-1017
6-68
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.55 RL (Rotate Left)
RL
dst
Operation:
C dst (7)
dst (0) dst (7)
dst (n + 1) dst (n), n = 0–6
The contents of the destination operand are rotated left one bit position. The initial value of bit 7 is
moved to the bit zero (LSB) position and also replaces the carry flag.
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (bit 7) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
90
R
4
91
IR
Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, register 01H = 02H and register 02H = 17H:
RL
RL
00H
→
@01H →
Register 00H = 55H, C = "1"
Register 01H = 02H, Register 02H = 2EH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement
"RL 00H" rotates the 0AAH value left one bit position, leaving the new value 55H (01010101B)
and setting the carry and overflow flags.
PS031305-1017
6-69
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.56 RLC (Rotate Left Through Carry)
RLC
dst
Operation:
dst (0) C
C dst (7)
dst (n + 1) dst (n), n = 0 to 6
The contents of the destination operand with the carry flag are rotated left one bit position. The
initial value of bit 7 replaces the carry flag (C); the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit zero.
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the most significant bit position (7-bit) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result 7-bit is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during
rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
10
R
4
11
IR
Given: Register 00H = 0AAH, Register 01H = 02H, and Register 02H = 17H, C = "0":
RLC
RLC
00H
→
@01H →
Register 00H = 54H, C = "1"
Register 01H = 02H, Register 02H = 2EH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H has the value 0AAH (10101010B), the statement "RLC
00H" rotates 0AAH one bit position to the left. The initial value of 7-bit sets the carry flag and the
initial value of the C flag replaces bit zero of register 00H, leaving the value 55H (01010101B).
The MSB of register 00H resets the carry flag to "1" and sets the overflow flag.
PS031305-1017
6-70
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.57 RR (Rotate Right)
RR
dst
Operation:
C dst (0)
dst (7) dst (0)
dst (n) dst (n + 1), n = 0 to 6
The contents of the destination operand are rotated right one bit position. The initial value of bit
zero (LSB) is moved to bit 7 (MSB) and also replaces the carry flag (C).
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during
rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
E0
R
4
E1
IR
Given: Register 00H = 31H, Register 01H = 02H, and Register 02H = 17H:
RR
RR
00H
→
@ 01H →
Register 00H = 98H, C = "1"
Register 01H = 02H, Register 02H = 8BH, C = "1"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 31H (00110001B), the statement
"RR 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero is moved to bit
7, leaving the new value 98H (10011000B) in the destination register. The initial bit zero also
resets the C flag to "1" and the sign flag and overflow flag are also set to "1".
PS031305-1017
6-71
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.58 RRC (Rotate Right Through Carry)
RRC
dst
Operation:
dst (7) C
C dst (0)
dst (n) dst (n + 1), n = 0 to 6
The contents of the destination operand and the carry flag are rotated right one bit position. The
initial value of bit zero (LSB) replaces the carry flag; the initial value of the carry flag replaces bit 7
(MSB).
7
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit rotated from the least significant bit position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0" cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the sign of the destination changed during
rotation; cleared otherwise.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
C0
R
4
C1
IR
Given: Register 00H = 55H, Register 01H = 02H, Register 02H = 17H, and C = "0":
RRC
RRC
00H
@01H
→
→
Register 00H = 2AH, C = "1"
Register 01H = 02H, Register 02H = 0BH, C = "1"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 55H (01010101B), the statement
"RRC 00H" rotates this value one bit position to the right. The initial value of bit zero ("1") replaces
the carry flag and the initial value of the C flag ("1") replaces bit 7. This leaves the new value 2AH
(00101010B) in destination register 00H. The sign flag and overflow flag are both cleared to "0".
PS031305-1017
6-72
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.59 SB0 (Select Bank 0)
SB0
Operation:
BANK 0
The SB0 instruction clears the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic zero,
selecting bank 0 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4
4F
The statement
SB0
Clears FLAGS.0 to "0", selecting bank 0 register addressing.
PS031305-1017
6-73
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.60 SB1 (Select Bank 1)
SB1
Operation:
BANK 1
The SB1 instruction sets the bank address flag in the FLAGS register (FLAGS.0) to logic one,
selecting bank 1 register addressing in the set 1 area of the register file. (Bank 1 is not
implemented in some S3C8 Series microcontrollers.)
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4
5F
The statement
SB1
Sets FLAGS.0 to "1", selecting bank 1 register addressing, if implemented.
PS031305-1017
6-74
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.61 SBC (Subtract with Carry)
SBC
dst, src
Operation:
dst dst – src – c
The source operand, along with the current value of the carry flag, is subtracted from the
destination operand and the result is stored in the destination. The contents of the source are
unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the two's-complement of the source operand to
the destination operand. In multiple precision arithmetic, this instruction permits the carry
("borrow") from the subtraction of the low-order operands to be subtracted from the subtraction of
high-order operands.
Flags:
C: Set if a borrow occurred (src dst); cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite sign and the sign
of the result is the same as the sign of the source; cleared otherwise.
D: Always set to "1".
H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result;
set otherwise, indicating a "borrow".
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
32
r
r
6
33
r
lr
6
34
R
R
6
35
R
IR
6
36
R
IM
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Given: R1 = 10H, R2 = 03H, C = "1", Register 01H = 20H, Register 02H = 03H, and Register
03H = 0AH:
SBC
SBC
SBC
SBC
SBC
R1, R2
R1, @R2
01H, 02H
01H, @02H
01H, #8AH
→
→
→
→
→
R1 = 0CH, R2 = 03H
R1 = 05H, R2 = 03H, Register 03H = 0AH
Register 01H = 1CH, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 15H,Register 02H = 03H, Register 03H = 0AH
Register 01H = 95H; C, S, and V = "1"
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 10H and register R2 the value 03H,
the statement "SBC R1, R2" subtracts the source value (03H) and the C flag value ("1") from the
destination (10H) and then stores the result (0CH) in register R1.
PS031305-1017
6-75
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.62 SCF (Set Carry Flag)
SCF
Operation:
C1
The carry flag (C) is set to logic one, regardless of its previous value.
Flags:
C: Set to "1".
No other flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4
DF
The statement
SCF
Sets the carry flag to logic one.
PS031305-1017
6-76
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.63 SRA (Shift Right Arithmetic)
SRA
dst
Operation:
dst (7) dst (7)
C dst (0)
dst (n) dst (n + 1), n = 0 to 6
An arithmetic shift-right of one bit position is performed on the destination operand. Bit zero (the
LSB) replaces the carry flag. The value of bit 7 (the sign bit) is unchanged and is shifted into bit
position 6.
7
6
0
C
Flags:
C: Set if the bit shifted from the LSB position (bit zero) was "1".
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
D0
R
4
D1
IR
Given: Register 00H = 9AH, register 02H = 03H, register 03H = 0BCH, and C = "1":
SRA
SRA
00H
@02H
→
→
Register 00H = 0CD, C = "0"
Register 02H = 03H, Register 03H = 0DEH, C = "0"
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 9AH (10011010B), the statement
"SRA 00H" shifts the bit values in register 00H right one bit position. Bit zero ("0") clears the C flag
and bit 7 ("1") is then shifted into the bit 6 position (bit 7 remains unchanged). This leaves the
value 0CDH (11001101B) in destination register 00H.
PS031305-1017
6-77
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.64 SRP/SRP0/SRP1 (Set Register Pointer)
SRP
src
SRP0
src
SRP1
src
Operation:
If src (1) = 1 and src (0) = 0 then:
If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 1 then:
If src (1) = 0 and src (0) = 0 then:
Flags:
No flags are affected.
RP0 (3–7)
src (3–7)
RP1 (3–7)
src (3–7)
RP0 (4–7)
src (4–7),
RP0 (3)
0
RP1 (4–7)
src (4–7),
RP1 (3)
1
The source data bits one and zero (LSB) determine whether to write one or both of the register
pointers, RP0 and RP1. Bits 3 to 7 of the selected register pointer are written unless both register
pointers are selected. RP0.3 is then cleared to logic zero and RP1.3 is set to logic one.
Format:
opc
Examples:
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
src
2
4
31
IM
The statement
SRP #40H
Sets register pointer 0 (RP0) at location 0D6H to 40H and register pointer 1 (RP1) at location
0D7H to 48H.
The statement "SRP0 #50H" sets RP0 to 50H, and the statement "SRP1 #68H" sets RP1 to 68H.
PS031305-1017
6-78
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.65 STOP (Stop Operation)
STOP
Operation:
The STOP instruction stops the both the CPU clock and system clock and causes the
microcontroller to enter Stop mode. During Stop mode, the contents of on-chip CPU registers,
peripheral registers, and I/O port control and data registers are retained. Stop mode can be
released by an external reset operation or by external interrupts. For the reset operation, the
nRESET pin must be held to Low level until the required oscillation stabilization interval has
elapsed. In application programs, a STOP instruction must be immediately followed by at least
three NOP instructions. This ensures an adeguate time interval for the clock to stabilize before the
next instruction is executed. If three or more NOP instructons are not used after STOP instruction,
leakage current could be flown because of the floating state in the internal bus.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
opc
Example:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
1
4
7F
Addr Mode
dst
src
–
–
The statement
STOP
; Halts all microcontroller operations
NOP
NOP
NOP
PS031305-1017
6-79
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.66 SUB (Subtract)
SUB
dst, src
Operation:
dst dst – src
The source operand is subtracted from the destination operand and the result is stored in the
destination. The contents of the source are unaffected. Subtraction is performed by adding the
two's complement of the source operand to the destination operand.
Flags:
C: Set if a "borrow" occurred; cleared otherwise.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result is negative; cleared otherwise.
V: Set if arithmetic overflow occurred, that is, if the operands were of opposite signs and the sign
of the result is of the same as the sign of the source operand; cleared otherwise.
D: Always set to "1".
H: Cleared if there is a carry from the most significant bit of the low-order four bits of the result;
set otherwise indicating a "borrow".
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
22
r
r
6
23
r
lr
6
24
R
R
6
25
R
IR
6
26
R
IM
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Given: R1 = 12H, R2 = 03H, Register 01H = 21H, Register 02H = 03H, Register 03H = 0AH:
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
SUB
R1, R2
R1, @R2
01H, 02H
01H, @02H
01H, #90H
01H, #65H
→
→
→
→
→
→
R1 = 0FH, R2 = 03H
R1 = 08H, R2 = 03H
Register 01H = 1EH, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 17H, Register 02H = 03H
Register 01H = 91H; C, S, and V = "1"
Register 01H = 0BCH; C and S = "1", V = "0"
In the first example, if working register R1 contains the value 12H and if register R2 contains the
value 03H, the statement "SUB R1, R2" subtracts the source value (03H) from the destination
value (12H) and stores the result (0FH) in destination register R1.
PS031305-1017
6-80
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.67 SWAP (Swap Nibbles)
SWAP
dst
Operation:
dst (0–3) dst (4–7)
The contents of the lower four bits and upper four bits of the destination operand are swapped.
7
Flags:
4 3
0
C: Undefined.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Undefined.
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
Examples:
dst
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
Addr Mode
dst
2
4
F0
R
4
F1
IR
Given: Register 00H = 3EH, Register 02H = 03H, and Register 03H = 0A4H:
SWAP 00H
SWAP @02H
→
→
Register 00H = 0E3H
Register 02H = 03H, Register 03H = 4AH
In the first example, if general register 00H contains the value 3EH (00111110B), the statement
"SWAP 00H" swaps the lower and upper four bits (nibbles) in the 00H register, leaving the value
0E3H (11100011B).
PS031305-1017
6-81
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.68 TCM (Test Complement under Mask)
TCM
dst, src
Operation:
(NOT dst) AND src
This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic one value. The bits to be
tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand
(mask). The TCM statement complements the destination operand, which is then ANDed with the
source mask. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to determine the result. The destination and
source operands are unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always cleared to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
62
r
r
6
63
r
lr
6
64
R
R
6
65
R
IR
6
66
R
IM
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 12H, Register 00H = 2BH, Register 01H = 02H, and Register
02H = 23H:
TCM
TCM
TCM
TCM
R0, R1
R0, @R1
00H, 01H
00H, @01H
→
→
→
→
TCM
00H, #34
→
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "1"
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, Register 01H = 02H, Z = "1"
Register 00H = 2BH, Register 01H = 02H,
Register 02H = 23H, Z = "1"
Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "0"
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1
the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TCM R0, R1" tests bit one in the destination register
for a "1" value. Because the mask value corresponds to the test bit, the Z flag is set to logic one
and can be tested to determine the result of the TCM operation.
PS031305-1017
6-82
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.69 TM (Test under Mask)
TM
dst, src
Operation:
dst AND src
This instruction tests selected bits in the destination operand for a logic zero value. The bits to be
tested are specified by setting a "1" bit in the corresponding position of the source operand
(mask), which is ANDed with the destination operand. The zero (Z) flag can then be checked to
determine the result. The destination and source operands are unaffected.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
72
r
r
6
73
r
lr
6
74
R
R
6
75
R
IR
6
76
R
IM
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, Register 00H = 2BH, Register 01H = 02H, and Register
02H = 23H:
TM
TM
TM
TM
R0, R1
R0, @R1
00H, 01H
00H, @01H
→
→
→
→
TM
00H, #54H
→
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Z = "0"
R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, Register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, Register 01H = 02H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, Register 01H = 02H,
Register 02H = 23H, Z = "0"
Register 00H = 2BH, Z = "1"
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H (11000111B) and register R1
the value 02H (00000010B), the statement "TM R0, R1" tests bit one in the destination register for
a "0" value. Because the mask value does not match the test bit, the Z flag is cleared to logic zero
and can be tested to determine the result of the TM operation.
PS031305-1017
6-83
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.70 WFI (Wait for Interrupt)
WFI
Operation:
The CPU is effectively halted until an interrupt occurs, except that DMA transfers can still take
place during this wait state. The WFI status can be released by an internal interrupt, including a
fast interrupt.
Flags:
No flags are affected.
Format:
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode (Hex)
1
4n
3F
opc
NOTE: n = 1, 2, 3, …
Example:
The following sample program structure shows the sequence of operations that follow a "WFI"
statement:
Main program
.
.
.
EI
WFI
(Next instruction)
(Enable global interrupt)
(Wait for interrupt)
.
.
.
Interrupt occurs
Interrupt service routine
.
.
.
Clear interrupt flag
IRET
Service routine completed
PS031305-1017
6-84
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 6. Instruction Set
6.5.71 XOR (Logical Exclusive OR)
XOR
dst, src
Operation:
dst dst XOR src
The source operand is logically exclusive-ORed with the destination operand and the result is
stored in the destination. The exclusive-OR operation results in a "1" bit being stored whenever
the corresponding bits in the operands are different; otherwise, a "0" bit is stored.
Flags:
C: Unaffected.
Z: Set if the result is "0"; cleared otherwise.
S: Set if the result bit 7 is set; cleared otherwise.
V: Always reset to "0".
D: Unaffected.
H: Unaffected.
Format:
opc
opc
opc
Examples:
dst | src
src
dst
dst
src
Bytes
Cycles
Opcode
(Hex)
2
4
B2
r
r
6
B3
r
lr
6
B4
R
R
6
B5
R
IR
6
B6
R
IM
3
3
Addr Mode
dst
src
Given: R0 = 0C7H, R1 = 02H, R2 = 18H, Register 00H = 2BH, Register 01H = 02H, and Register
02H = 23H:
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
R0, R1
R0, @R1
00H, 01H
00H, @01H
00H, #54H
→
→
→
→
→
R0 = 0C5H, R1 = 02H
R0 = 0E4H, R1 = 02H, register 02H = 23H
Register 00H = 29H, register 01H = 02H
Register 00H = 08H, register 01H = 02H, Register 02H = 23H
Register 00H = 7FH
In the first example, if working register R0 contains the value 0C7H and if register R1 contains the
value 02H, the statement "XOR R0, R1" logically exclusive-ORs the R1 value with the R0 value
and stores the result (0C5H) in the destination register R0.
PS031305-1017
6-85
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
7
Chapter 7. Clock Circuit
Clock Circuit
7.1 Overview
By Smart Option (3FH.3–.0 in ROM), user can select internal RC oscillator or external oscillator. In using internal
oscillator, XIN (P1.0), XOUT (P1.1) can be used by normal I/O pins. An internal RC oscillator source provides a
typical 8MHz, 4MHz, 3.2MHz, 2MHz, 1MHz or 0.5MHz (in VDD = 5V) depending on Smart Option.
An external RC oscillation source provides a typical 4MHz clock for S3F8S28/S3F8S24. An internal capacitor
supports the RC oscillator circuit. A low gain external crystal or ceramic oscillation source provides a maximum 1
MHz clock with low system power consumption. A high gain external crystal or ceramic oscillation source provides
a maximum 12MHz clock, these two different crystal/ceramic oscillation is selected by Smart Option (3F.3–3F.0).
The XIN and XOUT pins connect the oscillation source to the on-chip clock circuit. Simplified external RC oscillator
and crystal/ceramic oscillator circuits are shown in Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2. When you use external oscillator,
P1.0, P1.1 must be set to output port to prevent current consumption
C1
XIN
S3F8S28/F8S24
C2
Figure 7-1
PS031305-1017
XOUT
Main Oscillator Circuit (Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator)
7-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 7. Clock Circuit
7.2 Main Oscillator Logic
To increase processing speed and to reduce clock noise, non-divided logic is implemented for the main oscillator
circuit. For this reason, very high resolution waveforms (square signal edges) must be generated in order for the
CPU to efficiently process logic operations.
7.3 Clock Status During Power-Down Modes
The two power-down modes, Stop mode and Idle mode, affect clock oscillation as follows:
•
In Stop mode, the main oscillator "freezes", halting the CPU and peripherals. The contents of the register file
and current system register values are retained. Stop mode is released, and the oscillator started, by a reset
operation, by Watchdog Timer interrupt by an external interrupt with RC-delay noise filter (for
S3F8S28/S3F8S24, INT0 to INT7).
•
In Idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated off to the CPU, but not to interrupt control and the timer. The
current CPU status is preserved, including stack pointer, program counter, and flags. Data in the register file is
retained. Idle mode is released by a reset or by an interrupt (external or internally-generated).
PS031305-1017
7-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 7. Clock Circuit
7.4 System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
The system clock control register, CLKCON, is located in location D4H. It is read/write addressable and has the
following functions:
•
Oscillator IRQ wake-up function enable/disable (CLKCON.7)
•
Oscillator frequency divide-by value: non-divided, 2, 8, or 16 (CLKCON.4 and CLKCON.3)
The CLKCON register controls whether or not an external interrupt can be used to trigger a Stop mode release
(This is called the "IRQ wake-up" function). The IRQ wake-up enable bit is CLKCON.7.
After a reset, the external interrupt oscillator wake-up function is enabled, the main oscillator is activated, and the
fOSC/16 (the slowest clock speed) is selected as the CPU clock. If necessary, you can then increase the CPU clock
speed to fOSC, fOSC/2 or fOSC/8.
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
D4H, R/W, Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
Not used
Oscillator IRQ wake-up enable bit:
0 = Enable IRQ for main system
oscillator wake-up function in
power mode.
1 = Disable IRQ for main system
oscillator wake-up function in
power down mode.
Figure 7-2
PS031305-1017
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used
Divide-by selection bits for
CPU clock frequency:
00 = fosc/16
01 = fosc/8
10 = fosc/2
11 = fosc (non-divided)
System Clock Control Register (CLKCON)
7-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 7. Clock Circuit
7.5 Ring Oscillator Control Register (ROSCCON)
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 has an internal 32K (typ.) Ring oscillator for Watchdog Timer, that can be enabled and run in
Stop Mode, it is useful for system wakeup in Stop Mode within setting period.
The frequency distribution of the Ring oscillator is very large, so the trimming bits (ROSCCON.5–.0) are provided
to adjust the frequency; the reset value of ROSCCON.5-.0 is "000000b", which set the max frequency, so user
need to adjust the frequency by setting the trimming bits.
The Ring oscillator control register, ROSCCON, is located in location F5H, Set 1, Bank 0. It is read/write
addressable and has the following functions:
•
Ring OSC Enable/Disable (ROSCCON.7)
•
Free running Watchdog Timer clock source select (ROSCCON.6)
•
Ring OSC frequency trimming bits (ROSCCON.5–.0)
Oscillator Control Register (ROSCCON)
F5H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W, Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
Free Running Watchdog
Timer Clock Source
(FLCLK) Selection bit
0 = System clock: Fosc
1 = Ring OSC clock
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Trimming Bits
000000b = Max. Frequency
111111b = Min. Frequency
Ring OSC Enable bit:
0 = Disable Ring OSC
1 = Enable Ring OSC
Figure 7-3
Ring Oscillator Control Register (ROSCCON)
STOP Control Register (STOPCON)
F4H, Set 1, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
STOP Control bits:
Other values = Disable STOP instruction
10100101 = Enable STOP instruction
Figure 7-4
PS031305-1017
Stop Control Register (STOPCON)
7-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Smart Option
(3F.3-0 in ROM)
Chapter 7. Clock Circuit
Stop
Instruction
CLKCON.4-.3
Internal RC(8 MHz)
Oscillator
Stop
Internal RC(4 MHz)
Internal RC(3.2 MHz)
Internal RC(2 MHz)
Internal RC(1 MHz)
Selected
OSC
MUX
Fosc
1/2
M
U
X
1/8
Internal RC(0.5 MHz)
Oscillator
Wake-up
External RC Oscillator
External LG Crystal/Cermic
CPU Clock
1/16
Noise
Filter
External HG Crystal/Cermic
P2.6/CLO
CLKCON.7
INT Pin
P2CONH.6-.4
WDTINT
Ring
OSC
M
U
X
ROSCCON.7
ROSCCON.6
NOTE:
Free Running
Watchdog Timer
An external interrupt (with RC-delay noise filter) can be used to release stop mode and "wake-up"
The main oscillator. In the S3F8S28/F8S24, the INT0 to INT7 external interrupts are of this type.
When Watchdog Timer clock source is Ring OSC, WDTINT also can release stop mode
Figure 7-5
PS031305-1017
FLCLK
System Clock Circuit Diagram
7-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
8
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
RESET and Power-Down
8.1 System Reset
8.1.1 Overview
By Smart Option (3EH.7 in ROM), user can select internal RESET (LVR) or external RESET. In using internal
RESET (LVR), nRESET pin (P1.2) can be used by normal I/O pin.
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 can be RESET in five ways:
•
By external power-on-reset
•
By the external nRESET input pin pulled low
•
By the digital Basic Timer overflow
•
By the digital free-running watchdog peripheral timing out
•
By Low Voltage Reset (LVR)
During a external power-on reset, the voltage at VDD is High level and the nRESET pin is forced to Low level. The
nRESET signal is input through a Schmitt trigger circuit where it is then synchronized with the CPU clock. This
brings the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 into a known operating status. To ensure correct start-up, the user should take care
that nRESET signal is not released before the VDD level is sufficient to allow MCU operation at the chosen
frequency.
After the nRESET pin is released, the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 MCU will enter an idle state for a minimum time interval
to allow time for internal CPU clock oscillation to stabilize. The minimum required oscillation stabilization time for a
reset is approximately 52.4ms (@ 219/fOSC, fOSC = 10MHz).
When a reset occurs during normal operation (with both VDD and nRESET at High level), the signal at the nRESET
pin is forced Low and the Reset operation starts. All system and peripheral control registers are then set to their
default hardware Reset values (see Table 8-1 to Table 8-3).
The Basic Timer provides a watchdog function in order to ensure graceful recovery from software malfunction in
RUN & IDLE modes. If Basic Timer counter is not refreshed before an end-of-counter condition (overflow) is
reached, the internal reset will be activated. The free running Watchdog Timer also can be used generate Reset to
ensure system recovery, it’s clock source can be set to free running Ring Oscillator, so it can reset chip in Stop
Mode.
The on-chip Low Voltage Reset, features static Reset when supply voltage is below a reference value (Typ. 1.9,
2.3, 3.0, 3.9V). Thanks to this feature, external reset circuit can be removed while keeping the application safety.
As long as the supply voltage is below the reference value, there is a internal and static RESET. The MCU can
start only when the supply voltage rises over the reference value.
When you calculate power consumption, please remember that a static current of LVR circuit should be added a
CPU operating current in any operating modes such as Stop, Idle, and normal RUN mode when LVR enable in
Smart Option.
PS031305-1017
8-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Figure 8-1
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
Low Voltage Reset Circuit
NOTE: To program the duration of the oscillation stabilization interval, you must make the appropriate settings to the basic
timer control register, BTCON, before entering Stop mode. Also, if you do not want to use the basic timer watchdog
function (which causes a system reset if a basic timer counter overflow occurs), you can disable it by writing "1010B"
to the upper nibble of BTCON.
PS031305-1017
8-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
8.1.2 External RESET Pin
When the nRESET pin transiting from VIL (low input level of reset pin) to VIH (high input level of reset pin), the reset
pulse is generated.
VDD
XIN
R
nRESET
C
XOUT
S3F8S28/F8S24
VSS
Notes:
1. R < 100Kohm is recommended to make sure that the voltage drop across R
does not violate the detection of reset pulse.
Figure 8-2
PS031305-1017
Recommended External Reset Circuit
8-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
8.1.3 MCU Initialization Sequence
The following sequence of events occurs during a Reset operation:
•
All interrupts are disabled.
•
The watchdog function (basic timer) is enabled.
•
Ports 0 to 2 are set to input mode
•
Peripheral control and data registers are disabled and reset to their initial values (see Table 8-1 to Table 8-3).
•
The program counter is loaded with the ROM reset address 0100H.
•
When the programmed oscillation stabilization time interval has elapsed, the address stored in ROM location
0100H and 0101H is fetched and executed.
Smart Option
(3EH.7)
nRESET
MUX
Internal nRESET
LVR nRESET
Basic Timer nRESET
Watchdog nRESET
Figure 8-3
Reset Block Diagram
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time (52.4 ms/at 10 MHz)
nRESET Input
Idle Mode
Normal Mode or
Power-Down Mode
Operation Mode
RESET Operation
Figure 8-4
PS031305-1017
Timing for S3F8S28/S3F8S24 After Reset
8-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
8.2 Power-Down Modes
8.2.1 Stop Mode
Stop mode is invoked by the instruction STOP (OPCODE 7FH). In Stop mode, the operation of the CPU and all
peripherals is halted. That is, the on-chip main oscillator stops and the supply current is reduced to less than 4A
except that the LVR (Low Voltage Reset) is enable. All system functions are halted when the clock "freezes", but
data stored in the internal register file is retained. Stop mode can be released in one of three ways: by a nRESET
signal, by an external interrupt or by Watchdog Timer interrupt.
NOTE: Before execute the STOP instruction, must set the STPCON register as "10100101b".
8.2.2 Sources to Release Stop Mode
Stop mode is released when following sources go active:
•
System Reset by external reset pin (nRESET)
•
External Interrupt (INT0 to INT7)
•
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (WDTINT)
8.2.2.1 Using RESET to Release Stop Mode
Stop mode is released when the nRESET signal is released and returns to High level. All system and peripheral
control registers are then Reset to their default values and the contents of all data registers are retained. A Reset
operation automatically selects a slow clock (fOSC/16) because CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4 are cleared to "00B".
After the oscillation stabilization interval has elapsed, the CPU executes the system initialization routine by
fetching the 16-bit address stored in ROM locations 0100H and 0101H.
8.2.2.2 Using an External Interrupt to Release Stop Mode
External interrupts with an RC-delay noise filter circuit can be used to release Stop mode (Clock-related external
interrupts cannot be used). External interrupts INT0 to INT7 in the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 interrupt structure meet this
criterion.
PS031305-1017
8-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
8.2.2.3 Using Watchdog Timer Interrupt to Release Stop Mode
Watchdog timer overflow interrupt can be used to release stop mode: WDTINT
Please note the following conditions for Stop mode release:
•
If you release Stop mode using an external interrupt or Watchdog Timer interrupt, the current values in system
and peripheral control registers are unchanged.
•
If you use an external interrupt or Watchdog Timer interrupt for Stop mode release, you can also program the
duration of the oscillation stabilization interval. To do this, you must make the appropriate control and clock
settings before entering Stop mode.
•
When the Stop mode is released by external interrupt or Watchdog Timer interrupt, the CLKCON.4 and
CLKCON.3 bit-pair setting remains unchanged and the currently selected clock value is used. The CLKCON.1
and CLKCON.0 bits are also remain previous values for Ring OSC setting and Watchdog Timer clock source
selection.
•
The external interrupt or Watchdog Timer interrupt is serviced when the Stop mode release occurs. Following
the IRET from the service routine, the instruction immediately following the one that initiated Stop mode is
executed.
8.2.2.4 How to Enter into Stop Mode
There are two steps to enter into Stop mode:
•
Handling STOPCON register to appropriate value (10100101B).
•
Writing Stop instruction (keep the order).
•
Waiting several clocks (insert several "NOP" instructions)
8.2.3 Idle Mode
Idle mode is invoked by the instruction IDLE (opcode 6FH). In Idle mode, CPU operations are halted while select
peripherals remain active. During Idle mode, the internal clock signal is gated off to the CPU, but not to interrupt
logic and timer/counters. Port pins retain the mode (input or output) they had at the time Idle mode was entered.
There are two ways to release Idle mode:
1. Execute a Reset. All system and peripheral control registers are Reset to their default values and the contents
of all data registers are retained. The Reset automatically selects a slow clock (fOSC/16) because CLKCON.3
and CLKCON.4 are cleared to "00B". If interrupts are masked, a Reset is the only way to release Idle mode.
2. Activate any enabled interrupt, causing Idle mode to be released. When you use an interrupt to release Idle
mode, the CLKCON.3 and CLKCON.4 register values remain unchanged, and the currently selected clock
value is used. The interrupt is then serviced. Following the IRET from the service routine, the instruction
immediately following the one that initiated Idle mode is executed.
NOTE:
1.
External interrupts that are not clock-related and interrupts of free running Watchdog Timer can be used to release stop
mode. To release Idle mode, however, any type of interrupt (that is, internal or external) can be used.
2.
Before enter the STOP or IDLE mode, the ADC must be disabled. Otherwise, the STOP or IDLE current will be increased
significantly.
PS031305-1017
8-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
8.3 Hardware Reset Values
Table 8-1 to Table 8-3 lists the values for CPU and system registers, peripheral control registers, and peripheral
data registers following a Reset operation in normal operating mode.
•
A "1" or a "0" shows the Reset bit value as logic one or logic zero, respectively.
•
An "x" means that the bit value is undefined following a reset.
•
A dash "–" means that the bit is either not used or not mapped.
Table 8-1
Register Name
Register Values After a Reset, Set1
Mnemonic
Address & Location
RESET Value (Bit)
Address
RW
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TACNT
D0H
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer A data register
TADATA
D1H
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer 0/A control register
TACON
D2H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Basic Timer control register
BTCON
D3H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Clock control register
CLKCON
D4H
RW
0
–
–
0
0
–
–
–
System flags register
FLAGS
D5H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
Register Pointer 0
RP0
D6H
RW
1
1
0
0
0
–
–
–
Register Pointer 1
RP1
D7H
RW
1
1
0
0
1
–
–
–
Stack Pointer register
SPL
D9H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Instruction Pointer (High Byte)
IPH
DAH
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Instruction Pointer (Low Byte)
IPL
DBH
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Interrupt Request register
IRQ
DCH
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Interrupt Mask Register
IMR
DDH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
System Mode Register
SYM
DEH
RW
0
–
–
x
x
x
0
0
Register Page Pointer
PP
DFH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer A counter register
Location D8H is not mapped
NOTE: –: Not mapped or not used, x: Undefined
PS031305-1017
8-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 8-2
Register Name
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
Register Values After a Reset, Set1, Bank0
Mnemonic
Address & Location
Bit Values After RESET
Address
RW
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 0 data register
P0
E0H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 1 data register
P1
E1H
RW
–
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
Port 2 data register
P2
E2H
RW
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 data register
P3
E3H
RW
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
Port 2 pull-up resistor enable register
P2PUR
E4H
RW
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 pull-up resistor enable register
P0PUR
E5H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 control register (High Byte)
P0CONH
E6H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 control register (Low Byte)
P0CONL
E7H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 0 interrupt pending register
P0PND
E8H
RW
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
Port 1 control register
P1CON
E9H
RW
0
0
–
–
0
0
0
0
Port 2 control register (High Byte)
P2CONH
EAH
RW
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 2 control register (Low Byte)
P2CONL
EBH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TBCNT
ECH
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer B data register
TBDATA
EDH
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer B control register
TBCON
EEH
RW
–
–
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 interrupt pending register
P3PND
EFH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port 3 control register
P3CON
F0H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM0EX
F1H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM0 data register
PWM0DATA
F2H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM0 control register
PWM0CON
F3H
RW
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
PWMEX
F1H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM data register
PWMDATA
F2H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM control register
PWMCON
F3H
RW
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
STOP control register
STOPCON
F4H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ring Oscillator control register
ROSCCON
F5H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
WDTCON
F6H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ADCON
F7H
RW
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
A/D converter data register (High)
ADDATAH
F8H
R
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
A/D converter data register (Low)
ADDATAL
F9H
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
BTCNT
FDH
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
External memory timing register
EMT
FEH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Interrupt priority register
IPR
FFH
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Timer B counter register
PWM0 extension data register
PWM extension data register
Watchdog Timer control register
A/D control register
Locations FAH to FCH are not mapped
Basic Timer counter
NOTE: –: Not mapped or not used, x: Undefined
PS031305-1017
8-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 8-3
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
System and Peripheral Control Registers, Set1, Bank1
Register Name
Mnemonic
Address & Location
RESET Value (Bit)
Address
RW
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Timer 1 Data Register (High Byte)
T1DATAH
E0H
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer 1 Data Register (Low Byte)
T1DATAL
E1H
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Timer 1 Counter Register (High Byte)
T1CNTH
E2H
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1 Counter Register (Low Byte)
T1CNTL
E3H
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer 1 Control Register
T1CON
E4H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
T1PS
E5H
RW
–
–
–
–
0
0
0
0
PWM1EX
E6H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM1 data register
PWM1DATA
E7H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PWM1 control register
PWM1CON
E8H
RW
0
0
–
0
0
0
0
0
RESETID
EAH
RW
Refer to the detail description
Flash memory control register
FMCON
ECH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
–
–
0
Flash memory user programming
enable register
FMUSR
EDH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flash memory sector address register
(High Byte)
FMSECH
EEH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Flash memory sector address register
(Low Byte)
FMSECL
EFH
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IIC Control Register
ICCR
F0H
RW
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
IIC Status Register
ICSR
F1H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
IIC Data Shift Register
IDSR
F2H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
IAR
F3H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LVDCON
F4H
RW
0
–
0
–
–
–
0
0
UART control register
UARTCON
F5H
RW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UART pending register
UARTPND
F6H
RW
–
–
–
–
–
–
0
0
BRDATA
F7H
RW
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UDATA
F8H
RW
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Timer 1 Prescaler Register
PWM1 extension data register
Locations E9H are not mapped
Reset source indicating register
IIC Address Register
Low Voltage Detector Control
Register
UART Baud rate data register
UART data register
Location F9H to FFH is not mapped
NOTE: –: Not mapped or not used, x: Undefined
PS031305-1017
8-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example 8-1
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
Sample S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Initialization Routine
;-------------->
ORG
0000H
VECTOR 0F2H, PWM0OVF_INT
;
VECTOR 0F4H, INT_TIMERB
;
VECTOR 0F6H, INT_TIMERA
;
VECTOR 0FCH, INT_EXT1
;
VECTOR 0FEH, INT_EXT0
;
;-------------->
ORG
003CH
DB
0FFH
; 003CH, must be initialized to 0
DB
0FFH
; 003DH, must be initialized to 0
DB
0FFH
; 003EH, enable LVR
DB
0FEH
; 003FH, External RC oscillator
;-------------->
ORG
RESET:
0100H
DI
; Disable interrupt
LD
BTCON,#10100011B
; Watch-dog disable
LD
CLKCON,#00011000B
; Select non-divided CPU clock
LD
SP,#0C0H
; Stack pointer must be set
LD
P0CONH,#10101010B
;
LD
P0CONL,#10101010B
; P0.0–P0.7 push-pull output
LD
P0PND,#00001010B
; P0.0, P0.1 interrupt enable
LD
P1CON,#00001000B
; P1.1 push-pull output
LD
P2CONH,#01001010B
;
LD
P2CONL,#10101010B
; P2.0–P2.6 push-pull output
LD
IMR,#00000111B
; Enable IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ2 interrupt
LD
IPR,#00010011B
; IRQ2>IRQ1>IRQ0
;-------------->
LD
TADATA,#50H
LD
TBDATA,#50H
; CPU = 4MHz, interrupt interval = 6.4msec
LD
TACON,#00000110B
; fOSC/256, Timer A interrupt enable
LD
TBCON,#00000110B
; fOSC/256, Timer B interrupt enable
;-------------->
•
•
EI
; Enable interrupt
;-------------->
MAIN:
NOP
LD
; Start main loop
BTCON,#02H
; Enable watchdog function
; Basic counter (BTCNT) clear
•
•
CALL
KEY_SCAN
;
•
PS031305-1017
8-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
•
•
CALL
LED_DISPLAY
;
JOB
;
T,MAIN
;
•
•
•
CALL
•
•
•
JR
;-------------->
KEY_SCAN:
NOP
;
•
•
•
RET
LED_DISPLAY: NOP
;
•
•
•
RET
JOB:
NOP
;
•
•
•
RET
;--------------< Timer A interrupt service routine >
INT_TIMERA:
•
•
AND
;
TACON,#11111110B
IRET
; Pending bit clear
; Interrupt return
;--------------< Timer B interrupt service routine >
INT_TIMERB:
•
•
AND
;
TBCON,#11111110B
; Pending bit clear
IRET
;--------------< PWM overflow interrupt service routine >
PWM0OVF_INT:
•
•
AND
IRET
PWM0CON,#11111110B
; Pending bit clear
; Interrupt return
;--------------< External interrupt0 service routine >
INT_EXT0:
•
•
PS031305-1017
8-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
AND
P0PND,#11111110B
IRET
Chapter 8. RESET and Power-Down
; EXT0 Pending bit clear
; Interrupt return
;--------------< External interrupt1 service routine >
INT_EXT1:
•
•
AND
IRET
P0PND,#11111011B
; EXT1 Pending bit clear
; Interrupt return
•
•
END
PS031305-1017
;
8-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
9
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
I/O Ports
9.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 has three I/O ports: with 22 pins total. You access these ports directly by writing or
reading port data register addresses.
All ports can be configured as LED drive (High current output: typical 10mA).
Table 9-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Port Configuration Overview
Port
Function Description
Programmability
0
Bit-programmable I/O port for schmitt trigger input or push-pull output. Pull-up
resistors are assignable by software. Port 0 pins can also be used as
alternative function. (ADC input, external interrupt input).
Bit
1
Bit-programmable I/O port for schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain
output. Pull-up or pull-down resistors are assignable by software. Port 1 pins
can also oscillator input/output or reset input by Smart Option.
Bit
2
Bit-programmable I/O port for schmitt trigger input or push-pull, open-drain
output. Pull-up resistors are assignable by software. Port 2 can also be used
as alternative function (ADC input, CLO, T0,T1 output,T1 capture input)
Bit
3
Bit-programmable I/O port for schmitt trigger input or push-pull output. Pull-up
resistors are assignable by software. Port 3 pins can also be used as
alternative function. (ADC input, external interrupt input).
Bit
PS031305-1017
9-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
9.2 Port Data Registers
Table 9-2 gives you an overview of the port data register names, locations, and addressing characteristics. Data
registers for ports 0 to 2 have the structure shown in Figure 9-1.
Table 9-2
Port Data Register Summary
Register Name
Mnemonic
Hex
RW
Port 0 data register
P0
E0H
RW
Port 1 data register
P1
E1H
RW
Port 2 data register
P2
E2H
RW
Port 3 data register
P3
E3H
RW
NOTE: A reset operation clears the P0 to P2 data register to "00H".
I/O Port n Data Register (n = 0-2)
MSB
.7
Pn.7
.6
Pn.6
.5
Pn.5
Figure 9-1
PS031305-1017
.4
Pn.4
.3
Pn.3
.2
Pn.2
.1
Pn.1
.0
LSB
Pn.0
Port Data Register Format
9-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
9.2.1 Port 0
Port 0 is a bit-programmable, general-purpose, I/O ports. You can select normal input or push-pull output mode. In
addition, you can configure a pull-up resistor to individual pins using pull-up control register settings.
It is designed for high-current functions such as LED direct drive. Part 0 pins can also be used as alternative
functions (ADC input, external interrupt input and PWM output).
Three control registers are used to control Port 0: P0CONH (E6H), P0CONL (E7H), P0PND (E8H) and P0PUR
(E5H).
You access port 0 directly by writing or reading the corresponding port data register, P0 (E0H).
VDD
Pull-up
Enable
Pull-up register
(50 k? typical)
VDD
P0CONH
PWM
P0 Data
Output Disable
(input mode)
Input Data
M
U
X
In/Out
MUX
D1
D0
Circuit type A
External
Interrupt Input
Noise
Filter
Analog Input
NOTE: I/O pins have protection diodes
through VDD and VSS.
Figure 9-2
PS031305-1017
Mode
Input Data
Output
D0
Input
D1
Port 0 Circuit Diagram
9-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 0 Control Register (High Byte)
E6H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] Port, P0.7/ADC7 Configuration Bits
0 x = Schmitt trigger input
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = A/D converter input (ADC7); schmitt trigger input off
[.5-.4] Port 0, P0.6/ADC6/PWM0 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input
0 1 = Alternative function: PWM0 output
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = A/D converter input (ADC6); schmitt trigger input off
[.3-.2] Port 0, P0.5/ADC5/PWM1 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input
0 1 = Alternative function: PWM1 output
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = A/D converter input (ADC5); schmitt trigger input off
[.1-.0] Port 0, P0.4/ADC4 Configuration Bits
0 x = Schmitt trigger input
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = A/D converter input (ADC4); schmitt trigger input off
Figure 9-3
PS031305-1017
Port 0 Control Register (P0CONH, High Byte)
9-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 0 Control Register (Low Byte)
E7H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] Port 0, P0.3/ADC3/INT3 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
0 1 = Alternative function: SDA
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = A/D converter input (ADC3); Schmitt trigger input off
[.5-.4] Port 0, P0.2/ADC2/INT2 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
0 1 = Alternative function: SCK
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = A/D converter input (ADC2); Schmitt trigger input off
[.3-.2] Port 0, P0.1/ADC1/INT1 Configuration Bits
0 x = Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = A/D converter input (ADC1); Schmitt trigger input off
[.1-.0] Port 0, P0.0/ADC0/INT0 Configuration Bits
0 x = Schmitt trigger input/falling edge interrupt input
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = A/D converter input (ADC0); Schmitt trigger input off
Figure 9-4
PS031305-1017
Port 0 Control Register (P0CONL, Low Byte)
9-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 0 Interrupt Pending Register
E8H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7] Port 0.3/ADC3/INT3, Interrupt Enable Bit
0 = INT3 falling edge interrupt disable
1 = INT3 falling edge interrupt enable
[.6] Port 0.3/ADC3/INT3, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
0 = Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
[.5] Port 0.2/ADC2/INT2, Interrupt Enable Bit
0 = INT2 falling edge interrupt disable
1 = INT2 falling edge interrupt enable
[.4] Port 0.2/ADC2/INT2, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
0 = Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
[.3] Port 0.1/ADC1/INT1, Interrupt Enable Bit
0 = INT1 falling edge interrupt disable
1 = INT1 falling edge interrupt enable
[.2] Port 0.1/ADC1/INT1, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
0 = Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
[.1] Port 0.0/ADC0/INT0, Interrupt Enable Bit
0 = INT0 falling edge interrupt disable
1 = INT0 falling edge interrupt enable
[.0] Port 0.0/ADC0/INT0, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
0 = Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
Figure 9-5
PS031305-1017
Port 0 Interrupt Pending Registers (P0PND)
9-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Register
E5H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7] P0.7 Pull-up Resistor Enable bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.6] P0.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.5] P0.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.4] P0.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.3] P0.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable bit
0 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
[.2] P0.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable bit
0 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
[.1] P0.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable bit
0 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
[.0] P0.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable bit
0 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
Figure 9-6
PS031305-1017
Port 0 Pull-Up Resistor Enable Registers (P0PUR)
9-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
9.2.2 Port 1
Port 1, is a 3-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. It can be used for general I/O port (Schmitt trigger
input mode, push-pull output mode or n-channel open-drain output mode). In addition, you can configure a pull-up
and pull-down resistor to individual pin using control register settings. It is designed for high-current functions such
as LED direct drive. P1.0, P1.1 are used for oscillator input/output by Smart Option. Also, P1.2 is used for RESET
pin by Smart Option.
NOTE: When P1.2 is configured as a general I/O port, it can be used only Schmitt trigger input without pull-up or open-drain
output.
One control register is used to control port 1: P1CON (E9H).You address port 1 bits directly by writing or reading
the port 1 data register, P1 (E1H). When you use external oscillator, P1.0 and P1.1 must be set to output port to
prevent current consumption.
VDD
Pull-Up Register
(50 k typical)
Pull-up
Enable
Open-Drain
VDD
Smart option
P1 Data
MUX
In/Out
Output DIsable
(input mode)
Input Data
MUX
D1
D0
Circuit type A
XIN, XOUT or RESET
Pull-Down
Enable
Pull-Down Register
(50 k typical)
NOTE: I/O pins have protection diodes
through VDD and VSS.
Figure 9-7
PS031305-1017
Mode
Input Data
Output
D0
Input
D1
Port 1 Circuit Diagram
9-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 1 Control Register
E9H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7] Port 1.1 N-Channel Open-Drain Enable Bit
0 = Configure P1.1 as a push-pull output
1 = Configure P1.1 as a n-channel open-drain output
[.6] Port 1.0 N-Channel Open-Drain Enable Bit
0 = Configure P1.0 as a push-pull output
1 = Configure P1.0 as a N-channel open-drain output
[.5] Not used for S3F8S28/F8S24
[.4] Port 1.2 Configuration Bit
0 = Schmitt trigger input;
1 = Open-drain output
[.3-.2] Port 1, P1.1 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input;
0 1 = Schmitt trigger input; pull-up enable
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Schmitt trigger input; pull-down enable
[.1-.0] Port 1, P1.0 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input;
0 1 = Schmitt trigger input; pull-up enable
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Schmitt trigger input; pull-down enable
NOTE:
When you use external oscillator, P1.0, P1.1 must be set to
output port to prevent current consumption.
Figure 9-8
PS031305-1017
Port 1 Control Register (P1CON)
9-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
9.2.3 Port 2
Port 2 is a 7-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. It can be used for general I/O port (schmitt trigger input
mode, push-pull output mode or N-channel open-drain output mode). You can also use some pins of port 2 as
ADC input, CLO output, T0 match output, T1 capture input, UART ports (RxD, TxD). In addition, you can configure
a pull-up resistor to individual pins using control register settings. It is designed for high-current functions such as
LED direct drive.
You address port 2 bits directly by writing or reading the port 2 data register, P2 (E2H, Bank 0). The port 2 control
registers, P2CONH, P2CONL and P2PUR are located at addresses EAH, EBH and E4H of Bank 0 respectively.
VDD
Pull-up
Enable
Pull-up register
(50 k typical)
Open-Drain
VDD
P2CONH/L
CLO, T0
P2 Data
M
U
X
In/Out
Output Disable
(input mode)
Input Data
MUX
D1
D0
Circuit Type A
to ADC
NOTE:
I/O pins have protection diodes
through VDD and VSS.
Figure 9-9
Mode
Input Data
Output
D0
Input
D1
Port 2 Circuit Diagram
NOTE:
1.
P2.2/T1CAP has a T1CAP input module, and without ADC module.
2.
When use P2.2/T1CAP as T1CAP, you must set P2.2/T1CAP in input mode.
3.
P2.5 and P2.4 have not Open-drain function.
PS031305-1017
9-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 2 Control Register (High Byte)
EAH, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7] Not used in S3F8S28/F8S24
[.6-.4] Port 2, P2.6/ADC8/CLO Configuration Bits
0 0 x = Schmitt trigger input
0 1 x = ADC input
1 0 0 = Push-pull output
1 0 1 = Open-drain output; pull-up enable
1 1 0 = Open-drain output
1 1 1 = Alternative function; CLO output
[.3-.2] Port 2, P2.5/ADC9 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input
0 1 = Alternative function: ADC Input
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Invalid
[.1-.0] Port 2, P2.4/ADC10 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input
0 1 = Alternative function: ADC Input
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Invalid
NOTE:
When noise problem is important issue, you had better not
use CLO output
Figure 9-10
PS031305-1017
Port 2 Control Register (P2CONH, High Byte)
9-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 2 Control Register (Low Byte)
EBH, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] Port 2, P2.3/TxD Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input
0 1 = Alternative function: TxD output
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Open-drain output
[.5-.4] Port 2, P2.2/T1CAP/RxD Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input; T1 Capture input; RxD input;
0 1 = Alternative function: RxD output
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Open-drain output
[.3-.2] Port 2, P2.1/T1OUT Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input
0 1 = Alternative function: T1 match output
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Open-drain output
[.1-.0] Port 2, P2.0/T0OUT Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input
0 1 = Alternative function: T0 match output
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Open-drain output
Figure 9-11
PS031305-1017
Port 2 Control Register (P2CONL, Low Byte)
9-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Register
E4H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7] Not used in S3F8S28/F8S24
[.6] Port 2.6 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.5] Port 2.5 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.4] Port 2.4 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.3] Port 2.3 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.2] Port 2.2 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.1] Port 2.1 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
[.0] Port 2.0 Pull-up Resistor Enable Bit
0 = Enable Pull-up Resistor
1 = Disable Pull-up Resistor
Figure 9-12
PS031305-1017
Port 2 Open-Drain Output Mode Register (P2PUR)
9-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
9.2.4 Port 3
Port 3 is a 4-bit I/O port with individually configurable pins. It can be used for general I/O port (schmitt trigger input
mode, push-pull output mode or N-channel open-drain output mode). You can also use some pins of port 3 as
ADC input, external interrupt input. In addition, you can configure a pull-up resistor to individual pins using control
register settings. It is designed for high-current functions such as LED direct drive.
You address port 3 bits directly by writing or reading the port 3 data register, P3 (E3H, Bank 0). The port 3 control
registers, P3CON and P3PND are located at addresses F0H and EFH of Bank 0 respectively.
You access port 3 directly by writing or reading the corresponding port data register, P0 (E0H).
VDD
Pull-up
Enable
Pull-up register
(50 k? typical)
VDD
P0CONH
PWM
P0 Data
Output Disable
(input mode)
Input Data
M
U
X
In/Out
MUX
D1
D0
Circuit type A
External
Interrupt Input
Noise
Filter
Analog Input
NOTE: I/O pins have protection diodes
through VDD and VSS.
Figure 9-13
PS031305-1017
Mode
Input Data
Output
D0
Input
D1
Port 3 Circuit Diagram
9-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 3 Control Register
F0H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7-.6] Port 3, P3.3/INT7 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input / external falling edge interrupt input
0 1 = Schmitt trigger input with pull-up / external falling edge interrupt input
1 x = Push-pull output
[.5-.4] Port 3, P3.2/INT6 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input / external falling edge interrupt input
0 1 = Schmitt trigger input with pull-up / external falling edge interrupt input
1 x = Push-pull output
[.3-.2] Port 3, P3.1/ADC12/INT5 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input / external falling edge interrupt input
0 1 = Schmitt trigger input with pull-up / external falling edge interrupt input
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Alternative function: ADC Input
[.1-.0] Port 3, P3.0/ADC11/INT4 Configuration Bits
0 0 = Schmitt trigger input / external falling edge interrupt input
0 1 = Schmitt trigger input with pull-up / external falling edge interrupt input
1 0 = Push-pull output
1 1 = Alternative function: ADC Input
Figure 9-14
PS031305-1017
Port 3 Control Register (P3CON)
9-15
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 9. I/O Ports
Port 3 Interrupt Pending Register
EFH, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
[.7] Port 3.3/ADC12/INT7, Interrupt Enable Bit
0 = INT7 falling edge interrupt disable
1 = INT7 falling edge interrupt enable
[.6] Port 3.3/ADC12/INT7 Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
0 = Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
[.5] Port 3.2/ADC11/INT6, Interrupt Enable Bit
0 = INT6 falling edge interrupt disable
1 = INT6 falling edge interrupt enable
[.4] Port 3.2/ADC11/INT6, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
0 = Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
[.3] Port 3.1/ADC10/INT5, Interrupt Enable Bit
0 = INT5 falling edge interrupt disable
1 = INT5 falling edge interrupt enable
[.2] Port 3.1/ADC10/INT5, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
0 = Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
[.1] Port 3.0/ADC9/INT4, Interrupt Enable Bit
0 = INT4 falling edge interrupt disable
1 = INT4 falling edge interrupt enable
[.0] Port 3.0/ADC9/INT4, Interrupt Pending Bit
0 = No interrupt pending (when read)
0 = Pending bit clear (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
Figure 9-15
PS031305-1017
Port 3 Interrupt Pending Register (P3PND)
9-16
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
10
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
Basic Timer and Timer 0
10.1 Module Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 has two default timers: an 8-bit basic timer, and a 16-bit general-purpose timer, called
Timer 0.
10.1.1 Basic Timer (BT)
You can use the basic timer (BT) in two different ways:
•
As a watchdog timer to provide an automatic Reset mechanism in the event of a system malfunction.
•
To signal the end of the required oscillation stabilization interval after a Reset or a Stop mode release.
The functional components of the basic timer block are:
•
Clock frequency divider (fOSC divided by 4096, 1024, or 128) with multiplexer
•
8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT (FDH, read-only)
•
Basic Timer control register, BTCON (D3H, read/write)
10.1.2 Timer 0
The 16-bit Timer 0 is used in one 16-bit timer or two 8-bit timers mode. When TACON.7 is set to "1", it is in one
16-bit timer mode. When TACON.7 is set to "0", the Timer 0 is used as two 8-bit timers.
•
One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 0)
•
Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A and B)
PS031305-1017
PRELIMINARY
10-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
10.2 Basic Timer (BT)
10.2.1 Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
The basic timer control register, BTCON, is used to select the input clock frequency, to clear the basic timer
counter and frequency dividers, and to enable or disable the watchdog timer function.
A Reset clears BTCON to "00H". This enables the watchdog function and selects a basic timer clock frequency of
FOSC/4096. To disable the watchdog function, you must write the signature code "1010B" to the basic timer register
control bits BTCON.7 to BTCON.4.
The 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT, can be cleared during normal operation by writing a "1" to BTCON.1. To
clear the frequency dividers for both the basic timer input clock and the Timer 0 clock, you write a "1" to BTCON.0.
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
D3H, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Divider clear bit for basic
timer and timer 0:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear both dividers
Watchdog timer enable bits:
1010B = Disable watchdog function
Other value = Enable watchdog
function
Basic timer counter clear bits:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear basic timer counter
Basic timer input clock selection bits:
00 = fosc/4096
01 = fosc/1024
10 = fosc/128
11 = Invalid selection
NOTE:
When you write a 1 to BTCON.0 (or BTCON.1), the basic timer
divider (or basic timer counter) is cleared. The bit is then cleared
automatically to 0.
Figure 10-1
PS031305-1017
Basic Timer Control Register (BTCON)
PRELIMINARY
10-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
10.2.2 Basic Timer Function Description
10.2.2.1 Watchdog Timer Function
You can program the basic timer overflow signal (BTOVF) to generate a Reset by setting BTCON.7–BTCON.4 to
any value other than "1010B" (The "1010B" value disables the watchdog function). A Reset clears BTCON to
"00H", automatically enabling the watchdog timer function. A Reset also selects the oscillator clock divided by
4096 as the BT clock.
A Reset whenever a basic timer counter overflow occurs. During normal operation, the application program must
prevent the overflow, and the accompanying reset operation, from occurring. To do this, the BTCNT value must be
cleared (by writing a "1" to BTCON.1) at regular intervals.
If a system malfunction occurs due to circuit noise or some other error condition, the BT counter clear operation
will not be executed and a basic timer overflow will occur, initiating a Reset. In other words, during normal
operation, the basic timer overflow loop (a bit 7 overflow of the 8-bit basic timer counter, BTCNT) is always broken
by a BTCNT clear instruction. If a malfunction does occur, a Reset is triggered automatically.
10.2.2.2 Oscillation Stabilization Interval Timer Function
You can also use the basic timer to program a specific oscillation stabilization interval following a Reset or when
Stop mode has been released by an external interrupt.
In Stop mode, whenever a Reset or an external interrupt occurs, the oscillator starts. The BTCNT value then starts
increasing at the rate of fOSC/4096 (for Reset), or at the rate of the preset clock source (for an external interrupt).
When BTCNT.7 is set, a signal is generated to indicate that the stabilization interval has elapsed and to gate the
clock signal off to the CPU so that it can resume normal operation.
In summary, the following events occur when Stop mode is released:
1. During Stop mode, an external power-on Reset or an external interrupt occurs to trigger the Stop mode
release and oscillation starts.
2. If an external power-on Reset occurred, the basic timer counter will increase at the rate of fOSC/4096. If an
external interrupt is used to release Stop mode, the BTCNT value increases at the rate of the preset clock
source.
3. Clock oscillation stabilization interval begins and continues until bit 7 of the basic timer counter is set.
4. When a BTCNT.7 is set, normal CPU operation resumes.
Figure 10-2 and Figure 10-3 shows the oscillation stabilization time on RESET and Stop Mode release
PS031305-1017
PRELIMINARY
10-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
Oscillation Stabilization Time
Normal Operating mode
0.8 V DD
VDD
Reset Release
Voltage
RESET
trst
~
~
RC
Internal
Reset
Release
0.8 V
DD
Oscillator
(X OUT )
Oscillator Stabilization Time
BTCNT
clock
BTCNT
value
10000000B
00000000B
t WAIT = (4096x128)/f OSC
Basic timer increment and
CPU operations are IDLE mode
NOTE: Duration of the oscillator stabilization wait time, t WAIT , when it is released by a
Power-on-reset is 4096 x 128/fOSC.
tRST ~
~ RC (R and C are value of external power on Reset)
Figure 10-2
PS031305-1017
Oscillation Stabilization Time on RESET
PRELIMINARY
10-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
STOP Mode
Normal
Operating
Mode
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
Normal
Operating
Mode
Oscillation Stabilization Time
VDD
STOP
Instruction
Execution
STOP Mode
Release Signal
External
Interrupt
RESET
STOP
Release
Signal
Oscillator
(X OUT )
BTCNT
clock
10000000B
BTCNT
Value
00000000B
tWAIT
Basic Timer Increment
NOTE: Duration of the oscillator stabilzation wait time, t WAIT , it is released by an
interrupt is determined by the setting in basic timer control register, BTCON.
BTCON.3
BTCON.2
t WAIT
0
0
(4096 x 128)/fosc
52.4 ms
0
1
(1024 x 128)/fosc
13.1 ms
1
0
(128 x 128)/fosc
1.63 ms
1
1
Invalid setting
Figure 10-3
PS031305-1017
t WAIT (When f OSC is 10 MHz)
Oscillation Stabilization Time on Stop Mode Release
PRELIMINARY
10-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example 10-1
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
Configuring the Basic Timer
This example shows how to configure the basic timer to sample specification.
ORG
0000H
;-------------->
ORG
003CH
DB
0FFH
; 003CH, must be initialized to 1
DB
0FFH
; 003DH, must be initialized to 1
DB
0FFH
; 003EH, enable LVR
DB
0FEH
; 003FH, External RC oscillator
;-------------->
ORG
RESET:
0100H
DI
; Disable interrupt
LD
CLKCON,#00011000B
; Select non-divided CPU clock
LD
SP,#0C0H
; Stack pointer must be set
BTCON,#02H
; Enable watchdog function
•
•
LD
; Basic Timer clock: fOSC/4096
; Basic counter (BTCNT) clear
•
•
•
EI
; Enable interrupt
;-------------->
MAIN:
•
LD
BTCON,#02H
; Enable watchdog function
; Basic counter (BTCNT) clear
•
•
•
JR
PS031305-1017
T,MAIN
;
PRELIMINARY
10-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
10.3 One 16-Bit Timer Mode (Timer 0)
The 16-bit Timer 0 is used in one 16-bit timer or two 8-bit timers mode. When TACON.7 is set to "1", it is in one
16-bit timer mode. When TACON.7 is set to "0", the Timer 0 is used as two 8-bit timers.
•
One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 0)
•
Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A and B)
10.3.1 Overview
The 16-bit Timer 0 is a 16-bit general-purpose timer. Timer 0 includes interval timer mode using appropriate
TACON setting.
Timer 0 has the following functional components:
•
Clock frequency divider (fxx divided by 256, 64, 8, or 1) with multiplexer
•
16-bit counter (TACNT, TBCNT), 16-bit comparator, and 16-bit reference data register (TADATA, TBDATA)
•
Timer 0 match interrupt (IRQ1, vector F6H) generation
•
Timer 0 control register, TACON (D2H, read/write)
10.3.2 Function Description
10.3.2.1 Interval Timer Function
The Timer 0 module can generate an interrupt, the Timer 0 match interrupt (T0INT). T0INT belongs to the interrupt
level IRQ1, and is assigned a separate vector address, F6H.
The T0INT pending condition should be cleared by software after IRQ1 is serviced. The T0INT pending bit must
be cleared by the application sub-routine by writing a "0" to the TACON.0 pending bit.
In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the
T0 reference data registers, TADATA and TBDATA. The match signal generates a Timer 0 match interrupt
(T1INT, vector F6H) and clears the counter.
If, for example, you write the value 10H and 32H to TADATA and TBDATA, respectively, and 8EH to TACON, the
counter will increment until it reaches 3210H. At this point, the T0 interrupt request is generated, the counter value
is reset, and counting resumes.
PS031305-1017
PRELIMINARY
10-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
10.3.2.2 Timer 0 Control Register (TACON)
You use the Timer 0 control register, TACON, to:
•
Enable the Timer 0 operating (interval timer)
•
Select the Timer 0 input clock frequency
•
Clear the Timer 0 counter, TACNT and TBCNT
•
Enable the Timer 0 interrupt
•
Clear Timer 0 interrupt pending condition
TACON is located at address D0H, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode.
A reset clears TACON to "00H". This sets Timer 0 to disable interval timer mode, selects an input clock frequency
of fxx/256, and disables Timer 0 interrupt. You can clear the Timer 0 counter at any time during the normal
operation by writing a "1" to TACON.3.
To enable the Timer 0 interrupt (IRQ1, vector F6H), you must write TACON.7, TACON.2, and TACON.1 to "1".
To generate the exact time interval, you should set TACON.3 and TACON.0 to "10B", which clear counter and
interrupt pending bit. When the T0INT sub-routine is serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software
by writing a "0" to the Timer 0 interrupt pending bit, TACON.0.
Timer 0 Control Register (TACON)
D2H, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer 0 interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending
Always "0"
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
Timer 0 clock
selection bits:
Timer 0 operation mode selection bit:
00 = fxx/256
0 = Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A/B)
01 = fxx/64
1 = One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 0)
10 = fxx/8
11 = fxx
1 = No effect (when write)
Timer 0 interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer 0 counter run enable bit:
0 = Disable counter running
1 = Enable counter running
Timer 0 counter clear bit:
0 = No affect
1 = Clear the timer 0 counter (when write)
NOTE: TACON.6 must be always "0" during normal operation.
Figure 10-4
PS031305-1017
Timer 0 Control Register (TACON)
PRELIMINARY
10-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Compare Value
(TBDATA,TADATA)
Up Counter Value
(TBCNT,TACNT)
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
Match Match Match
Match Match Match Match
00H
Clear Clear
Count start
TACON.3 1 TBDATA,TADATA
Value change
Clear
Counter Clear
(TACON.3)
Interrupt Request
(TACON.0)
T0 Match Output
(P2.0)
Figure 10-5
PS031305-1017
Timer 0 Timing Diagram
PRELIMINARY
10-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
10.3.3 Block Diagram
Bits 5, 4
Data Bus
8
fxx/256
fxx/64
fxx/8
Bit 3
16-Bit Up-Counter Clear
(Read Only)
MSB
LSB
MUX
fxx/1
Bit 2
16-Bit Comparator
Match
Pending
Bit 0
Bit 1
Timer 0 Buffer
Register (16-bit)
T0INT
IRQ1
P2.0/T0
P2CONL.1-.0
Counter Clear Signal
Match Signal
16
Timer 0 Data Register
(Read/Write)
MSB
LSB
NOTE:
When TACON.7 is "1", 16-bit timer 0.
Figure 10-6
PS031305-1017
Timer 0 Functional Block Diagram
PRELIMINARY
10-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
10.4 Two 8-Bit Timers Mode (Timer A and B)
10.4.1 Overview
The 8-bit timer A and B are the 8-bit general-purpose timers. Timer A and B support interval timer mode using the
appropriate TACON and TBCON setting, respectively.
Timer A and Timer B have the following functional components:
•
Clock frequency divider with multiplexer
−
fxx divided by 256, 64, 8, or 1 for timer A
−
fxx divided by 256, 64, 8, or 1 for timer B
•
8-bit counter (TACNT, TBCNT), 8-bit comparator, and 8-bit reference data register (TADATA, TBDATA)
•
Timer A match interrupt (IRQ1, vector F6H) generation
•
Timer A control register, TACON (D2H, read/write)
•
Timer B match interrupt (IRQ1, vector F4H) generation
•
Timer B control register, TBCON (EEH, read/write)
10.4.2 Function Description
10.4.2.1 Interval Timer Function
The timer A and B module can generate an interrupt: the timer A match interrupt (TAINT) and the timer B match
interrupt (TBINT). TAINT belongs to the interrupt level IRQ1, and is assigned a separate vector address, F6H.
TBINT belongs to the interrupt level IRQ1 and is assigned a separate vector address, F4H.
The TAINT and TBINT pending condition should be cleared by software after they are serviced.
In interval timer mode, a match signal is generated when the counter value is identical to the values written to the
TA or TB reference data registers, TADATA or TBDATA. The match signal generates corresponding match
interrupt (TAINT, vector F6H; TBINT, vector F4H) and clears the counter.
If, for example, you write the value 10H to TBDATA, "0" to TACON.7, and 0EH to TBCON, the counter will
increment until it reaches 10H. At this point, the TB interrupt request is generated, the counter value is reset, and
counting resumes.
PS031305-1017
PRELIMINARY
10-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
10.4.2.2 Timer A and B Control Register (TACON, TBCON)
You use the timer A and B control register, TACON and TBCON, to:
•
Enable the timer A and B operating (interval timer)
•
Select the timer A and B input clock frequency
•
Clear the timer A and B counter, TACNT and TBCNT
•
Enable the timer A and B interrupts
•
Clear timer A and B interrupt pending conditions
TACON and TBCON are located at address D2H and EEH, and is read/write addressable using register
addressing mode.
A reset clears TACON and TBCON to "00H". This sets timer A and B to disable interval timer mode, selects an
input clock frequency of fxx/256, and disables timer A and B interrupt. You can clear the timer A and B counter at
any time during normal operation by writing a "1" to TACON.3 and TBCON.3.
To enable the timer A and B interrupt (IRQ1, vector F6H, F4H), you must write TACON.7 to "0", TACON.2
(TBCON.2) and TACON.1 (TBCON.1) to "1". To generate the exact time interval, you should set TACON.3
(TBCON.3) and TACON.0 (TBCON.0) to "10B", which clear counter and interrupt pending bit, respectively. When
the TAINT or TBINT sub-routine is serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to
the timer A or B interrupt pending bits, TACON.0 or TBCON.0.
Timer A Control Register (TACON)
D2H, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer A interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending
Always "0"
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
Timer A clock
selection bits:
Timer A operation mode selection bit:
00 = fxx/256
0 = Two 8-bit timers mode (Timer A/B)
01 = fxx/64
1 = One 16-bit timer mode (Timer 0)
10 = fxx/8
11 = fxx
1 = No effect (when write)
Timer A interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer A counter run enable bit:
0 = Disable counter running
1 = Enable counter running
Timer A counter clear bit:
0 = No affect
1 = Clear the timer A counter (when write)
NOTE: TACON.6 must be always "0" during normal operation.
Figure 10-7
PS031305-1017
Timer A Control Register (TACON)
PRELIMINARY
10-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
EEH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer B interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending
Not used for S3F8S28/F8S24
Timer B clock selection bits:
00 = fxx/256
01 = fxx/64
10 = fxx/8
11 = fxx
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending (when read)
1 = No effect (when write)
Timer B interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer B counter run enable bit:
0 = Disable counter running
1 = Enable counter running
Timer B counter clear bit:
0 = No affect
1 = Clear the timer B counter (when write)
Figure 10-8
PS031305-1017
Timer B Control Register (TBCON)
PRELIMINARY
10-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 10. Basic Timer and Timer 0
TACON.5-.4
TACON.3
Clear
fxx/256
TACNT
fxx/64
fxx/8
MUX
R
P2.0/T0
Match
Comparator
fxx
P2CONL.1-.0
TACON.2
TACON.0
Pending
TA Buffer Register
TACON.1
TA Counter Clear Signal,
TA Match Signal
TADATA
TB Counter Clear Signal,
TB Match Signal
TBDATA
IRQ1
TBCON.1
TB Buffer Register
fxx/256
Pending
TBCON.2
fxx/64
fxx/8
TBCON.0
Comparator
Match
MUX
fxx
TBCNT
R
Clear
TBCON.3
TBCON.5-.4
NOTE: When TACON.7 is "0", two 8-bit timer A/B.
Figure 10-9
PS031305-1017
Timer A and B Function Block Diagram
PRELIMINARY
10-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
11
Chapter 11. 16-Bit Timer 1
16-Bit Timer 1
11.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 has a 16-bit timer/counters-Timer 1. The 16-bit Timer 1 is a 16-bit general-purpose
timer/counter. Timer 1 has two operating modes, one of which you select using the appropriate T1CON setting is:
•
Interval timer mode
•
Capture input mode with a rising or falling edge trigger at the T1CAP pin
Timer 1 has the following functional components:
•
Precalar for clock frequency programmable from fOSC to fOSC/4096
•
A 16-bit counter, 16-bit comparator, and two 16-bit reference data register (T1DATAH/L)
•
I/O pins for capture input (T1CAP)
•
Timer 1 overflow interrupt and match/capture interrupt generation
•
Timer 1 control register, T1CON
•
Timer 1 Prescaler register, T1PS
You can use Timer 1 in three ways:
•
As a normal counter, generating a Timer 1 overflow interrupt (IRQ3, vector EAH) at programmed time
intervals.
•
To generate a Timer 1 match interrupt (IRQ3, vector ECH) when the 16-bit Timer 1 count value matches the
16-bit value written to the reference data registers.
•
To generate a Timer 1 capture interrupt (IRQ3, vector ECH) when a triggering condition exists at the T1CAP
(P2.2)
PS031305-1017
11-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 11. 16-Bit Timer 1
11.2 Function Description
11.2.1 Timer 1 Interrupts
The Timer 1 module can generate two interrupts, the Timer 1 overflow interrupt (T1OVF), and the Timer 1
match/capture interrupt (T1INT). A Timer 1 overflow interrupt pending condition is cleared by software when it has
been serviced. A Timer 1 match/capture interrupt, T1INT pending condition is also cleared by software when it has
been serviced.
11.2.2 Timer 1 Overflow Interrupt
Timer 1 can be programmed to generate an overflow interrupt (IRQ3, vector EAH) whenever an overflow occurs in
the 16-bit up counter. When you set the Timer 1 overflow interrupt enable bit, T1CON.3, to "1", the overflow
interrupt is generated each time the 16-bit up counter reaches "FFFFH". After the interrupt request is generated,
the counter value is automatically cleared to "00H" and up counting resumes. By writing a "1" to T1CON.4, you
can clear/reset the 16-bit counter value at any time during program operation.
11.2.3 Interval Mode (Match)
Timer 1 can also be used to generate a match interrupt T1INT (IRQ3, vector ECH) whenever the 16-bit counter
value matches the value that is written to the Timer 1 reference data registers, T1DATAH and T1DATAL. When a
match condition is detected by the 16-bit comparator, the match interrupt is generated, the counter value is
cleared, and up counting resumes from "00H".
In match mode, program software can poll the Timer 1 match/capture interrupt pending bit, T1CON.0, to detect
when a Timer 1 match interrupt pending condition exists (T1CON.0 = "1"). When the interrupt request is
acknowledged by the CPU and the service routine starts, the interrupt service routine for vector ECH must clear
the interrupt pending condition by writing a "0" to T1CON.0.
IRQ3 (T1INT)
Pending
(T1CON.0)
Interrupt
Enable/Disable
(T1CON.1)
16-Bit Up Counter
CLK
16-Bit Comparator
Timer 1 High/Low
Buffer Register
R (Clear)
Match
CTL
P2.1
T1CON.7
T1CON.6
Match Signal
T1CON.4
Timer 1 Data High/Low
Buffer Register
Figure 11-1
PS031305-1017
Simplified Timer 1 Function Diagram: Interval Mode
11-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 11. 16-Bit Timer 1
11.2.4 Capture Mode
Timer 1 also gives you capture input source, the signal edge at the T1CAP (P2.2) pin. You select the capture input
by setting the input mode in the port 2 control register, P2CONL
Timer 1 can be used to generate a capture interrupt (IRQ3, vector ECH) whenever a triggering condition is
detected at the T1CAP (P2.2) pin. The T1CON.7 and T1CON.6 bit-pair setting is used to select the trigger
condition for capture mode operation: rising edges, falling edges or on both falling and rising edge.
In capture mode for Timer 1, a signal edge that is detected at the T1CAP pin opens a gate and loads the current
counter value into the T1 data register (T1DATAH/L for rising edge, or falling edge or on both falling and rising
edge).
Both kinds of Timer 1 interrupts (T1OVF, T1INT) can be used in capture mode, the Timer 1 overflow interrupt is
generated whenever a counter overflow occurs, the Timer 1 capture interrupt is generated whenever the counter
value is loaded into the T1 data register (T1DATAH/L).
By reading the captured data value in T1DATAH/L, and assuming a specific value for the Timer 1 clock frequency,
you can calculate the pulse width (duration) of the signal that is being input at the T1CAP pin
In capture mode, program software can poll the Timer 1 match/capture interrupt pending bit, T1CON.0, to detect
when a Timer 1 capture interrupt pending condition exists (T1CON.0 = "1"). When the interrupt request is
acknowledged by the CPU and the service routine starts, the interrupt service routine for vector ECH must clear
the interrupt pending condition by writing a "0" to T1CON.0
T1CON.3
CLK
16-Bit Up Counter
IRQ3 (T1OVF)
Pending
(T1CON.0)
P2.2/
T1CAP
T1CON.7
T1CON.6
Figure 11-2
PS031305-1017
Timer 1 Data
IRQ3
(T1INT)
Interrupt
Enable/Disable
(T1CON.1)
Simplified Timer 1 Function Diagram: Capture Mode
11-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 11. 16-Bit Timer 1
11.3 Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON)
You use the TIMER 1 control register, T1CON, to
•
Select the TIMER 1 operating mode (interval timer, capture mode)
•
Timer1 Start/Stop
•
Clear the TIMER 1 counter.
•
Enable/Disable the Timer 1 overflow interrupt or Timer 1 match/capture interrupt
•
Clear Timer1 overflow interrupt or match/capture pending bit
You can use Timer 1 prescaler register, T1PS to
•
Program clock prescaler
T1CON is located at address E4H, Bank 1, Set 1, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode.
A reset clears T1CON to "00H". This sets TIMER 1 to normal interval timer mode, disable Timer 1 run; disable
Timer 1 overflow and match/capture interrupt.
You can start Timer 1 counter by writing a "1" to T1CON.5.You can clear the Timer 1 counter at any time during
normal operation by writing a "1" to T1CON.4. To generate the exact time interval, you should write "1" to
T1CON.4 and clear appropriate pending bits of the T1CON register.
Timer 1 match/capture interrupt is controlled by T1CON.1; you can enable Timer 1 match/capture interrupt by
writing a "1" to T1CON.1 or disable it by writing "0" to T1CON.1. Timer 1 overflow (T1OVF) is set by T1CON.3,
you can enable Timer 1 overflow interrupt by writing a "1" to T1CON.3 or disable it by writing "0" to T1CON.3.
To detect a match/capture or overflow interrupt pending condition when T1INT or T1OVF is disabled, the
application program should poll the pending bit T1CON.0 and T1CON.2. When a "1" is detected, a Timer 1
match/capture or overflow interrupt is pending.
When the sub-routine has been serviced, the pending condition must be cleared by software by writing a "0" to the
interrupt pending bit.
T1PS is located at address E5H, Bank 1, Set 1, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing mode.
A reset clears T1PS to "00H". This selects the clock frequency of Timer 1 as FLCLK. The clock prescaler value of
T1PS should be kept to not larger than 12, the values larger than 12 is not valid.
PS031305-1017
11-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 11. 16-Bit Timer 1
Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON)
E4H, Bank 1, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
Timer 1 Operating Mode Selection Bits:
00 = Interval mode
01 = Capture mode (capture on rising
edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
10 = Capture mode (capture on falling
edge, counter running, OVF can occur)
11 = Capture mode (capture on rising and
falling edge, counter running, OVF can
occur)
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer 1 Interrupt Match/capture Pending Bit:
0 = No interrupt pending
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending
Timer 1 Interrupt Match/capture Enable Bit:
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Timer 1 Counter Run enable bit:
0- Stop Timer 1
1- Start Timer 1
Timer 1 Counter Clear Bits:
0 = No effect
1 = Clear Timer 1 Counter (when write)
Timer 1 Overflow Interrupt Pending Bit:
0 = No interrupt pending
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending
Timer 1 Overflow Interrupt Enable Bit:
0 = Disable overflow interrupt
1 = Enable overflow interrupt
NOTE:
When the counter clear bit(.4) is set, the 16-bit counter is cleared and
T1CON.4 will be cleared to ‘0’automatically .
Figure 11-3
PS031305-1017
Timer 1 Control Register (T1CON)
11-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 11. 16-Bit Timer 1
Timer 1 Prescaler Register (T1PS)
E5H, Bank 1, R/W, Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used in S3F8S28/F8S24
Timer 1 prescaler bit (T1PSB)
T1CLK = Fosc/(2^T1PSB)
Note:
1. Prescaler values(T1PSB) above 12 are not valid.
Figure 11-4
Timer 1 Prescaler Register (T1PS)
Timer 1 Data Register High (T1DATAH)
E0H, Set1, Bank1; R/W; Reset Value: FFH
MSB
.7
.6
Figure 11-5
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer 1 Data Register High (T1DATAH)
Timer 1 Data Register Low (T1DATAL)
E1H, Set1, Bank1; R/W; Reset Value: FFH
MSB
.7
.6
Figure 11-6
PS031305-1017
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Timer 1 Data Register Low (T1DATAL)
11-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 11. 16-Bit Timer 1
T1PS.3-.0
Data Bus
P
R
E
S
C
A
L
E
R
FOSC
Overflow
16-bit Up-Counter
(Read Only)
M
U
X
T1OVF
Pending
T1CON.2
8
T1CON.5
P2.1/
T1CAP
T1CON.3
16-bit Comparator
Clear
Match
T1CON.4
T1CON.1
M
U
X
T1INT
Pending
T1CON.0
16-bit Timer Buffer
T1OUT
T1CON.7-.6
16-bit Timer Data Register
(T1DATAH/L)
T1CON.7-.6
8
Data Bus
Figure 11-7
PS031305-1017
Timer 1 Functional Block Diagram
11-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example 11-1
ORG
Chapter 11. 16-Bit Timer 1
Using the Timer 1
003Ch
VECTOR 0ECh, INT_Timer1_match
ORG
0100h
INITIAL:
LD
SYM,#00h
; Disable Global/Fast interrupt
LD
SP,#0C0H
; Set stack area
LD
BTCON, #10100011b
; Disable Watch-dog
LD
T1DATAH, #00H
LD
T1DATAL, #0F0H
LD
T1CON, #00100010b
; Interval, timer start run; clear counter, Enable interrupt
LD
T1PS, #00000100b
; Timer 1 clock = FOSC/16
EI
MAIN:
•
•
•
MAIN ROUTINE
•
•
•
JR
T, MAIN
INT_Timer1_match:
•
•
•
Interrupt service routine
•
•
•
IRET
END
PS031305-1017
11-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
12
Chapter 12. Watchdog Timer
Watchdog Timer
12.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 has an free running enhanced 11-bit Watchdog Timer (WDT), the main features are:
•
Selectable clock: system clock or free running ring oscillator (by ROSCCON.6)
•
Interrupt generation if INTEN is enable
•
Overflow reset generation if RSTEN is enabled
•
Selectable clock divider
The Watchdog Timer (WDT) is a timer counting cycles of the Low Power Ring Oscillator or system clock. The
WDT gives an pending interrupt when the counter reach to 0x3FF (half of the full counter value) or a system reset
when the counter overflow. In normal operation mode, it is required that the system writing "1" to bit 4 of WDTCON
to clear bit 10 of the counter before the time-out value is reached. If the system doesn't clear the counter, a system
reset will be issued if the overflow Reset (RSTEN) is enabled.
PS031305-1017
12-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 12. Watchdog Timer
12.2 Function Description
12.2.1 Watchdog Interrupt
The WDT can work as a general system timer that gives an interrupt when the 11-bit counter reach to 0x3FF (the
half of the full counter value). One example is to limit the maximum time allowed for certain operations, giving an
interrupt when the operation has run longer than expected.
12.2.2 Release Stop
The Watchdog Timer interrupt can be used to wake up the device from Stop Mode when the watchdog timer is
clocked by free running Ring Oscillator.
12.2.3 System Reset
The WDT gives a reset when the 11-bit counter expires if the RSTEN is set. This is typically used to prevent
system hang-up in case of runaway code.
In order to prevent an internal reset (if RSTEN bit is set), the software must clear the half of the counter before it
reaches 0x7FF by writing "1" to bit 4 of Watchdog Control Register (WDTCON).
There is a possibility to set a pending window where users can restart the watchdog counter within this window.
When the interrupt occurred, User can clear the counter to prevent the internal reset. If the reset is needed, User
still can save some critical parameters before a system reset. This is useful for allowing a safe shutdown.
PS031305-1017
12-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 12. Watchdog Timer
12.3 Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTCON)
You use the Watchdog Timer Control Register, WDTCON, to
•
Enable/Disable Watchdog Timer
•
Interrupt Enable/Disable
•
Overflow Reset Enable/Disable
•
Counter clear
•
Program the clock prescaler for watchdog timer
WDTCON is located at address E6H, Bank 0, Set 1, and is read/write addressable using Register addressing
mode. A reset clears WDTCON to "00H". This disable Watchdog Timer, disable Watchdog interrupt and Reset.
You can enable Watchdog Timer by writing a "1" to WDTCON.7. Writing a "1" to the enable bit clear the counter
and restart to counting at any time.
Watchdog Overflow Reset is controlled by WDTCON.6, if it is set, when the counter overflow, the system reset will
occur. Watchdog Timer’s interrupt is controlled by WDTCON.5, if it is set, the watchdog timer interrupt will
generated when counter reach to 0x3FF.
You can clear the Watchdog Timer counter bit 10 of the counter at any time during normal operation by writing a
"1" to WDTCON.4.
WDTCON.3-0 are used to set select the clock prescaler of Watchdog Timer. The clock prescaler value of WDTPS
should be kept to not larger than 12, the values larger than 12 is not valid.
The clock source of Watchdog Timer is selected by ROSCCON.6 to choose system clock or Ring Oscillator as the
clock for Watchdog Timer.
PS031305-1017
12-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 12. Watchdog Timer
Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTCON)
F6H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
Watchdog Timer enable bit:
0- Disable Watchdog Timer (clear counter)
1- Enable Watchdog Timer
Overflow Reset Enable bit:
0- Disable Overflow Reset
1- Enable Overflow Reset
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Watchdog Timer prescaler bit (WDTPSB)
WDTCLK = FLCLK/(2^WDTPSB)
Watchdog Timer Counter Clear bit
0- No effect
1- Clear bit 10 of the Counter (when write)
Watchdog Interrupt Enable bit:
0- Disable Interrupt
1- Enable Interrupt
Note:
1. Prescaler values(WDTPSB) above 12 are not valid.
2. When the counter clear bit(.4) is set, the bit 10 of the counter is cleared
and WDTCON.4 will be cleared to ‘0’automatically.
Figure 12-1
PS031305-1017
Watchdog Timer Control Register (WDTCON)
12-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 12. Watchdog Timer
WDTPS.3-.0
WDTCON.4
ROSCCON.6
Fxx
Ring OSC
M FLCLK
U
X
Clear bit 10
P
R
E
S
C
A
L
E
R
Overflow
System Reset
= 0x7FF
11-bit Up-Counter
WDTCON.6
WDTCON.7
= 0x3FF
Interrupt
WDTCON.5
Figure 12-2
Table 12-1
Watchdog Timer Functional Block Diagram
Watchdog Timer Presaler Select
WDTCON.3
WDTCON.2
WDTCON.1
WDTCON.0
Number of 32kHz
Ring OSC Cycles
Typical Time-out
0
0
0
0
2048
32ms
0
0
0
1
4096
64ms
0
0
1
0
8109
128ms
0
0
1
1
16384
256ms
0
1
0
0
32768
512ms
0
1
0
1
65536
1024ms
0
1
1
0
131072
2048ms
0
1
1
1
262144
4096ms
1
0
0
0
524288
8192ms
1
0
0
1
1048576
16384ms
1
0
1
0
2097152
32768ms
1
0
1
1
10485760
65536ms
1
1
0
0
20971520
131072ms
PS031305-1017
12-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 12. Watchdog Timer
12.4 Interrupt
User can use Watchdog Timer as general timer/counter to generate interval interrupt with programmable period.
Enable the interrupt by setting the WDTCON.5 to "1", If the global interrupt is enabled, after you enable the
Watchdog (Set WDTCON.7 to "1"), the 11-bit counter start to counting, when the counter reach to 0x3FF, the
interrupt will be generated and the counter will keep counting. If the Overflow Reset is disabled, when the counter
overflow, it counter value reset to "0" and continues to up count. This is to be used to generate periodic interrupts.
Watchdog Timer interrupt pending bit will be cleared automatically by hardware when the interrupt request is
served.
One example is to limit the maximum time allowed for certain operations, giving an interrupt when the operation
has run longer than expected.
It can be used to Release Stop Mode with setting the clock source as Ring Oscillator. After enter Stop Mode, the
system clock (External crystal or Internal RC OSC) is stopped, but the Ring Oscillator can be set to run to provide
clock for Watchdog Timer, when the 11-bit counter of Watchdog Timer interrupt generated, the interrupt will
release Stop Mode.
Enable WDT and interrupt,
disable OVF Reset
Select Clock source,
Start Counting
Main
routine
No
= 0x3FF?
Yes
Clear pending bit (by Hardware)
Interrupt
routine
Interrupt Service
Routine
Return
Figure 12-3
PS031305-1017
Interrupt Operation Sequence
12-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 12. Watchdog Timer
12.5 System Reset
Watchdog Timer is typically used to prevent system hang-up in case of runaway code.
That’s similar with the basic timer overflow reset, but, as the clock source of Watchdog Timer is selectable, so
when it is clocked by Ring Oscillator, it can be used in Stop Mode to reset chip, it is useful when the main system
is stopped and the basic timer overflow reset is not available.
The typical time-out period of the Watchdog Timer is listed as Table 12-1. It similar with a 10-bit Basic Timer’s
watchdog function, user should clear the counter (write "1" to WDTCON.4) for prevent system reset.
When the WDTCON.6 is set to "1", after you enable the Watchdog Timer to start counting, the chip will be reset
immediately at the 11-bit counter overflow.
Enable WDT OVF Reset, disable
Interrupt
Select Clock source
and Start Counting
Main
routine
No
OVF?
Yes
System Reset
Figure 12-4
PS031305-1017
System Reset Operation Sequence
12-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 12. Watchdog Timer
12.6 Interrupt & System Reset
If all the watchdog interrupt and overflow reset are enabled, and when you enable the watchdog, the counter start
to counting, the interrupt will be generated at the counter reach to 0x3FF, and the counter continuous to counting,
if the counter overflow, the overflow reset will generated.
This operating mechanism combines the two events by first giving an interrupt and then giving a reset. This will for
instance allow a safe shutdown by saving critical parameters before a system reset.
There is a possibility to set a pending window where users can restart the watchdog counter within this window.
When the interrupt occurred, user can clear the counter to prevent the internal reset.
Enable WDT interrupt & Reset
Select Clock source,
Start Counting
Main
routine
No
=0x3FF
Yes
Clear pending bit (by Hardware)
Clear
Counter?
Interrupt
routine
No
Yes
Return
Figure 12-5
PS031305-1017
Wait Counter
Overflow
Reset
Interrupt & System Reset Operation Sequence
12-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
13
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
13.1 Overview
This microcontroller has 2 PWM modules: PWM0 & PWM1. These two PWM modules are totally same, the output
pin of PWM0 is P0.6, the output pin of PWM1 is P0.5.
The PWM can be configured as one of these three resolutions:
•
12-bit resolution: 6-bit base + 6-bit extension
•
8-bit resolution: 6-bit base + 2-bit extension
•
14-bit resolution: 8-bit base + 6-bit extension
These three resolutions are mutually exclusive; only one resolution can work at any time. And which resolution is
used is selected via PWM extension register, PWM0EX.1–0. PWM1EX.1–0.
The operation of all PWM circuits is controlled by the control register, PWM0CON, PWM1CON.
The PWM counter is an incrementing counter. It is used by the PWM circuits. To start the counter and enable the
PWM circuits, you set PWM start bit (PWM0CON.2, PWM1CON.2) to "1". If the counter is stopped, it retains its
current count value; when restarted, it resumes counting from the retained count value. When there is a need to
clear the counter you set the counter clear bit (PWM0CON.3, PWM1CON.3) to "1".
You can select a clock for the PWM counter by set PWM0CON.7–6, PWM1CON.7–6. Clocks which you can select
are fOSC/64, fOSC/8, fOSC/2, fOSC/1.
PS031305-1017
13-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
13.2 Function Description
13.2.1 PWM
The PWM circuits have the following components:
•
PWM mode selection (PWM0EX.1–0, PWM1EX.1–0)
•
Base comparator and extension cycle circuit
•
Base reference data registers (PWM0DATA, PWM1DATA)
•
Extension data registers (PWM0EX.7–2, PWM1EX.7–2)
•
PWM output pins (P0.6/PWM0; P0.5/PWM1)
13.2.2 PWM Counter
The PWM counter is an incrementing counter comprised of a lower base counter and an upper extension counter.
To determine the PWM module's base operating frequency, the lower base counter is compared to the PWM base
data register value. In order to achieve higher resolutions, the extension bits of the upper counter can be used to
modulate the "stretch" cycle. To control the "stretching" of the PWM output duty cycle at specific intervals, the
extended counter value is compared with the value that you write to the module's extension bits.
13.2.3 PWM Data and Extension Registers
PWM (duty) data consist of base data bits and extension data bits; determine the output value generated by the
PWM circuit. For each PWM resolution, the location of base data bits and extension data bits are different
combination of PWM data register and PWM extension register:
•
•
•
12-bit resolution, 6-bit base + 6-bit extension:
−
Base 6 data bits: PWM0DATA.5–0, PWM1DATA.5–0
−
Extension 6 bits: PWM0EX.7–2, PWM1EX.7–2
8-bit resolution, 6-bit base + 2-bit extension:
−
Base 6 data bits: PWM0DATA.5–0, PWM0DATA.5–0
−
Extension 2 bits: PWM1EX.7–6, PWM1EX.7–6
14-bit resolution, 8-bit base + 6-bit extension:
−
Base 8 data bits: PWM0DATA.7–0, PWM0DATA.7–0
−
Extension 6 bits: PWM1EX.7–2, PWM1EX.7–2
PS031305-1017
13-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
Base 0 (for 12-bit PWM)
PWM Data Register
.6
.7
.4
.5
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
.0
LSB
Base 1 (for 8-bit PWM)
Base 2 (for 14-bit PWM)
PWM Ex. Register
.6
.7
.4
.5
.3
Ext 1 (for 8-bit PWM)
.2
.1
Base/Ext Control
Ext 0 (for 12/14-bit PWM)
PWM EX.1-.0 (base/ext control):
“x0”= 12-bit resolution: Base 0 (DATA.5-.0) + Ext 0 (EX.7-.2)
“01”= 8-bit resolution: Base 1 (DATA.5-.0) + Ext 1 (EX.7-.6)
“11”= 14-bit resolution: Base 2 (DATA.7-.0) + Ext 0 (EX.7-.2)
Reset Value = “00”(12-bit resolution selected).
Figure 13-1
PWM Data and Extension Registers
To program the required PWM output, you load the appropriate initialization values into the data registers
(PWM0DATA, PWM1DATA) and the extension registers (PWM0EX, PWM1EX). To start the PWM counter, or to
resume counting, you set the PWM counter enable bit (PWM0CON.2, PWM1CON.2) to "1".
A reset operation disables all PWM output. The current counter value is retained when the counter stops. When
the counter starts, counting resumes at the retained value.
13.2.4 PWM Clock Rate
The timing characteristic of PWM output is based on the fOSC clock frequency. The PWM counter clock value is
determined by the setting input clock setting bits: PWM0CON.6–7, PWM1CON.6–7.
Table 13-1
Register Name
PWM data registers
PWM control registers
PS031305-1017
PWM Control and Data Registers
Mnemonic
Address
PWM0DATA
PWM1DATA
F2H, Bank 0
E7H, Bank 1
PWM0EX
PWM1EX
F1H, Bank 0
E6H, Bank 1
PWM0CON
PWM1CON
F3H, Bank 0
E8H, Bank 1
Function
PWM waveform la output setting
registers.
PWM counter stop/start (resume), and
fOSC clock settings
13-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
13.2.5 PWM Function Description
The PWM output signal toggles to Low level whenever the lower base counter matches the reference value stored
in the module's data register (PWM0DATA, PWM1DATA). If the value in the data register is not zero, an overflow
of the lower counter causes the PWM output to toggle to High level. In this way, the reference value written to the
data register determines the module's base duty cycle.
The value in the extension counter is compared with the extension settings in the extension data bits. This
extension counter value, together with extension logic and the PWM module's extension bits, is then used to
"stretch" the duty cycle of the PWM output. The "stretch" value is one extra clock period at specific intervals, or
cycles (see Table 13-2).
If, for example, in 8-bit base + 6-bit extension mode, the value in the extension register is "04H", the 32nd cycle
will be one pulse longer than the other 63 cycles. If the base duty cycle is 50%, the duty of the 32nd cycle will
therefore be "stretched" to approximately 51% duty. For example, if you write 80H to the extension register, all
odd-numbered cycles will be one pulse longer. If you write FCH to the extension register, all cycles will be
stretched by one pulse except the 64th cycle. PWM output goes to an output buffer and then to the corresponding
PWM output pin. In this way, you can obtain high output resolution at high frequencies.
PS031305-1017
13-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
13.2.6 PWM Output Waveform
6-bit base + 6-bit extension mode:
Table 13-2
PWM Output "Stretch" Values for Extension Data Bits Ext1 (PWM0EX.7–2, PWM1EX.7–2)
PWM EX. Bit
"Stretched" Cycle Number
7
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, ..., 55, 57, 59, 61, 63
6
2, 6, 10, 14, ..., 50, 54, 58, 62
5
4, 12, 20, ..., 44, 52, 60
4
8, 24, 40, 56
3
16, 48
2
32
0H
PWM
Clock: 4MHz
0H
PWM
Data Register
Values:
1H
20H
40H
250ns
8 μs
3FH
Figure 13-2
PS031305-1017
80H
250ns
8 μs
250ns
PWM Basic Waveform (6-Bit Base)
13-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
0H
PWM
Clock:
PWM Data
Register
Values: 02H
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
40H
4MHz
500ns
2H
PWM Extension
1st
Register
Values: 000100 00B
(Extended
Value is 04H)
64th 1st
32th
64th
32th
40H
0H
4MHz
750ns
Figure 13-3
PS031305-1017
Extended PWM Waveform (6-Bit Base + 6-Bit Extension)
13-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
6-bit base + 2-bit extension mode:
Table 13-3
PWM Output "Stretch" Values for Extension Data Bits Ext0 (PWM0EX.7–6, PWM1EX.7–6)
PWM Ex. Bit (7-Bit 6-Bit)
"Stretched" Cycle Number
00
–
01
2
10
1, 3
11
1, 2, 3
0H
PWM
Clock: 4 MHz
40H
80H
xx000000B
250 ns
xx000001B
PWM
Data
Register
Values: xx100000B
8 us
250 ns
8 us
xx111111B
250 ns
Figure 13-4
PS031305-1017
PWM Basic Waveform (6-Bit Base)
13-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
0H
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
40H
PWM Clock: 4MHz
500 ns
PWMDATA: xx000010B
PWMEX: 0100 0001B
Extended waveform
1st
2nd 3th
0H
4th
1st
2nd 3th
4th
40H
4MHz
750 ns
Figure 13-5
PS031305-1017
Extended PWM Waveform (6-Bit Base + 2-Bit Extension)
13-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
8-bit base + 6-bit extension mode:
Table 13-4
PWM Output "Stretch" Values for Extension Data Bits Ext1 (PWM0EX.7–2, PWM1EX.7–2)
PWMEX Bit
"Stretched" Cycle Number
7
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, ..., 55, 57, 59, 61, 63
6
2, 6, 10, 14, ..., 50, 54, 58, 62
5
4, 12, 20, ..., 44, 52, 60
4
8, 24, 40, 56
3
16, 48
2
32
0H
PWM
Clock: 4MHz
0H
PWM Data
Register
Values:
1H
80H
200H
Pulse
250ns
32 μs
EFH
Figure 13-6
PS031305-1017
100H
Cycle
250ns
32 μs
250ns
PWM Basic Waveform (8-Bit Base)
13-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
0H
PWM
Clock:
PWM Data
Register
Values: 02H
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
100H
4MHz
500ns
2H
PWM Ex.
1st
Register
Values: 000100 11B
(Extended
Value is 04H)
64th 1st
32th
64th
32th
100H
0H
4MHz
750ns
Figure 13-7
PS031305-1017
PWM Basic Waveform (8-Bit Base + 6-Bit Extension)
13-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
13.3 PWM Control Register (PWM0CON/PWM1CON)
The control register for the PWM modules, PWM0CON and PWM1CON, are located at register address F3H,
Bank 0 and E8H, Bank 1. The control register (PWM0CON, PWM1CON) is used for all three PWM resolutions. Bit
settings in the register control the following functions:
•
PWM counter clock selection
•
PWM data reload interval selection
•
PWM counter clear
•
PWM counter stop/start (or resume) operation
•
PWM counter overflow (upper counter overflow) interrupt control
A reset clears all PWMCON bits to logic zero, disabling the entire PWM module.
PWM Control Registers
(PWM0CON):F3H, Bank 0, R/W, Reset: 00H
(PWM1CON):E8H, Bank 1, R/W, Reset: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
PWM input clock
selection bits:
00 = fosc/64
01 = fosc/8
10 = fosc/2
11 = fosc/1
Not Used
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
PWM extension counter OVF
Interrupt pending bit:
0 = No interrupt pending
0 = Clear pending condition
(when write)
1 = Interrupt is pending
PWM counter interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable PWM OVF interrupt
1 = Enable PWM OVF interrupt
PWM counter enable bit:
0 = Stop counter
1 = Start (resume countering)
PWMDATA reload interval selection bit:
0 = Reload from extension up counter
overflow
PWM counter clear bit:
1 = Reload from base up counter
0 = No effect
overflow
1 = Clear the PWM counter (When write)
NOTE: 3-bit is not auto-cleared. You must pay attention when
clear pending bit. (refer to page 11-12).
Figure 13-8
PS031305-1017
PWM Control Register (PWM0CON, PWM1CON)
13-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
13.4 PWM Extension Register (PWM0EX/PWM1EX)
The extension register for the PWM module, PWM0EX and PWM1EX, are located at register address F1H, Bank 0
and E6H, Bank 1. PWM extension register is used for resolution selection and extension bits of PWM waveform.
Bit settings in the PWM extension register (PWM0EX, PWM1EX) control the following functions:
•
PWM extension bits
•
PWM resolution selection
•
A reset clears all PWM extension register's to "00H", choose 6 + 2 as default resolution, no extension.
PWM Extension Registers
(PWM0EX) F1H, Bank 0, R/W, Reset: 00H
(PWM1EX) E6H, Bank 1, R/W, Reset: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
PWM Extension bits
For 6 + 2 resolution
PWM Extension bits
For 6 + 6 and 8 + 6 resolutions
.0
LSB
PWM resolution selection bits:
x0 = 12-bit PWM: 6 + 6 resolution
01 = 8-bit PWM: 6 + 2 resolution
11 = 14-bit PWM: 8 + 6 resolution
NOTE: Only one resolution mode can work at any time.
Figure 13-9
PWM Extension Register (PWM0EX, PWM0EX)
Base data for 6 + 6 resolution
PWM Data Register:
MSB
(PWM0DATA, F2H, Bank 0)
(PWM1DATA, E7H, Bank 1)
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Base data for 6 + 2 resolution
Base data for 8 + 6 resolution
Figure 13-10
PS031305-1017
PWM Data Register (PWM0DATA PWM1DATA)
13-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 13. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)
fOSC/8 fOSC
fOSC/64 fOSC/2
PWMCON.6-.7
OVFINT
From base-bit up counter
extension-bit
Counter
base-bit
Counter
PENDING
PWMCON.0
PWMCON.1
P0.6/PWM
From extension-bit up counter
MUX
PWMCON.2
"1" When base data > Counter
"0" When base data
ORG
003CH
DB
000H
; 003CH, must be initialized to 1.
DB
000H
; 003DH, must be initialized to 1.
DB
0FFH
; 003EH, Enable LVR (2.3)
DB
000H
; 003FH, External Crystal oscillator
;-------------->
VECTOR F2H, PWM0_INT
; S3F8S28/S3F8S24 interrupt vector
;-------------->
ORG
RESET:
0100H
DI
LD
; disable interrupt
BTCON, #10100011B
; Watchdog disable
LD
PWM0EX,#00000000B
; Configure PWM0 as 6-bit base +6-bit extension
LD
P0CONH,#10011010B
; Configure P0.6 PWM output
LD
PWM0CON,#00000110B
; fOSC/64, counter/interrupt enable
AND
PWM0EX,#00000011B
; set extension bits as 00(basic output)
LD
PWM0DATA,#80H
;
•
•
•
•
EI
; Enable interrupt
;-------------->
MAIN:
•
•
•
•
JR
t,MAIN
PWM0_INT:
;
; 94C4 interrupt service routine
•
•
•
AND
IRET
PWM0CON,#11110110B
; pending bit clear
;
•
•
END
PS031305-1017
13-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
14
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
A/D Converter
14.1 Overview
The 12-bit A/D converter (ADC) module uses successive approximation logic to convert analog levels entering at
one of the nine input channels to equivalent 12-bit digital values. The analog input level must lie between the VDD
and VSS values. The A/D converter has the following components:
•
Analog comparator with successive approximation logic
•
Sample and Hold circuit
•
D/A converter logic
•
ADC control register (ADCON)
•
Thirteen multiplexed analog data input pins (ADC0 to ADC12)
•
12-bit A/D conversion data output register (ADDATAH/L)
The ADC contains a Sample and Hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is held at a constant
level during conversion.
To enable and initiate an analog-to-digital conversion procedure, you write the channel selection data in the A/D
converter control register ADCON to select one of the nine analog input pins (ADCn, n = 0–12) and set the
conversion start bit, ADCON.0. The read-write ADCON register is located at address F7H.
During a normal conversion, ADC logic initially sets the successive approximation register to 800H (the
approximate half-way point of an 12-bit register). This register is then updated automatically during each
conversion step. The successive approximation block performs 12-bit conversions for one input channel at a time.
You can dynamically select different channels by manipulating the channel selection bit value (ADCON.7–4) in the
ADCON register. To start the A/D conversion, you should set the enable bit, ADCON.0. When a conversion is
completed, ACON.3, the end-of-conversion (EOC) bit is automatically set to 1 and the result is dumped into the
ADDATA register where it can be read. The A/D converter then enters an idle state. Remember to read the
contents of ADDATA before another conversion starts. Otherwise, the previous result will be overwritten by the
next conversion result.
NOTE: Normally, when a conversion is completed, the A/D converter then enters an idle state and will still work with power
consumption. For power saving, when a conversion is completed, you can set the channel selection bit value
(ADCON.7–4) to "1111B" to disable the ADC module, then the ADC module will be stopped and without any power
consumption.
PS031305-1017
14-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
14.2 Using A/D Pins for Standard digital Input
The ADC module's input pins are alternatively used as digital input in port 0, P2.6–P2.4 and P3.0–P3.1.
14.3 A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)
The A/D converter control register, ADCON, is located at address F7H. ADCON has four functions:
•
Bits 7 to 4 select an analog input pin (ADC0 to ADC12) and enable/disable ADC module meanwhile.
•
Bit 3 indicates the status of the A/D conversion.
•
Bits 2 to 1 select a conversion speed.
•
Bit 0 starts the A/D conversion.
Only one analog input channel can be selected at a time. You can dynamically select any one of the nine analog
input pins (ADC0 to ADC12) by manipulating the 4-bit value for ADCON.7 to ADCON.4.
PS031305-1017
14-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)
F7H, Bank 0, R/W; Reset Value: F0H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
A/D Conversion input pin selection bits
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
ADC0 (P0.0)
ADC1 (P0.1)
ADC2 (P0.2)
ADC3 (P0.3)
ADC4 (P0.4)
ADC5 (P0.5)
ADC6 (P0.6)
ADC7 (P0.7)
ADC8 (P2.6)
ADC9 (P2.5)
ADC10 (P2.4)
ADC11 (P3.0)
ADC12 (P3.1)
Conversion start bit:
0 = No effect
1 = A/D conversion start
Conversion speed selection bits:
00 = fOSC/16 (fOSC < 12 MHz)
01 = fOSC/12 (fOSC < 10 MHz)
10 = fOSC/8 (fOSC < 6 MHz)
11 = fOSC/4 (fOSC < 3.2MHz)
End-of-conversion (EOC) status bit:
0 = A/D conversion is in progress
Disable ADC (Power Down) 1 = A/D conversion complete
NOTE:
1. Maximum ADC clock input = 850kHz
2. When you select one ADC channel (0 to 12), the ADC module was enabled at the same time.
3. When the value of ADC input pin selection bits(7-bIt To 4-bIt) equal or larger than “1101”,
the ADC module will be stopped without any power consumption. The reset value of 7-bit to 4bit is “1111B”, that disable ADC module. When ADC is needed, you must set proper value
to 7-bit to 4-bit to enable ADC and select ADC channel according to your application system.
Figure 14-1
PS031305-1017
A/D Converter Control Register (ADCON)
14-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
14.4 Internal Reference Voltage Levels
In the ADC function block, the analog input voltage level is compared to the reference voltage. The analog input
level must remain within the range VSS to VDD.
Different reference voltage levels are generated internally along the resistor tree during the analog conversion
process for each conversion step. The reference voltage level for the first bit conversion is always 1/2VDD.
A/D Converter Control Register
ADCON (F7H, Bank 0)
ADCON.0 (ADEN)
ADCON.7-.4
ADC0/P0.0
ADC1/P0.1
ADC2/P0.2
…
ADC7/P0.7
ADC8/P2.6
ADC9/P3.0
ADC10/P3.1
ADC11/P3.2
ADC12/P3.3
Control
Circuit
Clock
Selector
ADCON.2-.1
R
M
U
L
T
I
P
L
E
X
E
R
ADCON.3
(EOC Flag)
Successive
Approximation
Circuit
+
CHold
-
Analog
Comparator
Conversion Result
VDD
D/A Converter
VSS
ADDATAH
ADDATAL
(F8H,Bank 0) (F9H, Bank 0)
To data bus
Figure 14-2
ADDATAH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
ADDATAL
MSB
-
-
-
-
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Figure 14-3
PS031304-0115
A/D Converter Circuit Diagram
A/D Converter Data Register (ADDATAH/L)
PRELIMINARY
14-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
ADCON.0
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
1
17 ADC clock
Conversion
Start
EOC
ADDATA
9
Privious
Value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ADDATAH (8-bit) + ADDATAL (4-bit)
Sample time
5 clock
Figure 14-4
PS031304-0115
8
12 clock
0
Valid
data
A/D Converter Timing Diagram
PRELIMINARY
14-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
14.5 Conversion timing
The A/D conversion process requires 1 step (1 clock edge) to convert each bit and 5 clocks to step-up A/D
conversion. Therefore, total of 17 clocks are required to complete a 12-bit conversion: With an 10MHz CPU clock
frequency, one clock cycle is 1.2s (12/fOSC). If each bit conversion requires 1 clock, the conversion rate is
calculated as follows:
•
1 clock/bit 12-bits + Sample time (5 clock) = 17 clocks
•
17 clock 1.2s = 20.4s at 10MHz, 1 clock time = 12/fOSC (assuming ADCON.2–.1 = 01)
PS031304-0115
PRELIMINARY
14-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
14.6 Internal A/D Conversion Procedure
1. Analog input must remain between the voltage range of VSS and VDD.
2. Configure the analog input pins to input mode by making the appropriate settings in P0CONH, P0CONL and
P2CONH registers.
3. Before the conversion operation starts, you must first select one of the thirteen input pins (ADC0 to ADC12)
by writing the appropriate value to the ADCON register.
4. When conversion has been completed, (17 clocks have elapsed), the EOC flag is set to "1", so that a check
can be made to verify that the conversion was successful.
5. The converted digital value is loaded to the output register, ADDATAH (8-bit) and ADDATAL (4-bit), then the
ADC module enters an idle state.
6. The digital conversion result can now be read from the ADDATAH and ADDATAL register.
VDD
XIN
Analog
Input Pin
ADC0-ADC12
XOUT
101
S3F8S28/F8S24
VSS
Figure 14-5
PS031304-0115
Recommended A/D Converter Circuit for Highest Absolute Accuracy
PRELIMINARY
14-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example 14-1
Configuring A/D Converter
ORG
003CH
DB
0FFH
; 003CH, must be initialized to 0
DB
0FFH
; 003DH, must be initialized to 0
DB
0FFH
; 003EH, enable LVR
DB
0FEH
; 003FH, external RC oscillator
VECTOR 0F6H,INT_TIMER0
ORG
RESET:
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
0100H
DI
LD
; Timer 0 interrupt vector
; disable interrupt
BTCON,#10100011B
; Watchdog disable
•
LD
P0CONH,#11111111B
; Configure P0.4–P0.7 AD input
LD
P0CONL,#11111111B
; Configure P0.0–P0.3 AD input
LD
P2CONH,#00100000B
; Configure P2.6 AD input
•
•
EI
; Enable interrupt
;-------------->
MAIN:
•
•
•
CALL
AD_CONV
; Subroutine for AD conversion
•
JR
t,MAIN
;
LD
ADCON,#00000001B
; Select analog input channel
•
•
AD_CONV:
; select conversion speed
→
→
P0.0, and enable ADC.
fOSC/16
; set conversion start bit
NOP
CONV_LOOP:
NOP
; If you select conversion speed to fOSC/16
NOP
; At least three nop must be included
TM
ADCON,#00001000B
; Check EOC flag
JR
Z,CONV_LOOP
; If EOC flag = 0, jump to CONV_LOOP until EOC flag = 1
LD
R0,ADDATAH
; High 8 bits of conversion result are stored
LD
R1,ADDATAL
LD
ADCON,#00010011B
; to ADDATAH register
; Low 4 bits of conversion result are stored
; to ADDATAL register
; Select analog input channel
; Select conversion speed
→
→
P0.1
fOSC/8
; Set conversion start bit
CONV_LOOP2:
TM
ADCON,#00001000B
JR
Z,CONV_LOOP2
LD
R2,ADDATAH
LD
R3,ADDATAL
; Check EOC flag
•
PS031304-0115
PRELIMINARY
14-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 14. A/D Converter
•
INT_TIMER0:
•
RET
;
•
; Interrupt enable bit and pending bit check
•
;
•
; Pending bit clear
IRET
;
•
•
END
PS031304-0115
PRELIMINARY
14-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
15
Chapter 15. UART
UART
15.1 Overview
The UART block has a full-duplex serial port with programmable operating modes: There is one synchronous
mode and three UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) modes:
•
Shift Register I/O with baud rate of fxx/(16 (8-bit BRDATA + 1))
•
8-bit UART Mode; variable baud rate, fxx/(16 (8-bit BRDATA + 1))
•
9-bit UART Mode; fxx/16
•
9-bit UART Mode; variable baud rate, fxx/(16 (8-bit BRDATA + 1))
UART receive and transmit buffers are both accessed via the data register, UDATA, is at address F8H, Set 1,
Bank 1. Writing to the UART data register loads the transmit buffer; reading the UART data register accesses a
physically separate receive buffer.
When accessing a receive data buffer (shift register), reception of the next byte can begin before the previously
received byte has been read from the receive register. However, if the first byte has not been read by the time the
next byte has been completely received, the first data byte will be lost (Overrun error).
In all operating modes, transmission is started when any instruction (usually a write operation) uses the UDATA
register as its destination address. In mode 0, serial data reception starts when the receive interrupt pending bit
(UARTPND.1) is "0" and the receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) is "1". In mode 1 and 2, reception starts whenever
an incoming start bit ("0") is received and the receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) is set to "1".
15.1.1 Programming Procedure
To program the UART modules, follow these basic steps:
1. Configure P2.2 and P2.3 to alternative function (RxD (P2.2), TxD (P2.3)) for UART module by setting the
P2CONL register to appropriately value.
2. Load an 8-bit value to the UARTCON control register to properly configure the UART I/O module.
3. For interrupt generation, set the UART interrupt enable bit (UARTCON.1 or UARTCON.0) to "1".
4. When you transmit data to the UART buffer, write transmit data to UDATA, the shift operation starts.
5. When the shift operation (transmit/receive) is completed, UART pending bit (UARTPND.1 or UARTPND.0) is
set to "1" and an UART interrupt request is generated
•
PS031305-1017
15-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.1.2 UART Control Register (UARTCON)
The control register for the UART is called UARTCON at address F5H, Set1 Bank1. It has the following control
functions:
•
Operating mode and baud rate selection
•
Multiprocessor communication and interrupt control
•
Serial receive enable/disable control
•
9th data bit location for transmit and receive operations (mode 2)
•
UART transmit and receive interrupt control
A reset clears the UARTCON value to "00H". So, if you want to use UART module, you must write appropriate
value to UARTCON.
UART Control Register (UARTCON)
F5H, Set1, Bank1, R/W, Reset Value: 00H
MSB MS1
MS0
MCE
RE
TB8
RB8
Operating mode and
baud rate selection bits
(see table below)
RIE
TIE
LSB
Transmit interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Multiprocessor communication(1)
enable bit (for modes 2 and 3 only):
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Received interrupt enable bit:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Serial data receive enable bit:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Location of the 9th data bit that was
received in UART mode 2 or 3 ("0" or "1")
Location of the 9th data bit to be
transmitted in UART mode 2 or 3 ("0" or "1")
MS1 MS0 Mode Description(2) Baud Rate
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
Shift register fxx/(16 x (BRDATA +1))
8-bit UART fxx/(16 x (BRDATA +1))
9-bit UART fxx/16
9-bit UART fxx/(16 x (BRDATA +1))
NOTES:
1.
In mode 2 or 3, if the UARTCON.5 bit is set to "1" then the receive interrupt will not be
activated if the received 9th data bit is "0". In mode 1, if UARTCON.5 = "1" then the
receive interrut will not be activated if a valid stop bit was not received.
In mode 0, the UARTCON.5 bit should be "0"
2. The descriptions for 8-bit and 9-bit UART mode do not include start and stop bits
for serial data receive and transmit.
Figure 15-1
PS031305-1017
UART Control Register (UARTCON)
15-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.1.3 UART Interrupt Pending Register (UARTPND)
The UART interrupt pending register, UARTPND is located at address F6H, Set1 Bank1. It contains the UART
data transmit interrupt pending bit (UARTPND.0) and the receive interrupt pending bit (UARTPND.1).
In mode 0 of the UART module, the receive interrupt pending flag UARTPND.1 is set to "1" when the 8th receive
data bit has been shifted. In mode 1 or 2, the UARTPND.1 bit is set to "1" at the halfway point of the stop bit's shift
time. When the CPU has acknowledged the receive interrupt pending condition, the UARTPND.1 flag must be
cleared by software in the interrupt service routine.
In mode 0 of the UART module, the transmit interrupt pending flag UARTPND.0 is set to "1" when the 8th transmit
data bit has been shifted. In mode 1 or 2, the UARTPND.0 bit is set at the start of the stop bit. When the CPU has
acknowledged the transmit interrupt pending condition, the UARTPND.0 flag must be cleared by software in the
interrupt service routine.
UART Pending Register (UARTPND)
F6H, Set1, Bank1, R/W, Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
Not used
.3
.2
RIP
TIP
LSB
UART transmit interrupt pending flag:
0 = Not pending
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt pending
UART receive interrupt pending flag:
0 = Not pending
0 = Clear pending bit (when write)
1 = Interrupt pending
NOTES:
1.
In order to clear a data transmit or receive interrupt pending
flag, you must write a "0" to the appropriate pending bit.
2.
To avoid errors, we recommend using load instruction
(except for LDB), when manipulating UARTPND values.
Figure 15-2
PS031305-1017
UART Interrupt Pending Register (UARTPND)
15-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.1.4 UART Data Register (UDATA)
UART Data Register (UDATA)
F8H, Set1, Bank1, R/W, Reset Value: Undefined
MSB
.7
.6
.4
.5
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Transmit or Receive data
Figure 15-3
UART Data Register (UDATA)
15.1.5 UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA)
The value stored in the UART baud rate register, (BRDATA), lets you determine the UART clock rate (baud rate).
UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA)
F7H, Set1, Bank1, R/W, Reset Value: FFH
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Brud rate data
Figure 15-4
PS031305-1017
UART Baud Rate Data Register (BRDATA)
15-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.1.6 Baud Rate Calculations
The baud rate is determined by the baud rate data register, 8-bit BRDATA
•
Mode 0 baud rate = fxx/(16 (8-bit BRDATA + 1))
•
Mode 1 baud rate = fxx/(16 (8-bit BRDATA + 1))
•
Mode 2 baud rate = fxx/16
•
Mode 3 baud rate = fxx/(16 (8-bit BRDATA + 1))
Table 15-1
Commonly Used Baud Rates Generated by 8-Bit BRDATA
Mode
Baud Rate
Oscillation Clock
Mode 2
0.5MHz
Mode 0
BRDATA
Decimal
Hex
8MHz
x
x
62,500Hz
10MHz
09
09H
Mode 1
9,615Hz
10MHz
64
40H
Mode 3
38,461Hz
8MHz
12
0CH
–
12,500Hz
8MHz
39
27H
–
19,230Hz
4MHz
12
0CH
–
9,615Hz
4MHz
25
19H
PS031305-1017
15-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.2 Block Diagram
SAM8 Internal Data Bus
TB8
fxx
MS0
MS1
8 BIT
BRDATA
S
D
Q
CLK
Baud Rate
Generator
Write to
UDATA
UDATA
CLK
Zero Detector
MS0
MS1
TxD (P2.3)
Shift
Start
Tx Control
Tx Clock
RxD (P2.2)
EN
Send
TIP
TxD (P2.3)
TIE
Interrupt
RIE
Rx
Clock
RE
RIE
1-to-0
Transition
Detector
Shift
Clock
RIP
Receive
Rx Control
Shift
Start
Shift
Value
Bit Detector
Shift
Register
MS0
MS1
UDATA
RxD (P2.2)
SAM8 Internal Data Bus
Figure 15-5
PS031305-1017
UART Functional Block Diagram
15-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.2.1 UART Mode 0 Function Description
In mode 0, UART is input and output through the RxD (P2.2) pin and TxD (P2.3) pin outputs the shift clock. Data is
transmitted or received in 8-bit units only. The LSB of the 8-bit value is transmitted (or received) first.
15.2.1.1 Mode 0 Transmit Procedure
1. Select mode 0 by setting UARTCON.6 and .7 to "00B".
2. Write transmission data to the shift register UDATA (F8H, set1, bank 1) to start the transmission operation.
15.2.1.2 Mode 0 Receive Procedure
1. Select mode 0 by setting UARTCON.6 and .7 to "00B".
2. Clear the receive interrupt pending bit (UARTPND.1) by writing a "0" to UARTPND.1.
3
Set the UART receive enable bit (UARTCON.4) to "1".
4
The shift clock will now be output to the TxD (P2.3) pin and will read the data at the RxD (P2.2) pin. A UART
receive interrupt (vector FAH) occurs when UARTCON.1 is set to "1".
Write to Shift Register (UDATA)
RxD (Data Out)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
Transmit
Shift
D7
TxD (Shift Clock)
TIP
Write to UARTPND (Clear RIP and set RE)
RIP
Receive
RE
Shift
D0
RxD (Data In)
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
TxD (Shift Clock)
1
2
Figure 15-6
PS031305-1017
3
4
5
6
7
8
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 0 Operation
15-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.2.2 UART Mode 1 Function Description
In mode 1, 10 bits are transmitted (through the TxD (P2.3) pin) or received (through the RxD (P2.2) pin). Each
data frame has three components:
•
Start bit ("0")
•
8 data bits (LSB first)
•
Stop bit ("1")
When receiving, the stop bit is written to the RB8 bit in the UARTCON register. The baud rate for mode 1 is
variable.
15.2.2.1 Mode 1 Transmit Procedure
1. Select the baud rate generated by 8-bit BRDATA.
2. Select mode 1 (8-bit UART) by setting UARTCON bits 7 and 6 to "01B".
3. Write transmission data to the shift register UDATA (F8H, Set1, and Bank 1). The start and stop bits are
generated automatically by hardware.
15.2.2.2 Mode 1 Receive Procedure
1. Select the baud rate to be generated by 8-bit BRDATA.
2. Select mode 1 and set the RE (Receive Enable) bit in the UARTCON register to "1".
3. The start bit low ("0") condition at the RxD (P2.2) pin will cause the UART module to start the serial data
receive operation.
Tx
Clock
Shift
TxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Start Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
Start Bit
Stop Bit
Transmit
Write to Shift Register (UDATA)
TIP
Rx
Clock
RxD
D7
Stop Bit
Receive
Bit Detect Sample Time
Shift
RIP
Figure 15-7
PS031305-1017
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 1 Operation
15-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.2.3 UART Mode 2 Function Description
In mode 2, 11-bit are transmitted through the TxD pin or received through the RxD pin. In mode 2, the baud rate is
fixed at fxx/16.
Each data frame has three components:
•
Start bit ("0")
•
8 data bits (LSB first)
•
Programmable 9th data bit
•
Stop bit ("1")
The 9th data bit to be transmitted can be assigned a value of "0" or "1" by writing the TB8 bit (UARTCON0.3).
When receiving, the 9th data bit that is received is written to the RB8 bit (UARTCON0.2), while the stop bit is
ignored. The baud rate for mode 2 is fOSC/16 clock frequency.
15.2.3.1 Mode 2 Transmit Procedure
1. Select mode 2 (9-bit UART0) by setting UARTCON bits 6 and 7 to "10B". Also, select the 9th data bit to be
transmitted by writing TB8 to "0" or "1".
2. Write transmission data to the shift register, UDATA (F8H, Set1, Bank 1), to start the transmit operation.
15.2.3.2 Mode 2 Receive Procedure
1. Select mode 2 and set the receive enable bit (RE) in the UARTCON register to "1".
2. The receive operation starts when the signal at the RxD pin goes to low level.
Tx
Clock
Write to Shift Register (UARTDATA)
TxD
Start Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
TIP
D7
Transmit
Shift
Stop Bit
TB8 or Parity bit
RB8 or Parity bit
Rx
Clock
RxD
Start Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop
Bit
Receive
Bit Detect Sample Time
Shift
RIP
Figure 15-8
PS031305-1017
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 2 Operation
15-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.2.4 UART Mode 3 Function Description
In mode 3, 11 bits are transmitted (through the TxD) or received (through the RxD). Mode 3 is identical to mode 2
but can be configured to variable baud rate. Each data frame has four components:
•
Start bit ("0")
•
8 data bits (LSB first)
•
Programmable 9th data bit
•
Stop bit ("1")
15.2.4.1 Mode 3 Transmit Procedure
1. Select the baud rate generated by setting BRDATA.
2. Select mode 3 (9-bit UART) by setting UARTCON bits 6 and 7 to "11B". Also, select the 9th data bit to be
transmitted by writing TB8 to "0" or "1"
3. Write transmission data to the shift register, UDATA (F8H, Set 1, Bank 1), to start the transmit operation.
15.2.4.2 Mode 3 Receive Procedure
1. Select the baud rate to be generated by setting BRDATA.
2. Select mode 3 and set the receive enable bit (RE) in the UARTCON register to "1".
3. The receive operation starts when the signal at the RxD pin goes to low level.
Tx
Clock
Shift
TxD
Start Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
TIP
D7
Stop Bit
Transmit
Write to Shift Register (UARTDATA)
TB8 or Parity bit
RB8 or Parity bit
Rx
Clock
RxD
Start Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop
Bit
Receive
Bit Detect Sample Time
Shift
RIP
Figure 15-9
PS031305-1017
Timing Diagram for UART Mode 3 Operation
15-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
15.2.5 Serial Communication for Multiprocessor Configurations
The S3F8 Series multiprocessor communication features let a "master" S3F8S28/S3F8S24 send a multiple-frame
serial message to a "slave" device in a multi S3F8S28/S3F8S24 configuration. It does this without interrupting
other slave devices that may be on the same serial line.
This feature can be used only in UART Mode 2 or 3 with the parity disable mode. In mode 2 and 3, 9 data bits are
received. The 9th bit value is written to RB8 (UARTCON.2). The data receive operation is concluded with a stop
bit. You can program this function so that when the stop bit is received, the serial interrupt will be generated only if
RB8 = "1".
To enable this feature, you set the MCE bit in the UARTCON registers. When the MCE bit is "1", serial data
frames that are received with the 9th bit = "0" do not generate an interrupt. In this case, the 9th bit simply
separates the address from the serial data.
15.2.5.1 Sample Protocol for Master/Slave Interaction
When the master device wants to transmit a block of data to one of several slaves on a serial line, it first sends out
an address byte to identify the target slave. Note that in this case, an address byte differs from a data byte: In an
address byte, the 9th bit is "1" and in a data byte, it is "0".
The address byte interrupts all slaves so that each slave can examine the received byte and see if it is being
addressed. The addressed slave then clears its MCE bit and prepares to receive incoming data bytes.
The MCE bits of slaves that were not addressed remain set, and they continue operating normally while ignoring
the incoming data bytes.
While the MCE bit setting has no effect in mode 0, it can be used in mode 1 to check the validity of the stop bit.
For mode 1 reception, if MCE is "1", the receive interrupt will be issue unless a valid stop bit is received.
15.2.5.2 Setup Procedure for Multiprocessor Communications
Follow these steps to configure multiprocessor communications:
1. Set all S3F8S28/S3F8S24 devices (masters and slaves) to UART Mode 2 or 3
2. Write the MCE bit of all the slave devices to "1".
3. The master device's transmission protocol is:
– First byte: the address identifying the target slave device (9th bit = "1")
– Next bytes: data (9th bit = "0")
4. When the target slave receives the first byte, all of the slaves are interrupted because the 9th data bit is "1".
The targeted slave compares the address byte to its own address and then clears its MCE bit in order to
receive incoming data. The other slaves continue operating normally.
PS031305-1017
15-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 15. UART
Full-Duplex Multi-S3F8S24 Interconnect
TxD
RxD
TxD
RxD
TxD
Master
Slave 1
Slave 2
S3F8S28/F8S24
S3F8S28/F8S24
S3F8S28/F8S24
Figure 15-10
PS031305-1017
TxD
RxD
...
RxD
Slave n
S3F8S28/F8S24
Connection Example for Multiprocessor Serial Data Communications
15-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
16
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
IIC Bus Interface
16.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontrollers support a multi-master IIC-bus serial interface. A dedicated serial data
line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL) carry information between bus masters and peripheral devices which are
connected to the IIC-bus. The SDA and SCL lines are bi-directional.
In multi-master IIC-bus mode, multiple S3F8S28/S3F8S24 microcontrollers can receive or transmit serial data to
or from slave devices. The master S3F8S28/S3F8S24 which initiates a data transfer over the IIC-bus is
responsible for terminating the transfer. Standard bus arbitration functions are supported.
To control multi-master IIC-bus operations, you write values to the following registers:
•
IIC-bus control register, ICCR
•
IIC-bus control/status register, ICSR
•
IIC-bus Tx/Rx data shift register, IDSR
•
IIC-bus address register, IAR
When the IIC-bus is free, the SDA and SCL lines are both at High level. A High-to-Low transition of SDA initiates a
Start condition. A Low-to-High transition of SDA while SCL remains steady at High level initiates a Stop condition.
Start and Stop conditions are always generated by the bus master. A 7-bit address value in the first data byte that
is put onto the bus after the Start condition is initiated determines which slave device the bus master selects. The
8th bit determines the direction of the transfer (read or write).
Every data byte that is put onto the SDA line must total eight bits. The number of bytes which can be sent or
received per bus transfer operation is unlimited. Data is always sent most-significant bit (MSB) first and every byte
must be immediately followed by an acknowledge (ACK) bit.
PS031305-1017
16-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.1.1 Multi-Master IIC Bus Control Register (ICCR)
The multi-master IIC-bus control register, ICCR, is located at address F0H, bank 1. It is read/write addressable.
ICCR settings control the following IIC-bus functions:
•
CPU acknowledge signal (ACK) enable or suppress
•
IIC-bus clock source selection (fOSC/16 or fOSC/512)
•
Transmit/receive interrupt enable or disable
•
Transmit/receive interrupt pending control
•
4-bit prescaler for the serial transmit clock (SCL)
In the S3F8S28/S3F8S24 interrupt structure, the IIC-bus Tx/Rx interrupt is assigned level IRQ6, vector E0H. To
enable this interrupt, you set ICCR.5 to "1". Program software can then poll the IIC-bus Tx/Rx interrupt pending bit
(ICCR.4) to detect IIC-bus receive or transmit requests. When the CPU acknowledges the interrupt request from
the IIC-bus, the interrupt service routine must clear the interrupt pending condition by writing a "0" to ICCR.4.
The SCL frequency is determined by the IIC-bus clock source selection (fOSC/16 or fOSC/512) and the 4-bit
prescaler value in the ICCR register (see Figure 16-1).
IIC Control Register(ICCR)
F0H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
Acknowledgement Enable Bit:
0 = Acknowledgement disable mode
1 = Acknowledgement enable mode
Tx Clock Selection Bit:
0 = fosc/16
1 = fosc/512
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
IIC-bus transmit (Tx) clock prescaler:
The IIC-bus transmit clock (SCLK) frequency is
determined by the clock source selection (ICCR.6)
and this 4-bit prescaler value, according to the
following formula:
Tx clock (SCL) = IICLK/(ICCR.3-ICCR.0) + 1
where IICLK = fosc/16 (ICCR.6 = "0") or
IICLK = fosc /512 (ICCR.6 = "1")
IIC-Bus Tx/Rx Interrupt
Enable Bit:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
IIC Interrupt Pending Bit:
0 = Interrupt request is not pending; (when read)
pending bit clear when write 0
1 = Interrupt request is pending (when read)
NOTE: A IIC-bus interrupt occurs
1. When a 1-byte transmit or receive operation is terminated
2. When a general call or a slave address match occurs, or
3. If bus arbitration fails.
Figure 16-1
PS031305-1017
Multi-Master IIC Bus Control Register (ICCR)
16-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 16-1
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
Sample Timing Calculations for the IIC Bus Transmit Clock (SCL)
ICCR.3–ICCR.0 Value
IICLK (ICCR.3–ICCR.0,
Settings + 1)
(fOSC = 8MHz)
ICCR.6 = 0 (fOSC/16)
IICLK = 500kHz
(fOSC = 8MHz)
ICCR.6 = 1 (fOSC/512)
IICLK = 15.625kHz
0000
IICLK/1
400kHz (Note)
15.625kHz
0001
IICLK/2
250kHz
7.1825kHz
0010
IICLK/3
16.7kHz
5.2038kHz
0011
IICLK/4
125kHz
3.9063kHz
0100
IICLK/5
100kHz
3.1250kHz
0101
IICLK/6
83.3kHz
2.6042kHz
0110
IICLK/7
71.4kHz
2.2321kHz
0111
IICLK/8
62.5kHz
1.9531kHz
1000
IICLK/9
55.6kHz
1.7361kHz
1001
IICLK/10
50kHz
1.5625kHz
1010
IICLK/11
45.5kHz
1.4205kHz
1011
IICLK/12
41.7kHz
1.3021kHz
1100
IICLK/13
38.5kHz
1.2019kHz
1101
IICLK/14
35.7kHz
1.1160kHz
1110
IICLK/15
33.3kHz
1.0417kHz
1111
IICLK/16
31.25kHz
0.9766kHz
NOTE: Max. IICLK = 400kHz.
PS031305-1017
16-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.1.2 Multi-Master IIC Bus Control/Status Register (ICSR)
The multi-master IIC-bus control/status register, ICSR, is located at address F1H, BANK1. Four bits in this
register, ICSR.3 to ICSR.0, are read-only status flags.
ICSR register settings are used to control or monitor the following IIC-bus functions (see Figure 16-2):
•
Master/slave transmit or receive mode selection
•
IIC-bus busy status flag
•
Serial output enable/disable
•
Failed bus arbitration procedure status flag
•
Slave address/address register match or general call received status flag
•
Slave address 00000000B (general call) received status flag
•
Last received bit status flag (not ACK = "1", ACK = "0")
MULTI-MASTER IIC-BUS CONTROL/STATUS REGISTERS (ICSR)
F1H, Set 1, Bank 1, R/W (Bit 3-0: read-only)
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
IIC-Bus Master/Slave Tx/Rx Mode
Selection Bits::
00 = Slave receiver mode (Default mode)
01 = Slave transmitter mode
10 = Master receiver mode
11 = Master transmitter mode
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
IIC-bus last-received bit status flag:
0 = Last-received bit is "0" (ACK was received)
1 = Last-received bit is "1" (ACK wsa not received)
IIC-bus address zero status flag:
0 = START/STOP condition was generated
1 = Received slave address is
"00000000B" (general call)
IIC-bus address-as-slave status flag:
0 = START/STOP condition was generated
1 = Received slave address matches
the address value in the IAR
IIC-bus arbitration procedure status flag:
0 = Bus arbitration status okay
IIC-bus serial output
1 = Bus arbitration failed during serial I/O
enable/disable bit:
0 = Disable serial Tx/Rx
1 = Enable serial Tx/Rx
IIC-bus busy signal status bit:
0 = IIC-bus not busy (when read),
IIC interface STOP signal
generation (when write)
1 = IIC-bus is busy (when read),
IIC interface START signal
generation (when write)
NOTE: ICSR.3 is automatically set to "1" when a bus arbitration procedure fails over serial I/O
interface, while the IIC-bus is set to "master transmit mode" (ICSR.7 and ICSR.6 = "11B").
If slave transmit or receive mode is selected, ICSR.3 is automatically set to "1" if data is
written to the shift register (IDSR) when the busy signal bit, ICSR.5 is "1".
Figure 16-2
PS031305-1017
Multi-Master IIC Bus Control/Status Register (ICSR)
16-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.1.3 Multi-Master IIC Bus Transmit/Receive Data Shift Register (IDSR)
The IIC-bus data shift register, IDSR, is located at address F2H, Bank 1. In a transmit operation, data that is
written to the IDSR is transmitted serially, MSB first. (For receive operations, the input data is written into the IDSR
register LSB first.)
The ICSR.4 setting enables or disables serial transmit/receive operations. When ICSR.4 = "1", data can be written
to the shift register. The IIC-bus shift register can, however, be read at any time, regardless of the current ICSR.4
setting.
MULTI-MASTER IIC-BUS Tx/Rx DATA SHIFT REGISTERS (IDSR)
F2H,Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
8-bit data shift register for IIC-bus Tx/Rx operations:
When ICSR.4 = "1", IDSR is write-enabled. You can
read the IDSR value at any time, regardless of the
current ICSR.4 setting.
Figure 16-3
PS031305-1017
Multi-Master IIC Bus Tx/Rx Data Shift Register (IDSR)
16-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.1.4 Multi-Master IIC Bus Address Register (IAR)
The address register for the IIC-bus interface, IAR, is located at address F3H, Bank 1. It is used to store a latched
7-bit slave address. This address is mapped to IAR.7 to IAR.1; bit 0 is not used (see Figure 16-4).
The latched slave address is compared to the next received slave address. If a match condition is detected, and if
the latched value is 00000000B, a general call status is detected.
MULTI-MASTER IIC-BUS ADDRESS REGISTERS (IAR)
F3H,Set 1, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used for the
S3F8S28/F8S24
7-bit slave address, latch from the IIC-bus:
When ICSR.4 = "1", IAR is write-enabled. You can
read the IAR value at any time, regardless of the
current ICSR.4 setting.
NOTE: IAR must be written before ICSR.
Figure 16-4
PS031305-1017
Multi-Master IIC Bus Address Register (IAR)
16-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.2 Block Diagram
Address Register
(IAR)
Comparator
IIC-Bus Control Logic
SCL
ICCR ICSR
Shift Register
(IDSR)
IRQ6
SDA
8
Data Bus
NOTE: The IIC-bus interrupt (IRQ6) is generated when a 1byte receive or
transmit operation is terminated before the shift operation has
been completed.
Figure 16-5
PS031305-1017
IIC Bus Block Diagram
16-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.3 The IIC Bus Interface
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 IIC-bus interface has four operating modes:
•
Master transmitter mode
•
Master receive mode
•
Slave transmitter mode
•
Slave receive mode
Functional relationships between these operating modes are described below.
16.4 Start and Stop Conditions
When the IIC-bus interface is inactive, it is in slave mode. The interface is therefore always in slave mode when a
start condition is detected on the SDA line. (A start condition is a High-to-Low transition of the SDA line while the
clock signal, SCL, is high level.) When the interface enters master mode, it initiates a data transfer and generates
the SCL signal.
A start condition initiates a one-byte serial data transfer over the SDA line and a stop condition ends the transfer.
(A stop condition is a Low-to-High transition of the SDA line while SCL is High level.) Start and stop conditions are
always generated by the master. The IIC-bus is "busy" when a start condition is generated. A few clocks after a
stop condition is generated, the IIC-bus is again "free".
When a master initiates a start condition, it sends its slave address onto the bus. The address byte consists of a 7bit address and a 1-bit transfer direction indicator (that is, write or read). If bit 8 is "0", a transmit operation (write)
is indicated; if bit 8 is "1", a request for data (read) is indicated.
The master ends the indicated transfer operation by transmitting a stop condition. If the master wants to continue
sending data over the bus, it can generate another slave address and another start condition. In this way, read
write operations can be performed in various formats.
SCL
SDA
START
Condition
STOP
Condition
Figure 16-6
PS031305-1017
Start and Stop Conditions
16-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
SCL
Data must
remain stable
while clock is
HIGH
Change of
data allowed
Data must
remain stable
while clock is
HIGH
SDA
Start
condition
hold time
Figure 16-7
1
SCL
2
Stop
condition
setup
Start
condition
hold time
Input Data Protocol
1
9
2
SDA
Acknowledgement low
High or low state is possible
according to data.
If stop signal is not generated in
interval A, next clock is generated.
Interrupt
pending bit
set point
Interrupt
pending bit
clear point
NOTE: In IIC operation, interrupt pending information is indispensable, therefore it
Is not possible to control IIC operation only in Main routine without interrupt.
Figure 16-8
PS031305-1017
Interrupt Pending Information
16-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.5 Data Transfer Formats
Every byte put on the SDA line must be eight bits in length. The number of bytes which can be transmitted per
transfer is unlimited. The first byte following a start condition is the address byte. This address byte is transmitted
by the master when the IIC-bus is operating in master mode. Each byte must be followed by an acknowledge
(ACK) bit. Serial data and addresses are always sent MSB first.
Single Byte Write Mode Format
S
Slave
Address
W
A
DATA
A
P
Data Transferred (Data + Acknowledge)
"0" (write)
Multigle Byte Write Mode Format
S
Slave
Address
W
A
Sub
Address
A
R
A
P
Auto Increment of Sub Address
Single Byte Read Mode Format
S
DATA
Data Transferred (Data n + Acknowledge)
"0" (write)
Slave
Address
DATA A
A
DATA
A
P
Data Transferred (Data + Acknowledge)
"1" (read)
Multigle Byte Read Mode Format
S
Slave
Address
R
A
Sub
Address
S
Slave
Address R
A DATA
A
DATA
A
P
Data Transferred (Data n + Acknowledge)
"1" (read)
NOTE:
1. S: start, A: acknowledge, P: stop
2. The "Sub Address" indicates the internal address of the slave device.
Figure 16-9
PS031305-1017
IIC Bus Interface Data Formats
16-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.6 ACK Signal Transmission
To complete a one-byte transfer operation, the receiver must send an ACK bit to the transmitter. The ACK pulse
occurs at the ninth clock of the SCL line (eight clocks are required to complete the one-byte transfer). The clock
pulse required for the transmission of the ACK bit is always generated by the master.
The transmitter releases the SDA line (that is, it sends the SDA line High) when the ACK clock pulse is received.
The receiver must drive the SDA line Low during the ACK clock pulse so that SDA is Low during the High period of
the ninth SCL pulse.
The ACK bit transmit function can be enabled and disabled by software (ICCR.7). However, the ACK pulse on the
ninth clock of SCL is required to complete a one-byte data transfer operation.
1
SCLK
from
Master
8
9
Start Condition
Data Output
from
Transmitter
Clock to output
Data Output
from
Receiver
ACK
Figure 16-10
PS031305-1017
Clock to output
Acknowledge Response from Receiver
16-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
Slave address transmission
with write condition
Main
routine
Start signal generation
No
ACK?
Yes
Sub address of slave
transmission
No
ACK?
Interrupt
routine
Yes
Transmit data
No
ACK?
Stop signal generation
Figure 16-11
PS031305-1017
Write Operation Sequence
16-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
Slave address transmission
with write condition
Main
routine
Start signal generation
No
ACK?
Yes
Sub address of slave
transmission
No
ACK?
Interrupt
routine
Yes
Slave address transmission
with read condition
No
ACK?
Yes
Transmit data
No
ACK?
Stop signal generation
Figure 16-12
PS031305-1017
Read Operation Sequence
16-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 16. IIC Bus Interface
16.7 Read/Write Operations
When operating in transmitter mode, the IIC-bus interface interrupt routine waits for the master (the
S3F8S28/S3F8S24) to write a data byte into the IIC-bus data shift register (IDSR). To do this, it holds the SCL line
Low prior to transmission.
In receive mode, the IIC-bus interface waits for the master to read the byte from the IIC-bus data shift register
(IDSR). It does this by holding the SCL line Low following the complete reception of a data byte.
16.8 Bus Arbitration Procedures
Arbitration takes place on the SDA line to prevent contention on the bus between two masters. If a master with a
SDA High level detects another master with an SDA active Low level, it will not initiate a data transfer because the
current level on the bus does not correspond to its own. The master which loses the arbitration can generate SCL
pulses only until the end of the last-transmitted data byte. The arbitration procedure can continue while data
continues to be transferred over the bus.
The first stage of arbitration is the comparison of address bits. If a master loses the arbitration during the
addressing stage of a data transfer, it is possible that the master which won the arbitration is attempting to address
the master which lost. In this case, the losing master must immediately switch to slave receiver mode.
16.9 Abort Conditions
If a slave receiver does not acknowledge the slave address, it must hold the level of the SDA line High. This
signals the master to generate a stop condition and to abort the transfer.
If a master receiver is involved in the aborted transfer, it must also signal the end of the slave transmit operation. It
does this by not generating an ACK after the last data byte received from the slave. The slave transmitter must
then release the SDA to allow a master to generate a stop condition.
16.10 Configuring the IIC-Bus
To control the frequency of the serial clock (SCL), you program the 4-bit prescaler value in the ICCR register. The
IIC-bus interface address is stored in IIC-bus address register, IAR. (By default, the IIC-bus interface address is an
unknown value).
PS031305-1017
16-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
17
Chapter 17. Low Voltage Detector
Low Voltage Detector
17.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 micro-controller has a built-in LVD (Low Voltage Detector) circuit which allows detection
of power voltage drop to generate flag:
•
Generate flag when VDD less than one selected level from 4.1, 3.2, 2.5 or 2.1V
Low voltage detector circuits have following functional components:
•
Enable or disable LVD module
•
LVD Flag when detector setting level.
Turning the LVD operation on and off can be controlled by software. Because the IC consumes a large amount of
current during LVD operation, it is recommended that the LVD operation should be kept OFF unless it is
necessary.
Also the LVD criteria voltage can be set by the software. The LVD flag criteria voltage can be set by matching to
one of the 4 kinds of voltage 2.1V, 2.5V, 3.2V,4.1V (VDD reference voltage).
The LVD block works only when LVDCON.7 is set. If VDD level is lower than the reference voltage selected with
LVDCON.1-0, LVDCON.5 will be set. If VDD level is higher, LVDCON.5 will be cleared.
PS031305-1017
17-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 17. Low Voltage Detector
17.2 Low Voltage Detector Control Register (LVDCON)
You use the Low Voltage Detector control register, LVDCON, to
•
Enable low voltage detector circuit
•
Check LVD flag
•
Set low voltage detector flag level
LVDCON is located at address F4H, Set1, Bank 1, and is read/write addressable using register addressing mode.
A reset clears LVDCON to "00H". This disable Low Voltage Detector Circuit, set Low voltage detector level as
4.1V.
You can disable LVD at any time during normal operation by writing a "0" to LVDCON.7 for lower power
consumption. Write specific value to LVDCON.1–0 to select LVD flag level.
To check a voltage detector result the application program should poll the Flag bit LVDCON.5. When a "1" is
detected, VDD level has drop below LVD level.
Low Voltage Detector Control Register (LVDCON)
F4H, Set 1, BANK 1, R/W; Reset Value: 00H
MSB
.7
.6
.5
Not used
LVD operation enable bit
0 = Operation off
1 = Operation on
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Not used
LVD Flag Level:
00 = 4.1 V
01 = 3.2 V
10 = 2.5 V
11 = 2.1 V
Not used (Must be kept as “0”)
LVD detector Flag bit (read only)
0 = VDD is higher than reference voltage
1 = VDD is lower than reference voltage
Figure 17-1
PS031305-1017
LVD Control Register (LVDCON)
17-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 17. Low Voltage Detector
VDD Pin
Low Voltage
Detector
LVDCON.5
Flag
LVD out
LVDCON.7
LVD run
Flag
Voltage Level Setting
LVDCON.1 to
LVDCON.0
Set the Flag level
Figure 17-2
PS031305-1017
Block Diagram for Low Voltage Detector
17-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 17. Low Voltage Detector
17.3 Voltage (VDD) Level Detection Sequence-LVD Usage
•
STEP 0: Don’t make LVD on in normal conditions for small current consumption.
•
STEP 1: For initializing analog comparator, write #80h to LVDCON. (Comparator initialization, LVD enable)
•
STEP 2: Write value to reference voltage setting bits in LVDCON. (Voltage setting, LVD enable)
•
STEP 3: Wait 10 to 20usec for comparator operation time (Wait compare time)
•
STEP 4: Check result by loading voltage level set bit in LVDCON. (Check result)
•
STEP 5: For another measurement, repeat above steps.
Example 17-1
LVD Using Method
LD
LVDCON, #80H
; Comparator initialization, LVD enable (STEP 1)
LD
LVDCON, #10000011B
; 2.1V detection voltage setting, LVD enable (STEP 2)
NOP
NOP
NOP
•
; Wait 10 to 20usec (STEP 3)
•
•
LD
R0, LVDCON
; Load LVDCON to R0 (STEP 4)
TM
R0, #00010000B
; Check bit 5 of R0. If bit 5 is "H", VDD is lower than 2.1V.
JP
NZ, LOW_VDD
; If not zero (bit 5 is "H"), jump to "LOW_VDD" routine.
LOW_VDD:
; Take action when Low VDD detected.
•
•
•
PS031305-1017
17-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
18
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
Embedded Flash Memory Interface
18.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 has an on-chip Flash memory internally instead of masked ROM. The Flash memory is
accessed by instruction "LDC". This is a sector erasable and a byte programmable Flash. User can program the
data in a Flash memory area any time you want. The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 embedded 8K / 4Kbyte memory has two
operating features as below:
•
Tool Program Mode: Refer to the chapter 18. S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Flash MCU
•
User Program Mode
18.1.1 Flash ROM Configuration
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Flash memory consists of 64 sectors. Each sector consists of 128bytes. So, the total size
of Flash memory is 64 128 (8KB) or 32 128bytes (4KB). User can erase the Flash memory by a sector unit at a
time and write the data into the Flash memory by a byte unit at a time.
•
8K/4Kbyte Internal Flash memory
•
Sector size: 128 bytes
•
10years data retention
−
Fast programming Time:
−
Sector Erase: 8ms (min.)
−
Byte Program: 25us (min.)
•
Byte programmable
•
User programmable by "LDC" instruction
•
Sector (128 bytes) erase available
•
Endurance: 100,000 Erase/Program cycles (min.)
PS031305-1017
18-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
18.1.2 Tool Program Mode
This mode is for erasing and programming full area of Flash memory by external programming tools. The 5 pins of
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 are connected to a programming tool and then internal Flash memory of S3F8S28/S3F8S24
can be programmed by serial OTP/MTP Tools, SPW2 plus single programmer or GW-PRO2 gang programmer
and so on. The other modules except Flash memory module are at a reset state. This mode doesn’t support the
sector erase but chip erase (all Flash memory erased at a time) and two protection modes (Hard lock
protection/Read protection). The read protection mode is available only in tool program mode. So in order to make
a chip into read protection, you need to select a read protection option when you write a program code to a chip in
tool program mode by using a programming tool. After read protect, all data of Flash memory read "00". This
protection is released by chip erase execution in the tool program mode.
Table 18-1
Main Chip
Pin Name
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the Flash in Tool Program Mode
During Programming
Pin Name
Pin No.
I/O
Function
Serial data pin (output when reading, Input when writing)
Input and push-pull output port can be assigned
P0.1
SDAT
22 (24-pin),
18 (20-pin)
I/O
P0.0
SCLK
23 (24-pin),
19 (20-pin)
I
Serial clock pin (input only pin)
RESET/P1.2
VPP
4
I
Power supply pin for Tool mode entering (indicates that
MTP enters into the Tool mode). When 11V is applied,
MTP is in Tool mode.
24 (24-pin),
20 (20-pin),
1 (24-pin),
1 (20-pin),
I
Logic power supply pin.
VDD/VSS
VDD/VSS
18.1.3 User Program Mode
This mode supports sector erase, byte programming, byte read and one protection mode (Hard Lock Protection).
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 has the internal pumping circuit to generate high voltage. To program a Flash memory in
this mode several control registers will be used.
There are four kind functions in user program mode-programming, reading, sector erase, and one protection mode
(Hard lock protection).
PS031305-1017
18-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
18.2 Flash Memory Control Registers (User Program Mode)
18.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON)
FMCON register is available only in user program mode to select the Flash memory operation mode; sector erase,
byte programming, and to make the Flash memory into a hard lock protection.
Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON)
ECH, Bank 1, R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Flash (Erase or Hard Lock Protection)
Operation Start Bit
Flash Memory Mode Selection Bits
0101 = Programming mode
1010 = Erase mode
0110 = Hard lock mode
Others = Not used for S3F8S24
0 = Operation stop
1 = Operation start
(This bit will be cleared automatically just
after erase operation.)
Not used for S3F8S28/F8S24.
Figure 18-1
Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON)
The bit 0 of FMCON register (FMCON.0) is a bit for the operation start of Erase and Hard Lock Protection.
Therefore, operation of Erase and Hard Lock Protection is activated when you set FMCON.0 to "1". If you write
FMCON.0 to 1 for erasing, CPU is stopped automatically for erasing time (min.4ms). After erasing time, CPU is
restarted automatically. When you read or program a byte data from or into Flash memory, this bit is not needed to
manipulate.
18.2.2 Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR)
The FMUSR register is used for a safe operation of the Flash memory. This register will protect undesired erase or
program operation from malfunctioning of CPU caused by an electrical noise. After reset, the user-programming
mode is disabled, because the value of FMUSR is "00000000B" by reset operation. If necessary to operate the
Flash memory, you can use the user programming mode by setting the value of FMUSR to "10100101B". The
other value of "10100101B", user program mode is disabled.
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR)
EDH, Bank1 R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Bits
10100101 = Enable user programming mode
Other values: Disable user programming mode
Figure 18-2
PS031305-1017
Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR)
18-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
18.2.3 Flash Memory Sector Address Registers
There are two sector address registers for the erase or programming Flash memory. The FMSECL (Flash Memory
Sector Address Register Low Byte) indicates the low byte of sector address and FMSECH (Flash Memory
Address Sector Register High Byte) indicates the high byte of sector address. The FMSECH is needed for
S3F8S28/F8S24 because it has 32 sectors.
One sector consists of 128bytes. Each sector's address starts XX00H or XX80H, that is, a base address of sector
is XX00H or XX80H. So bit.6–0 of FMSECL don't mean whether the value is "1" or "0". We recommend that it is
the simplest way to load the sector base address into FMSECH and FMSECL register. When programming the
Flash memory, user should program after loading a sector base address, which is located in the destination
address to write data into FMSECH and FMSECL register. If the next operation is also to write one byte data, user
should check whether next destination address is located in the same sector or not. In case of other sectors, user
should load sector address to FMSECH and FMSECL Register according to the sector.
(Refer to Example 18-2 Programming the PWM Module to Sample Specifications).
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECH)
EEH, Bank 1 R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Flash Memory Sector Address(High Byte)
NOTE:
The High- Byte flash memory sector address pointer value is the
higher eight bits of the 16-bit pointer address.
Figure 18-3
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECH)
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECL)
EFH, Bank 1 R/W
MSB
.7
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.0
LSB
Don't Care
Flash Memory Sector Address(Low Byte)
NOTE:
The Low- Byte flash memory sector address pointer value is the
lower eight bits of the 16-bit pointer address.
Figure 18-4
PS031305-1017
Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECL)
18-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
18.3 ISPTM (On-Board Programming) Sector
ISPTM sectors located in program memory area can store on board program software (boot program code for
upgrading application code by interfacing with I/O pin). The ISPTM sectors cannot be erased or programmed by
LDC instruction for the safety of On Board Program software.
The ISP sectors are available only when the ISP enable/disable bit is set 0, that is, enable ISP at the Smart
Option. If you don't like to use ISP sector, this area can be used as a normal program memory (can be erased or
programmed by LDC instruction) by setting ISP disable bit ("1") at the Smart Option. Even if ISP sector is selected,
ISP sector can be erased or programmed in the Tool Program mode, by Serial programming tools. The size of ISP
sector can be varied by settings of Smart Option. You can choose appropriate ISP sector size according to the
size of On Board Program software.
(Decimal)
4,095
(HEX)
0FFFH
4K-bytes
Internal Program
Memory Area
8FFH
255
Available
ISP Sector Area
FFH
Interrupt Vector Area
3FH
Smart Option Area
3CH
0
00H
S3F8S28/F8S24
Figure 18-5
PS031305-1017
Program Memory Address Space
18-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 18-2
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
ISP Sector Size
Smart Option (003EH) ISP Size Selection Bit
Area of ISP Sector
ISP Sector Size
x
–
0
0
0
100H to 1FFH (256byte)
256bytes
0
0
1
100H to 2FFH (512byte)
512bytes
0
1
0
100H to 4FFH (1024byte)
1024bytes
0
1
1
100H to 8FFH (2048byte)
2048bytes
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
1
x
0
NOTE: The area of the ISP sector selected by Smart Option bit (003EH.2 to 003EH.0) cannot be erased and programmed by
LDC instruction in user program mode.
18.3.1 ISP Reset Vector and ISP Sector Size
If you use ISP sectors by setting the ISP enable/disable bit to "0" and the Reset Vector Selection bit to "0" at the
Smart Option, you can choose the reset vector address of CPU as shown in Table 18-3 by setting the ISP Reset
Vector Address Selection bits.
Table 18-3
Smart Option (003EH) ISP Reset
Vector Address Selection Bit
Reset Vector Address
Reset Vector
Address After POR
Usable Area
for ISP Sector
ISP Sector Size
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
1
x
x
0100H
–
–
0
0
0
0200H
100H to 1FFH
256 bytes
0
0
1
0300H
100H to 2FFH
512 bytes
0
1
0
0500H
100H to 4FFH
1024 bytes
0
1
1
0900H
100H to 8FFH
2048 bytes
NOTE: The selection of the ISP reset vector address by Smart Option (003EH.7 to 003EH.5) is not dependent of the selection
of ISP sector size by Smart Option (003EH.2 to 003EH.0).
PS031305-1017
18-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
18.4 Sector Erase
User can erase a Flash memory partially by using sector erase function only in user program mode. The only unit
of Flash memory to be erased in the user program mode is a sector.
The program memory of S3F8S28/S3F8S24 8K/4Kbytes Flash memory is divided into 64/32 sectors. Every sector
has all 128byte sizes. So the sector to be located destination address should be erased first to program a new
data (one byte) into Flash memory. Minimum 4ms delay time for the erase is required after setting sector address
and triggering erase start bit (FMCON.0).Sector erase is not supported in tool program modes (MDS mode tool or
programming tool).
Sector 63
(128 byte)
Sector 32
(128 byte)
Sector 31
(128 byte)
Sector 0
(128 byte)
Figure 18-6
1FFFH (S3F8S28)
1F7FH
0FFFH (S3F8S24)
0F7FH
007FH
0000H
Sector configurations in User Program Mode
The sector erase procedure in user program mode
1. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to "10100101B".
2. Set Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECH and FMSECL).
3. Set Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) to "10100001B".
4. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to "00000000B"
PS031305-1017
18-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
Start
SB1
FMUSR
FMSECH
FMSECL
#0A5H
; User Programimg Mode Enable
High Address of Sector
Low Address of Sector
; Set Sector Base Address
#10100001B
; Mode Select & Start Erase
FMCON
FMUSR
; Select Bank1
#00H
; User Prgramming Mode Disable
SB0
; Select Bank0
Finish One Sector Erase
Figure 18-7
Sector Erase Flowchart in User Program Mode
NOTE:
1.
it
2.
If user erases a sector selected by Flash Memory Sector Address Register FMSECH and FMSECL,
FMUSR should be enabled just before starting sector erase operation. And to erase a sector, Flash
Operation Start Bit of FMCON register is written from operation stop "0" to operation start "1". That bit
will be cleared automatically just after the corresponding operation completed. In other words, when S3F8S28/S3F8S24 is
in the condition that Flash memory user programming enable bits is enabled and executes start operation of sector erase,
will get the result of erasing selected sector as user’s a purpose and Flash Operation Start Bit of FMCON register is also
clear automatically.
If user executes sector erase operation with FMUSR disabled, FMCON.0 bit, Flash Operation Start Bit, remains "High",
which means start operation, and is not cleared even though next instruction is executed. So user should be careful to set
FMUSR when executing sector erase, for no effect on other Flash sectors.
Example 18-1
Sector Erase
Case1. Erase one sector
•
•
ERASE_ONESECTOR:
SB1
ERASE_STOP:
LD
FMUSR,#0A5H
; User program mode enable
LD
FMSECH,#04H
; Set sector address 0400H, sector8
LD
FMSECL,#00H
; among sector 0 to 32
LD
FMCON,#10100001B
; Select erase mode enable & Start sector erase
LD
FMUSR,#00H
; User program mode disable
SB0
PS031305-1017
18-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
18.5 Programming
A Flash memory is programmed in one-byte unit after sector erase. The write operation of programming starts by
"LDC" instruction.
The program procedure in user program mode:
1. Must erase target sectors before programming.
2. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to "10100101B".
3. Set Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) to "0101000XB".
4. Set Flash Memory Sector Address Register (FMSECH and FMSECL) to the sector base address of
destination address to write data.
5. Load a transmission data into a working register.
6. Load a Flash memory upper address into upper register of pair working register.
7. Load a Flash memory lower address into lower register of pair working register.
8. Load transmission data to Flash memory location area on "LDC" instruction by indirectly addressing mode
9. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to "00000000B".
NOTE: In programming mode, it doesn't care whether FMCON.0’s value is "0" or "1".
PS031305-1017
18-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
Start
SB1
; Select Bank1
FMSECH
FMSECL
High Address of Sector
Low Address of Sector
R(n)
R(n+1)
R(data)
High Address to Write
Low Address to Write
8-bit Data
FMUSR
#0A5H
FMCON
LDC
#01010000B
@RR(n),R(data)
FMUSR
#00H
SB0
; Set Secotr Base Address
; Set Address and Data
; User Program Mode Enable
; Mode Select
; Write data at flash
; User Program Mode Disable
; Select Bank0
Finish 1-BYTE Writing
Figure 18-8
PS031305-1017
Byte Program Flowchart in a User Program Mode
18-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
Start
SB1
; Select Bank1
High Address of Sector
Low Address of Sector
FMSECH
FMSECL
R(n)
R(n+1)
R(data)
High Address to Write
Low Address to Write
8-bit Data
FMUSR
#0A5H
FMCON
#01010000B
; Set Secotr Base Address
; Set Address and Data
; User Program Mode Enable
; Mode Select
; Write data at flash
LDC
@RR(n),R(data)
; User Program Mode Disable
YES
Write again?
NO
NO
Same Sector?
FMUSR
#00H
; User Program Mode Disable
;; Check Sector
YES
NO
SB0
Continuous
address?
; Select Bank0
;; Check Address
Finish Writing
YES
INC
;; Increse Address
R(n+1)
YES
Different
Data?
R(data)
New 8-bit Data
;; Update Data to Write
NO
Figure 18-9
PS031305-1017
Program Flowchart in a User Program Mode
18-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Example 18-2
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
1Byte Programming
Case1. 1-Byte Programming
•
•
WR_BYTE:
; Write data "AAH" to destination address 0310H
SB1
LD
FMUSR,#0A5H
; User program mode enable
LD
FMCON,#01010000B
; Selection programming mode
LD
FMSECH,#03H
; Set the base address of sector (0300H)
LD
FMSECL,#00H
LD
R9,#0AAH
; Load data "AA" to write
LD
R10,#03H
; Load Flash memory upper address into upper register of
LD
R11,#10H
LDC
@RR10,R9
; Write data "AAH" at Flash memory location (0310H)
LD
FMUSR,#00H
; User program mode disable
; pair working; register
; Load Flash memory lower address into lower register of
; pair working; register
SB0
Case2. Programming in the same sector
•
•
; RR10 → Address copy (R10-high address, R11-low address)
WR_INSECTOR:
LD
R0, #40H
SB1
LD
FMUSR,#0A5H
; User program mode enable
LD
FMCON,#0101000
; Selection programming mode and Start programming
LD
FMSECH,#06H
; Set the base address of sector located in target address
; to write data
LD
FMSECL,#00H
; The sector 12’s base address is 0600H.
LD
R9,#33H
; Load data "33H" to write
LD
R10,#06H
; Load Flash memory upper address into upper register of
LD
R11, #00H
; pair working register
; Load Flash memory lower address into lower register of
; pair working register
WR_BYTE:
LDC
@RR10,R9
INC
R11
DEC
R0
JP
NZ，WR_BYTE
LD
FMUSR,#00H
; Write data "33H" at Flash memory location
; Reset address in the same sector by INC instruction
; Check whether the end address for programming reach 0640H
; or not.
; User Program mode disable
SB0
PS031305-1017
18-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
Case3. Programming to the Flash memory space located in other sectors
•
•
WR_INSECTOR2:
LD
R0, #40H
LD
R1, #40H
SB1
LD
LD
FMUSR, #0A5H
LD
FMCON, #01010000B
FMSECH, #01H
; User program mode enable
; Selection programming mode and Start programming
; Set the base address of sector located in target address
; to write data
LD
FMSECL, #00H
; The sector 2’s base address is 100H
LD
R9, #0CCH
LD
R10, #01H
LD
R11, #40H
CALL
WR_BYTE
LD
R0, #40H
LD
FMSECH, #02H
LD
FMSECL, #80H
LD
R9, # 55H
LD
R10, #02H
; Load Flash memory upper address into upper
R11, #90H
; Load Flash memory lower address into lower
; Load data "CCH" to write
; Load Flash memory upper address into upper register of
; pair working register
; Load Flash memory lower address into lower register of
; pair working register
WR_INSECTOR5:
; Set the base address of sector located in target address
to write data
; The sector 5’s base address is 0280H
; Load data "55H" to write
register of
pair working register
LD
register of
pair working register
CALL
WR_BYTE
WR_INSECTOR12:
LD
FMSECH,#06H
; Set the base address of sector located in target address
LD
FMSECL,#00H
; The sector 12’s base address is 0600H
LD
R9,#0A3H
; Load data "A3H" to write
LD
R10,#06H
LD
R11,#40H
; to write data
; Load Flash memory upper address into upper
register of
; pair working register
; Load Flash memory lower address into lower
register of
; pair working register
WR_BYTE1:
LDC
@RR10, R9
INC
R11
DEC
R1
JP
NZ, WR_BYTE1
LD
FMUSR,#00H
; Write data "A3H" at Flash memory location
; User Program mode disable
SB0
•
PS031305-1017
18-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
•
WR_BYTE:
LDC
@RR10,R9
INC
R11
DEC
R0
JP
NZ, WR_BYTE
; Write data written by R9 at Flash memory location
RET
18.6 Reading
The read operation starts by "LDC" instruction.
The program procedure in user program mode:
1. Load a Flash memory upper address into upper register of pair working register.
2. Load a Flash memory lower address into lower register of pair working register.
3. Load receive data from Flash memory location area on "LDC" instruction by indirectly addressing mode
Example 18-3
Reading
•
•
LD
R2,#03H
LD
R3,#00H
; Load Flash memory’s upper address to upper register of pair working
; register
; Load Flash memory’s lower address to lower register of pair working
; register
LOOP: LDC
R0,@RR2
INC
R3
CP
R3,#0FFH
JP
NZ,LOOP
; Read data from Flash memory location (Between 300H and 3FFH)
•
•
•
•
PS031305-1017
18-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 18. Embedded Flash Memory Interface
18.7 Hard Lock Protection
User can set Hard Lock Protection by writing "0110B" in FMCON7–4. This function prevents the changes of data
in a Flash memory area. If this function is enabled, the user cannot write or erase the data in a Flash memory
area. This protection can be released by the chip erase execution in the tool program mode. In terms of user
program mode, the procedure of setting Hard Lock Protection is following that. In tool mode, the manufacturer of
serial tool writer could support Hardware Protection. Please refer to the manual of serial program writer tool
provided by the manufacturer.
The program procedure in user program mode:
1. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to "10100101B".
2. Set Flash Memory Control Register (FMCON) to "01100001B".
3. Set Flash Memory User Programming Enable Register (FMUSR) to "00000000B".
Example 18-4
Hard Lock Protection
•
•
SB1
LD
FMUSR,#0A5H
; User program mode enable
LD
FMCON,#01100001B
; Select Hard Lock Mode and Start protection
LD
FMUSR,#00H
; User program mode disable
SB0
•
•
PS031305-1017
18-15
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
19
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
Electrical Data
19.1 Overview
In this section, the following S3F8S28/S3F8S24 electrical characteristics are presented in tables and graphs:
•
Absolute maximum ratings
•
D.C. electrical characteristics
•
A.C. electrical characteristics
•
Input timing measurement points
•
Oscillator characteristics
•
Oscillation stabilization time
•
Operating voltage range
•
Schmitt trigger input characteristics
•
Data retention supply voltage in stop mode
•
Stop mode release timing when initiated by a RESET
•
UART Timing Characteristics
•
A/D converter electrical characteristics
•
LVD circuit characteristics
•
LVR circuit characteristics
•
LVR reset timing
Table 19-1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
(TA = 25C)
Parameter
Supply voltage
Symbol
Conditions
Rating
Unit
VDD
–
– 0.3 to + 6.5
V
Input voltage
VI
All ports
– 0.3 to VDD + 0.3
V
Output voltage
VO
All output ports
– 0.3 to VDD + 0.3
V
Output current high
IOH
One I/O pin active
– 25
mA
–
All I/O pins active
– 80
–
IOL
One I/O pin active
+ 30
mA
–
All I/O pins active
+ 150
–
–
Output current low
–
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
PS031305-1017
TA
–
– 40 to + 85
C
TSTG
–
– 65 to + 150
C
19-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 19-2
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
DC Electrical Characteristics
(TA = – 40C to + 85C, VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V)
Parameter
Operating
voltage
Symbol
VDD
HG main crystal
or ceramic
frequency
fHGmain
LG Main crystal
or ceramic
frequency
fLGmain
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
fHGmain = 0.4 – 4MHz
1.8
–
5.5
fHGmain = 0.4 – 12MHz
2.7
–
5.5
fLGmain = 0.1 – 1MHz
1.8
–
5.5
VDD = 2.7V to 5.5V
0.4
–
12
VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V
0.4
–
4
Unit
V
MHz
–
1
–
VDD
VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V
0.4
VIH1
Ports 0, 1, 2 and
RESET
0.8
VDD
VIH2
XIN and XOUT
VIL1
Ports 0, 1, 2 and
RESET
VIL2
XIN and XOUT
Output high
voltage
VOH
IOH = – 10mA
Ports 0,2, P1.0-P1.1
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
VDD –
1.5
VDD –
0.4
–
V
Output low
voltage
VOL
IOL = 25mA
Ports 0,2, P1.0-P1.1
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
–
0.4
2.0
V
ILIH1
All input
except ILIH2, P1.21
VIN = VDD
–
–
ILIH2
XIN
VIN = VDD
ILIL1
All input except ILIL2
VIN = 0V
Input high
voltage
Input low voltage
Input high
leakage current
Input low leakage
current
VDD = 1.8 to 5.5V
VDD = 1.8 to 5.5V
VDD –
0.1
–
–
0.2VDD
V
V
0.1
1
A
20
–
–1
A
– 20
–
–
ILIL2
XIN
VIN = 0V
Output high
leakage current
ILOH
All output pins
VOUT = VDD
–
–
2
A
Output low
leakage current
ILOL
All output pins
VOUT = 0V
–
–
–2
A
Pull-up resistors
RP1
VIN = 0V, TA = 25C
Ports 0, 1, 2
VDD = 5V
25
50
100
Pull-down
resistors
RP2
VIN = 0V, TA = 25C
P1.0-P1.11
VDD = 5V
25
50
100
Run mode 10MHz
CPU clock
HG oscillator mode
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
–
2
4
Run mode 0.5MHz
CPU clock
LG oscillator mode
VDD = 3.0V
Supply current (2)
PS031305-1017
IDD1
k
mA
–
0.13
–
19-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Parameter
Symbol
IDD2
Conditions
Idle mode 10MHz
clock
HG oscillator mode
Stop mode with
Ring OSC clock
(LVR disable)
IDD3
Stop mode
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
Min.
Typ.
Max.
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
–
1.5
3.0
VDD = 3.0V
–
1.8
3.6
VDD = 2.0V
–
1.2
2.4
VDD = 3.0 (LVR
disable)
TA = 25C
0.3
1.0
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
(LVR disable)
TA = 25C
0.3
2.0
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
(LVR disable)
TA = – 40C to +
85C
Unit
A
–
VDD = 4.5 to 5.5V
(LVR enable)
TA = – 40C to +
85C
1.0
4.0
40
80
NOTE:
1.
P1.2 have intrinsic internal pull-down resistor (Internal VPP circuit), the typical value is about 300Kohm.
2.
Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors or external output current loads and ADC
module.
Table 19-3
AC Electrical Characteristics
(TA = – 40C to + 85C, VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Interrupt input
low width
tINTL
INT0, INT1 VDD = 5 V 10 %
500
–
–
ns
RESET input low
width
tRSL
Input VDD = 5 V 10 %
10
–
–
us
PS031305-1017
19-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
tINTL
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
tINTH
0.8 VDD
XIN
0.2 VDD
Figure 19-1
Input Timing Measurement Points
Table 19-4
Oscillator Characteristics
(TA = – 40C to + 85C)
Oscillator
Clock Circuit
XIN
Main crystal or
ceramic
XOUT
XIN
External clock
(Main System)
Internal RC
oscillator
Tolerance of
internal RC
Internal ring
OSC
XOUT
–
–
Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
VDD = 2.7 to 5.5V
HG oscillator mode
0.4
–
121
MHz
VDD 1 = 1.8 to 5.5V
HG oscillator mode
0.4
–
4
MHz
VDD = 1.8 to 5.5V
LG oscillator mode
0.1
–
1
MHz
VDD = 2.7 to 5.5V
0.4
–
12
MHz
VDD = 1.8 to 5.5V
0.4
–
4
MHz
7.92
8
8.08
3.96
4
4.04
1.98
2
2.02
0.99
1
1.01
495
500
505
kHz
VDD = 1.8 to 5.0V
TA = 25C
–
±0.5
±1
%
VDD = 1.8 to 5.5V
TA = – 40C to + 85C
–
–
±3.5
%
32.768
49.152
VDD = 5V
TA =25C, Tolerance:1%
–
VDD = 5V, TA = 25C,
Run Mode (After trimming)
16.384
–
VDD = 5V, TA = 25C,
Stop Mode (After trimming)
–
MHz
kHz
24
40.2
NOTE:
1.
Please refer to the figure of Operating Voltage Range.
2.
Ring OSC frequency will decrease in Stop Mode while VDD is not changed.
PS031305-1017
19-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 19-5
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
Oscillation Stabilization Time
(TA = − 40°C to + 85°C, VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V)
Oscillator
Main crystal
Main ceramic
External clock
(main system)
Oscillator
stabilization wait
time
Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
fOSC 1.0MHz
Oscillation stabilization occurs when VDD is
equal to the minimum oscillator voltage range.
–
–
20
ms
–
–
10
ms
XIN input high and low width (tXH, tXL)
25
–
500
ns
tWAIT when released by a reset (1)
–
219/fOSC
–
ms
tWAIT when released by an interrupt (2)
–
–
–
ms
NOTE:
1.
fOSC is the oscillator frequency.
2.
in
The duration of the oscillator stabilization wait time, tWAIT, when it is released by an interrupt is determined by the settings
the basic timer control register, BTCON.
CPU Clock
12 MHz
6 MHz
4 MHz
2 MHz
0.1 MHz
1
2 2.7 3
4 4.5 5 5.5 6
7
Supply Voltage (V)
Figure 19-2
PS031305-1017
Operating Voltage Range
19-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
VOUT
VDD
A = 0.2 VDD
B = 0.4 VDD
C = 0.6 VDD
D = 0.8 VDD
VSS
A
B
0.3 VDD
Figure 19-3
Table 19-6
C
D
VIN
0.7 VDD
Schmitt Trigger Input Characteristics Diagram
Data Retention Supply Voltage in Stop Mode
(TA = – 40C to + 85C, VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Data retention
supply voltage
VDDDR
Stop mode
Data retention
supply current
IDDDR
Stop mode; VDDDR = 2.0V
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
2.0
–
5.5
V
–
0.1
5
A
NOTE: Supply current does not include current drawn through internal pull-up resistors or external output current loads.
Figure 19-4
PS031305-1017
Stop Mode Release Timing When Initiated by a RESET
19-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 19-7
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
UART Timing Characteristics in Mode 0 (10MHz)
(TA = – 40C to + 85C, VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V, Load capacitance = 80pF)
Parameter
Symbol
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Serial port clock cycle time
tSCK
500
tCPU 6
700
Output data setup to clock rising edge
tS1
300
tCPU 5
–
Clock rising edge to input data valid
tS2
–
–
300
Output data hold after clock rising edge
tH1
tCPU − 50
tCPU
–
Input data hold after clock rising edge
tH2
0
–
–
Serial port clock High, Low level width
tHIGH, tLOW
200
tCPU 3
400
Unit
ns
NOTE:
1.
All timings are in nanoseconds (ns) and assume a 10MHz CPU clock frequency
2.
The unit tCPU means one CPU clock period.
tSCK
tHIGH
tLOW
0.8 VDD
0.2 VDD
Figure 19-5
PS031305-1017
Waveform for UART Timing Characteristics
19-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 19-8
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
A/D Converter Electrical Characteristics
(TA = – 40C to + 85C, VDD = 2.7V to 5.5V, VSS = 0V)
Parameter
Symbol
Test Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Resolution
–
–
–
12
–
bit
Total accuracy
–
−3
1
6
Integral linearity
error
ILE
"
–
0.8
2
Differential linearity
error
DLE
"
–
0.6
1
Offset error of top
EOT
"
–3
1
6
Offset error of
bottom
EOB
"
–3
1
6
Conversion time (1)
tCON
fOSC = 10MHz
fADC = fOSC /12 = 10MHz/12
–
20.4
–
s
Sampling time
tSMP
fOSC = 10MHz
fADC = fOSC /12 = 10MHz/12
–
5
–
1/fADC
ADC clock input
fADC
–
–
–
850
kHz
Analog input
voltage
VIAN
–
VSS
–
VDD
V
Analog input
impedance
RAN
–
2
–
–
M
Analog input
current
IADIN
VDD = 5V
–
–
10
A
VDD = 5V
–
1
3
mA
VDD = 3V
–
0.5
1.5
–
VDD = 5V
power down mode
–
100
500
nA
Analog block
current (2)
IADC
VDD = 5.12V
fADC = 850kHz
VSS = 0V
LSB
NOTE:
1.
"Conversion time" is the time required from the moment a conversion operation starts until it ends.
2.
IADC is operating current during A/D conversion.
PS031305-1017
19-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 19-9
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
LVD Circuit Characteristics
(TA = – 40 to 85C, VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V)
Parameter
LVD Detect Voltage
Symbol
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
VLVD0
–
4.0
4.1
4.2
VLVD1
–
3.1
3.2
3.3
VLVD2
–
2.4
2.5
2.6
VLVD3
–
2.0
2.1
2.2
Table 19-10
Unit
V
LVR Circuit Characteristics
(TA = – 40 to 85C, VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V)
Parameter
Symbol
Low voltage reset
VLVR
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
–
1.8
2.2
2.9
3.8
1.9
2.3
3.0
3.9
2.0
2.4
3.1
4.0
V
VDD
VLVR,MAX
VLVR
VLVR,MIN
Figure 19-6
PS031305-1017
LVR Reset Timing
19-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 19-11
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
Flash Memory AC Electrical characteristics
(TA = – 40C to + 85C at VDD = 1.8V to 5.5V)
Parameter
Symbol
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Fewrv
VDD
1.8
5.0
5.5
V
20
–
30
S
32
–
70
mS
4
–
12
mS
Flash erase/write/read voltage
Programming time (1)
Chip erasing time
Ftp
(2)
−
Ftp1
Sector erasing time (3)
Ftp2
Data access time
FtRS
VDD = 2.0V
–
250
–
nS
Number of writing/erasing
FNwe
–
10,000
–
–
Times
Ftdr
–
10
–
–
Years
Data retention
NOTE:
1.
The programming time is the time during which one byte (8-bit) is programmed.
2.
The chip erasing time is the time during which entire program memory is erased.
3.
The sector erasing time is the time during which all 128byte block is erased.
4.
The chip erasing is available in tool program mode only.
104
VSS
VDD
S3F8S28/F8S24
Figure 19-7
The Circuit Diagram to Improve EFT Characteristics
NOTE: To improve EFT characteristics, we recommend using power capacitor near S3F8S28/F8S24 like Figure 19-7.
PS031305-1017
19-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 19-12
Parameter
Electrostatic discharge
PS031305-1017
Symbol
VESD
Chapter 19. Electrical Data
ESD Characteristics
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
HBM
2000
–
–
V
MM
200
–
–
V
CDM
500
–
–
V
19-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
20
Chapter 20. Mechanical Data
Mechanical Data
20.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 is available in a 24-pin SOP package (Zilog: 24-SOP-375), a 24-pin TSSOP package
(Zilog: 24-TSSOP-BD44), a 20-pin DIP package (Zilog: 20-DIP-300A), a 20-pin SOP package (Zilog: 20-SOP375), a 20-pin SSOP package (Zilog: 20-SSOP-225). Package dimensions are shown in Figure 20-1, Figure 20-2,
Figure 20-3, and Figure 20-4.
0-8
#24
#12
0.20
2.35 0.10
#1
15.74 MAX
15.34 0.20
+ 0.10
- 0.05
0.87 0.20
7.50 0.20
24-SOP-375
2.50 MAX
10.30 0.30
#13
1.27
(0.69)
0.38
NOTE:
+ 0.10
- 0.05
Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 20-1
PS031305-1017
0.05 MIN
0.10 MAX
24-SOP-375 Package Dimensions
20-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 20. Mechanical Data
0-8
#13
24-TSSOP-BD44
#12
0.25
1.20 MAX
#1
0.62 0.12
4.40 0.10
6.40 0.15
#24
7.80 0.10
0.10 MAX
0.65
0.25
NOTE:
+ 0.05
- 0.05
Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 20-2
PS031305-1017
24-TSSOP-BD44 Package Dimensions
20-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
#11
0-15
0.2
5
20-DIP-300A
+0
.
- 0 10
.05
7.62
6.40 0.20
#20
Chapter 20. Mechanical Data
0.46 0.10
(1.77)
NOTE :
1.52 0.10
Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 20-3
PS031305-1017
2.54
5.08 MAX
26.40 0.20
3.30 0.30
26.80 MAX
3.25 0.20
#10
0.51 MIN
#1
20-DIP-300A Package Dimensions
20-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 20. Mechanical Data
0-8
+ 0.10
#10
0.203 - 0.05
2.30 0.10
#1
13.14 MAX
12.74 0.20
0.85 0.20
20-SOP-375
9.53
7.50 0.20
#11
2.50 MAX
10.30 0.30
#20
1.27
(0.66)
0.40
NOTE :
+ 0.10
- 0.05
Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 20-4
PS031305-1017
0.05 MIN
0.10 MAX
20-SOP-375 Package Dimensions
20-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 20. Mechanical Data
0-8
#10
6.90 MAX
6.50 0.20
+ 0.10
- 0.05
1.85 MAX
0.15
1.50 0.10
#1
0.50 0.20
20-SSOP-225
5.72
4.40 0.10
#11
6.40 0.20
#20
(0.30)
0.65
+0.10
0.22 -0.05
NOTE:
Dimensions are in millimeters.
Figure 20-5
PS031305-1017
0.05 MIN
0.10 MAX
20-SSOP-225 Package Dimensions
20-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
21
Chapter 21. Flash MCU
Flash MCU
21.1 Overview
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 single-chip CMOS microcontroller is the Flash MCU. It has an on-chip Flash MCU ROM
of 8K/4Kbytes. The Flash ROM is accessed by serial data format.
The serial data is transformed by two pins of the chip: SCLK and SDAT, SCLK is the synchronize signal, and the
Flash Programmer Tool send data from the SDAT pin. The corresponding ports of SCLK and SDAT in
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 are P0.0 and P1.1. And there also need power supply for chip to work and higher power for
entering Flash tool mode. So the VDD, VSS of chip must be connected to power and ground. The higher power
supply for the Flash operation is named as VPP port, the corresponding pin in S3F8S28/S3F8S24 is nRESET
(P1.2) pin. The detail description of the pin functions are listed in the Table 21-1. The pin assignments of the
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 package types are shown in below figures.
NOTE:
1.
This chapter is about the Tool Program Mode of Flash MCU. If you want to know the User Program Mode, refer to the
chapter 18 Embedded Flash Memory Interface.
2.
In S3F8S28/S3F8S24, there only 5 pins are used as Flash operation pins, the nRESET pin is used as VPP input and
without TEST pin that different with other Zilog MCU products.
PS031305-1017
21-1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
VSS
1
24
VDD
XIN/P1.0
2
23
P0.0/ADC0/INT0/SCLK
XOUT/P1.1
3
22
P0.1/ADC1/INT1/SDAT
VPP/nRESET/P1.2
4
21
P0.2/ADC2/INT2/SCK
T0/P2.0
5
20
P0.3/ADC3/INT3/SDA
INT6/P3.2
6
19
P3.0/ADC11/INT4
INT7/P3.3
7
18
P3.1/ADC12/INT5
T1/P2.1
8
17
P0.4/ADC4
RxD/T1CAP/P2.2
9
16
P0.5/ADC5/PWM1
TxD/P2.3
10
15
P0.6/ADC6/PWM0
ADC10/P2.4
11
14
P0.7/ADC7
ADC9/P2.5
12
13
P2.6/ADC8/CLO
NOTE:
Figure 21-1
S3F8S28/F8S24
(24-SOP-375/
24-TSSOP-BD44)
The bolds indicate MTP pin name.
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Pin Assignments (24-DIP/24-SOP)
VSS
1
20
VDD
XIN/P1.0
2
19
P0.0/ADC0/INT0/SCLK
XOUT/P1.1
3
18
P0.1/ADC1/INT1/SDAT
VPP/nRESET/P1.2
4
17
P0.2/ADC2/INT2/SCK
T0/P2.0
5
16
P0.3/ADC3/INT3/SDA
T1/P2.1
6
15
P0.4/ADC4
RxD/T1CAP/P2.2
7
14
P0.5/ADC5/PWM1
TxD/P2.3
8
13
P0.6/ADC6/PWM0
ADC10/P2.4
9
12
P0.7/ADC7
ADC9/P2.5
10
11
P2.6/ADC8/CLO
NOTE:
Figure 21-2
PS031305-1017
Chapter 21. Flash MCU
S3F8S28/F8S24
(20-DIP-300A/
20-SOP-375
20-SSOP-225)
The bolds indicate MTP pin name.
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Pin Assignments (20-DIP/20-SOP/20-SSOP)
21-2
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 21-1
Chapter 21. Flash MCU
Descriptions of Pins Used to Read/Write the EPROM
Main Chip
During Programming
Pin Name
Pin Name
Pin No.
I/O
Function
P0.1
SDAT
22 (24-pin),
18 (20-pin)
I/O
Serial data pin (output when reading, Input when writing)
Input and push-pull output port can be assigned
P0.0
SCLK
23 (24-pin),
19 (20-pin)
I
Serial clock pin (input only pin)
RESET/P1.2
VPP
4
I
Power supply pin for Tool mode entering (indicates that
MTP enters into the Tool mode). When 11V is applied,
MTP is in Tool mode.
VDD/VSS
24 (24-pin),
20 (20-pin),
1 (24-pin),
1 (20-pin),
I
Logic power supply pin.
VDD/VSS
NOTE: Parentheses indicate pin number for 20-DIP-300A package.
Table 21-2
Comparison of S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Features
Characteristic
S3F8S28/S3F8S24
Program memory
8K/4Kbyte Flash ROM
Operating voltage (VDD)
2.0V to 5.5V
Flash MCU programming mode
VDD = 5.0V, VPP (nRESET) = 11V
Pin configuration
24-SOP/24-TSSOP/20-DIP/20-SOP/20-SSOP
Programmability
User program multi time
PS031305-1017
21-3
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 21. Flash MCU
21.2 On Board Writing
The S3F8S28/S3F8S24 needs only 5 signal lines including VDD and GND pins for writing internal Flash memory
with serial protocol. Therefore the on-board writing is possible if the writing signal lines are considered when the
PCB of application board is designed.
Circuit Design Guide:
At the Flash writing, the writing tool needs 5 signal lines that are GND, VDD, VPP, SDAT and SCLK. When you
design the PCB circuits, you should consider the usage of these signal lines for the on-board writing.
In case of VPP (nRESET) pin, for the purpose of increase the noise effect, a capacitor should be inserted between
the VPP pin and GND.
Please be careful to design the related circuit of these signal pins because rising/falling timing of VPP, SCLK and
SDAT is very important for proper programming.
RSCL
To Application circuit
SCLK (I/O)
RSDA
To Application circuit
SDAT (I/O)
VPP
(nRESET)
CVpp
VDD
VPP
VSS
To Application circuit
C RESET
VDD
SDA
SCL
CVpp are used to Improve
The noise effect
GND
SPW-uni , GW-uni , AS -pro, US-pro
Figure 21-3
PS031305-1017
PCB Design Guide for on Board Programming
21-4
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 21-3
Chapter 21. Flash MCU
Reference Table for Connection
Pin Name
I/O Mode in Applications
Resistor (Need)
VPP (nRESET)
Input
Yes
CVpp is 0.01uF to 0.02uF.
Input
Yes
RSDAT is 2k to 5k.
Output
No (NOTE)
Input
Yes
SDAT (I/O)
SCLK (I/O)
Output
No
Required Value
–
RSCLK is 2k to 5k.
(NOTE)
–
NOTE:
1.
In on-board writing mode, very high-speed signal will be provided to pin SCLK and SDAT. And it will cause some damages
to the application circuits connected to SCLK or SDAT port if the application circuit is designed as high speed response
such as relay control circuit. If possible, the I/O configuration of SDAT, SCLK pins had better be set to input mode.
2.
The value of R, C in this table is recommended value. It varies with circuit of system.
PS031305-1017
21-5
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
22
Chapter 22. Development Tools
Development Tools
22.1 Overview
Zilog offers software and hardware tools for S3 application development. Alternatively, a complete suite of 3rd party
tools can be used. Applications targeting S3F8-series microcontrollers can use either the low-cost Zilog librarybased Development Platform toolset or more sophisticated 3rd party emulator-based development tools.
Applications targeting S3C8-series microcontrollers typically require the use of 3rd party emulator-based
development tools.
Section 22.2 describes using 3rd party emulators (such as the OPENice i500 or i2000) to interface with a devicespecific target board for application development on S3C8-series (or S3F8-series) microcontrollers. Section 22.3
describes the Zilog library-based Development Platform for Flash-based S3F8-series microcontrollers.
22.2 Emulator-based Development System
Figure 22-1 shows an emulator-based development system utilizing an emulator to interface with an application
board through a Zilog-provided Target Board.
Figure 22-1
PS031305-1017
Emulator-based Development System Configuration
22-6
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 22. Development Tools
The S3 Emulator Based Development System includes the components listed in the following sections.
22.2.1 Host Software
Host software is required to create and debug S3 application programs in C or assembly language. The host
software program converts the application source code into an executable format that is downloaded into the
evaluation (EVA) chip on the target board for program execution/debugging. Optionally, the probe adapter cable(s)
can be connected between the target board and the application board to debug program interaction with
components on the application board.
Zilog provides the Zilog Developer Studio (ZDS) software suite host software package free of charge for any PC
running a supported version of the Windows operating system. Alternatively, 3rd party host software packages
(such as the IAR Embedded Workbench host software package) are available for purchase from vendor websites.
The ZDS S3 software package is available for free download from the Zilog website.
22.2.2 Target Boards
Target boards are available for all S3C8/S3F8-series microcontrollers. Each target board includes the cables and
adapters necessary to interface with an application board. The target board can be used with a 3rd party emulator
to enable application debugging with or without an application board. Alternatively, the emulator can be used to
program the target MCU on the application board using the supplied 10- circuit programming cable. The
TB8S19/8S28/8S19 target board can be used with application boards targeting the S3F8S19, S3F8S28, and
S3F8S39 MCUs.
Figure 22-2 shows how the TB8S19/8S28/8S19 Target Board is configured. The symbol “ ” marks the starting
point of the jumper signals.
PS031305-1017
22-7
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 22. Development Tools
TB8S19/8S28/8S39
Idle
Stop
+
+
VDD
On
U2
Off
CON3
To User_VDD
JP5
0
S3F8S19/39 S3F8S28 S3F8S19
S3F8S39
JP4
JP2
Chip Select Jumper
25
32 1
1
100-Pin Connector
EVA Mode
8S19 Sub.CLK
38
1
Y2
1
S1
50-Pin Connector
208 QFP
S3E8S30
EVA Chip
U1
Emulator
Interfalce
16
Y1
Main Mode
48
24 1
24-Pin Connector
PWM
14
50-Pin Connector
Enable Diasble
JP13
3F.7
3F.6
3F.5
3F.4
3F.3
3F.2
3F.1
3F.0
3E.7
3E.6
3E.5
3E.4
3E.3
3E.2
3E.1
3E.0
RESET
0
SW2
SW3
ON
GND
ON
SW1
15
S3F8S28 Target
System Interface
S3
17
S3F8S28
EX.CLK Jumper
Board Clock
JP10
JP5
SMDS2
JP8
JP11
JP9
S3F8S39
EX.CLK Jumper
SMDS2+
JP1
Figure 22-2
JP6
JP7
S3F8S19
EX.CLK Jumper
24
S3F8S39 Target
System Interface
S4
25
S3F8S19 Target
System Interface
S2
TB8S19/8S28/8S39 Target Board Configuration
NOTE: TB8S19/8S28/8S39 should be supplied 5V normally. Therefore, the power supply from Emulator should be set 5V for
the target board operation.
PS031305-1017
22-8
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 22-1
Symbols
Chapter 22. Development Tools
Components of TB8S19/8S28/8S39
Usage
Description
JP3, JP4
Device Selection
Selection of device: S3F8S19, S3F8S28, S3F8S39
JP8, JP9
Ex.CLK selection
Set external clock connect to S3F8S28/S3F8S24 EVA-chip.
JP12
User's Power selection
Selection of Power to User.
JP2
MODE Selection
Selection of Eva/Main-chip mode of S3F8S28/S3F8S24 EVAchip
JP1
Emulator selection
Selection of SMDS2/SMDS2+
JP5
Clock Source Selection
Selection of debug with internal/external clock
SW2, SW3
8-pin switch
Smart Option setting for S3F8S28/S3F8S24 EVA-chip
S1
100-pin connector
Connection between emulator and TB8S8S28 target board.
S3
24-pin connector
Connection between target board and user application system
RESET
Push button
Generation low active reset signal to S3F8S28/S3F8S24 EVAchip
VCC, GND
POWER connector
External power connector for TB8S19/8S28/8S39
IDLE, STOP LED
STOP/IDLE Display
Indicate the status of STOP or IDLE of S3F8S28/F8S24 EVAchip on TB8S19/8S28/8S39 target board
JP3
PWM selection
Selection of PWM enable/disable
Table 22-2
"Device Selection" Settings
Device Selection Settings for TB8S19/8S28/8S39
Operating Mode
Device Selection:JP4
8S19/39
8S28
Device Selection
JP4
8S19/8S39
8S28
JP3
8S19
Comments
TB8S28
Target
System
Operate with TB8S28
TB8S39
Target
System
Operate with TB8S39
TB8S19
Target
System
Operate with TB8S19
8S39
Device Selection
JP4
8S19/39
8S28
JP3
8S19
8S39
NOTE: The following symbol in the "8S28" Setting column indicates the electrical short (off) configuration:
PS031305-1017
22-9
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 22-3
Power Selection Settings for TB8S19/8S28/8S39
"To User_Vcc" Settings
Operating Mode
TB8S28
Comments
External
Target
System
VCC
Touser_VDD
off
Chapter 22. Development Tools
The SMDS2/SMDS2+ main
board supplies VDD to the
target board (evaluation
chip) and the target system.
V SS
on
VCC
SMDS2/SMDS2+
TB8S28
The SMDS2/SMDS2+ main
board supplies VDD only to
the target board (evaluation
chip). The target system
must have its own power
supply.
Target
System
VCC
Touser_VDD
off
External
V SS
on
VCC
SMDS2/SMDS2+
22.2.3 SMDS2+ Selection (SAM8)
In order to write data into program memory that is available in SMDS2+, the target board should be selected to be
for SMDS2+ through a switch as follows. Otherwise, the program memory writing function is not available.
Table 22-4
"JP4" Setting
The SMDS2+ Tool Selection Setting
Operating Mode
R/W*
SMDS2
PS031305-1017
SMDS2+
SMDS2+
R/W*
Target
System
22-10
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 22-5
Chapter 22. Development Tools
Using Single Header Pins to Select Clock Source/PWM/Operation Mode
Target Board Part
Comments
Board CLK
JP5
Clock Source
Use SMDS2/SMDS2+ internal clock source as the
system clock.
Default Setting
JP5
Clock Source
Use external crystal or ceramic oscillator as the
system clock.
Inner CLK
Board CLK
Inner CLK
JP8
JP9
Connect Clock to S3F8S28.
(JP10 to 11, JP6 to 7 off)
PWM Enable
JP13
PWM function is DISABLED.
PWM Disable
PWM Enable
JP13
PWM function is ENABLED.
Default Setting
PWM Disable
Main Mode
JP2
The S3E8S30 run in main mode, just same as
S3F8S28/S3F8S24. The debug interface is not
available.
EVA Mode
Main Mode
JP2
EVA Mode
PS031305-1017
The S3E8S30 run in EVA mode, available. When
debug program, please set the jumper in this
mode.
Default Setting
22-11
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Table 22-6
Chapter 22. Development Tools
Using Single Header Pins as the Input Path for External Trigger Sources
Target Board Part
Comments
Connector from
External Trigger
Sources of the
Application System
External
Triggers
Ch1(TP3)
Ch2(TP4)
You can connect an external trigger source to one of the two external trigger
channels (CH1 or CH2) for the SK-1000/SMDS2+ breakpoint and trace functions.
SW2
Low
OFF
High (Default)
3F.0
3F.1
3F.2
3F.7
ON
3F.3
OFF
3F.4
OFF
3F.5
ON
3F.6
ON
3E.0
3E.1
3E.2
0
3E.3
3E.5
3E.6
3E.7
3E.4
SW3
0
NOTE:
1. For EVA chip, smart option is determined by DIP switch not software.
2. Please keep the reserved bits as default value (high).
Figure 22-3
DIP Switch for Smart Option
•
IDLE LED
This is LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E8S30) is in idle mode.
•
STOP LED
This LED is ON when the evaluation chip (S3E8S30) is in stop mode.
PS031305-1017
22-12
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 22. Development Tools
S3
1
24
VDD
P1.0
2
23
P0.0/ADC0/INT0
P1.1
3
22
P0.1/ADC1/INT1
RESET/P1.2
4
21
P0.2/ADC2/INT2/SCK
T0/P2.0
5
20
P0.3/ADC3/INT3/SDA
INT6/P3.2
6
19
P3.0/ADC11/INT4
INT7/P3.3
7
18
P3.1/ADC12/INT5
T1/P2.1
8
17
P0.4/ADC4
RxD/T1CAPP2.2
9
16
P0.5/ADC5/PWM1
TxD/P2.3
10
15
P0.6/ADC6/PWM0
ADC10/P2.4
11
14
P0.7/ADC7
ADC9/P2.5
12
13
P2.6/ADC8/CLO
Figure 22-4
24-PIN SOCKET
VSS
24-Pin Connector for TB8S19/8S28/8S39
Target Board
Target System
S3
24
24
12
13
Target Cable for 24-Pin Connector
12
13
Figure 22-5
PS031305-1017
1
24-Pin Connector
24-Pin Connector
1
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Probe Adapter for 24 Pin Package
22-13
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 22. Development Tools
22.3 Zilog Library-based Development Platform
The Zilog developer platform is a suite of low-cost highly-integrated software and hardware tools for any PC
running a supported version of Windows. The developer platform is composed of three components – the host
Integrated Development Environment (IDE) software, the S3 Flash In-System Programmer (ISP) II USB interface,
and a development board with a standard 10-pin ISP II connector. Together, these tools cost only a fraction of the
price of most other 3rd party compilers, programmers/ emulators, or target boards.
Features include:
•
Very low cost development tools
•
Easy setup
•
Source-level debugging using the application hardware board
22.3.1 Zilog Developer Platform Components
Figure 22-6 shows the simplicity of connecting all of the components of the Zilog developer platform.
Figure 22-6
Zilog Development Platform
22.3.1.1 ZDS IDE
The Zilog Developer Studio (ZDS) Integrated Development Environment (IDE) is a suite of software tools that run
on a Windows-based host PC. These tools include an editor used to create application programs in C or
assembly, a compiler, assembler, a linker used to convert the application source code into an executable program
image, and a debugger that allows the developer to single-step their application source code while it is executing
on the actual target HW platform.
ZDS is completely free of charge and available from the Zilog website. For more information about the features of
the ZDS IDE, please refer to the Zilog Developer Studio Help file integrated within the ZDS IDE by clicking the
Help Topics item available through the IDE’s Help menu, or by pressing F1 on the PC keyboard.
22.3.1.2 S3 Flash ISP II
The Zilog S3 Flash ISP II is a low cost hardware interface between the PC and the application board or Zilog
development board. The ISP II connects to the Windows PC through a USB cable and connects to the application
or development board through a 10-pin ribbon cable. ZDS uses the ISP II to access Flash memory on the S3
target for read, erase, and program operations. Additionally, ZDS can use the S3 Flash ISP II to debug
applications built with a Zilog-provided debug library.
22.3.1.3 Application/Development Board
The S3 Flash ISP II communicates with the S3 microcontroller on a Zilog development board, or a customer
application board, through a 10-pin ribbon cable. This requires the application or development board design to
PS031305-1017
22-14
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 22. Development Tools
include the components shown in Figure 22-7.
Figure 22-7
PCB Design Guide for In System Programming
Some S3 devices have a VPP/Test pin shared with a GPIO pin which can also be configured as the Reset pin.
When designing a PCB that requires In-System Programming support for S3 devices with a shared VPP/ Reset
pin, do not connect the Reset signal (pin 6) from the 10-pin ISP II connector to the S3 MCU. Instead, connect the
MCU VPP/ Reset pin to the Test/ VPP signal (pin 2) of the ISP II connector with RRST and CRST. In this instance, it
is not necessary to include RVPP or CVPP.
Table 22-7 shows the recommended values for the passive components in the ISP II circuit of Figure 22.6.
Table 22-7
ISP II Circuit Recommended Values
ISP Signal (Pin Number)
VPP/ Test (2)
Passive Component
CVPP = 0.1 uF
RVPP = 10K
VDD (4)
CVDD = 0.1 uF
Reset (6)
CRST = 0.1 uF
RRST = 40K
SDAT (8)
SCLK (10)
GND
(1,3,5,7,9)
Notes
If the S3 MCU has a shared VPP/Reset pin, connect the
ISP II
VPP/ Test pin to the MCU VPP/Test pin.
The ZDS IDE and S3 Flash ISP II cannot be used to
debug applications that use the GPIO pins associated
with the SCLK & SDAT signals. In this instance, it is only
possible to access Flash Memory in the target S3 MCU.
Connect all odd number pins of the ISP connector to
GND on the target board and S3 MCU
Refer to the schematic diagram in the appropriate Zilog Development Kit User Manual for a complete reference
design that includes an ISP II interface circuit applicable to a particular series of S3 devices. Zilog recommends
keeping the traces connecting SCLK and SDAT to the ISP II connector as short as possible.
PS031305-1017
22-15
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 22. Development Tools
22.3.2 Compatibility with 3rd Party Tools
The Zilog IDE can also be used with 3rd party development tools. For example, the ZDS IDE can program a Hex
file generated by a 3rd party compiler such as the IAR Embedded Workbench using the Zilog S3 Flash ISP II or a
3rd party programmer such as the OPENice-i2000 emulator. Information regarding 3rd party development tools can
be found in section 22.4.
22.3.3 Benefits and Limitations of Zilog Development Tools
Zilog development tools provide a low cost turnkey solution capable of creating and debugging S3 applications on
Zilog development boards or customer application boards. Debugging applications on a particular S3 target
typically requires the application to be built with a Zilog-provided debug library that is capable of interfacing with
the S3 Flash ISP II. The debug library consumes some amount of code space on the S3 target depending on the
set of debugging features supported by the particular debug library linked to the application.
The ZDS IDE and S3 Flash ISP II can be used to program Flash memory on all Zilog S3 microcontrollers;
however, single-step debugging support may not be available for every series of Zilog S3 microcontroller. For
more information regarding the debugging features available on a particular S3 microcontroller, refer to the S3 ISP
II Interface Debug Library chapter of the Zilog Developer Studio Help file available within the ZDS S3 IDE.
22.3.4 Development Tools
Zilog, in conjunction with third parties, provides a complete line of development tools that support the S3 Family of
Microcontrollers. With long experience in developing MCU systems, these third party firms are bonafide leaders in
MCU development tool technology.
In-Circuit Emulators
•
YIC – OPENice-i500/2000
OPENice-i500
YIC System
•
•
•
•
OPENice-i2000
YIC System
•
•
•
•
PS031305-1017
TEL: 82-31-278-0461
FAX: 82-31-278-0463
E-mail: support@yicsystem.com
URL: http://www.yicsystem.com
TEL: 82-31-278-0461
FAX: 82-31-278-0463
E-mail : support@yicsystem.com
URL: http://www.yicsystem.com
22-16
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 22. Development Tools
Zilog Library-based Development Tools
•
Zilog – S3USBISP000ZACG S3 Flash In-System Programmer (ISP) II
•
Zilog – S3F8S280100ZCOG S3F8S28/8S24 Development Kit
S3USBISP000ZACG
Zilog
•
•
•
•
S3F8S280100ZCOG
TEL: (408) 457-9000
FAX: (408) 416-0223
E-mail:s3sales@zilog.com
URL: http://www.zilog.com
Zilog
•
•
•
•
TEL: (408) 457-9000
FAX: (408) 416-0223
E-mail:s3sales@zilog.com
URL: http://www.zilog.com
Programmers (Writer)
•
Seminix – GW-uni2
•
C&A Tech – GW-Pro2
•
Elnec – BeeHive series
•
Zilog – S3 Flash ISP II
GW-uni2
Gang Programmer for OTP/MTP/FLASH MCU
Seminix
• Support all SAMSUNG OTP and MTP devices
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PS031305-1017
with SAMSUNG standard serial protocol format
Program up to 8 devices at one time
Operation mode: 1.PC base 2.Stand-alone (no
PC)
Very fast programming speed: OTP(2 Kbps)
MTP(10 Kbps)
Maximum buffer memory:100 Mbyte
Hex data file download via USB port from PC
Support simple GUI (Graphical User Interface)
Support data format: Intel hex, SAMSUNG hex,
Binary
Device information can be set by a device part
number
•
TEL: 82-31-703-7891
FAX: 82-31-702-7869
E-mail:
sales@seminix.com
URL:
http://www.seminix.com
22-17
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
Chapter 22. Development Tools
• LCD Display (Stand-alone mode operation)
- Display an operation state
• Touch key (Stand-alone mode operation)
• System upgradeable
- The system firmware can be upgraded simply
by user
GW-Pro Gang Programmer
C & A Technology
• Programming of 8 MCUs at a time
•
•
• Fast programming speed (2 Kbyte/sec)
• Possible without PC (standalone)
• Search operation based on a PC
•
• Enough features to support Gang Programmer
TEL: 02-2612-9027
E-mail :
jhc115@cnatech.com
URL:
http://www.cnatech.com
• Off data is also preserved
• Key Lock function to prevent malfunction
• Good and bad quantity counter
• Program completion notification (sound)
• Easy-to-use (PC) menu
Beehive204
Elnec
• Four independent universal programming sites
•
•
•
•
• Two BeeHive 204 multiprogrammers can be
•
•
•
•
•
•
PS031305-1017
attached to one PC to better utilize programming
workplace
Extremely fast programming, one of the fastest
programmers in this category. Sustainable
programming speed greater than 5 Mbytes per
second
Powerful independent pin driver circuit for each
and every pin of the programmer
In-circuit programming capability through ISP
connector
Very low voltage support for the latest Flash
memory chips
ESD protection on each pin of the socket’s USB
(up to 480 Mbit/s) interface to PC
Comfortable and easy-to-use control program;
works with all versions of MS Windows from
Windows XP to Windows 10 (32-bit and 64-bit)
TEL: +421-51-7734328
FAX: +421-51-7732797
E-mail:tech2@elnec.com
URL:
http://www.elnec.com
22-18
S3F8S28/S3F8S24 Product Specification
S3 Flash In-System Programmer II
Zilog’s S3 Flash ISP II provides an interface
between any development or application board with
an S3 microcontroller device to the high-speed USB
port of a PC on which Zilog Developer Studio II for
S3 Family devices (ZDS II – S3) is installed.
The ISP II allows the Flash memory space on any
S3 Family device to be programmed, and also offers
limited debugging capabilities when used together
with the Zilog Debug Library.
The following features are available with the S3
Flash ISP II when using ZDS II for S3 Family
devices:
• Download code to Flash and begin to program
execution
• Break program execution arbitrarily
• Single-step debugging of the application,
view/edit memory and S3 special function
registers. Resume normal program operation
after a breakpoint
• Insert multiple breakpoints in a program at
compile/assembly time
Chapter 22. Development Tools
Zilog
•
•
•
•
TEL: (408) 457-9000
FAX: (408) 416-0223
E-mail:
s3sales@zilog.com
URL:
http://www.zilog.com
To obtain the S3 Family development tools that will satisfy your S3F8S28/S3F8S24 development objectives,
contact your local Zilog Sales Office, or visit Zilog’s Third Party Tools page to review our list of third party tool
suppliers.
PS031305-1017
22-19
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
